LPIC-1 Linux Professional Institute Certification Practice Tests

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

LPIC-1

Linux Professional Institute

Certification

Practice Tests

Second Edition

Steven Suehring

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Published simultaneously in Canada

ISBN: 978-1-119-61109-7

ISBN: 978-1-119-61114-1 (ebk.)

ISBN: 978-1-119-61113-4 (ebk.)

Manufactured in the United States of America

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or

by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise, except as

permitted under Sections 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without either the prior

written permission of the Publisher, or authorization through payment of the appropriate per-copy fee to

the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, (978) 750-8400, fax (978)

646-8600. Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the Permissions Department,

John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ 07030, (201) 748-6011, fax (201) 748-6008, or

online at http://www.wiley.com/go/permissions.

Limit of Liability/Disclaimer of Warranty: The publisher and the author make no representations or

warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this work and specifically

disclaim all warranties, including without limitation warranties of fitness for a particular purpose. No

warranty may be created or extended by sales or promotional materials. The advice and strategies

contained herein may not be suitable for every situation. This work is sold with the understanding that

the publisher is not engaged in rendering legal, accounting, or other professional services. If professional

assistance is required, the services of a competent professional person should be sought. Neither the

publisher nor the author shall be liable for damages arising herefrom. The fact that an organization or

Web site is referred to in this work as a citation and/or a potential source of further information does not

mean that the author or the publisher endorses the information the organization or Web site may

provide or recommendations it may make. Further, readers should be aware that Internet Web sites

listed in this work may have changed or disappeared between when this work was written and when it is

read.

For general information on our other products and services or to obtain technical support, please contact

our Customer Care Department within the U.S. at (877) 762-2974, outside the U.S. at (317) 572-3993 or

fax (317) 572-4002.

Wiley publishes in a variety of print and electronic formats and by print-on-demand. Some material

included with standard print versions of this book may not be included in e-books or in print-on-demand.

If this book refers to media such as a CD or DVD that is not included in the version you purchased, you

may download this material at http://booksupport.wiley.com. For more information about Wiley

products, visit www.wiley.com.

Library of Congress Control Number: 2019949012

TRADEMARKS: Wiley, the Wiley logo, and the Sybex logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of

John Wiley & Sons, Inc. and/or its affiliates, in the United States and other countries, and may not be

used without written permission. ITIL is a registered trademark of Axelos Limited. All other trademarks

are the property of their respective owners. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. is not associated with any product or

vendor mentioned in this book.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Acknowledgments

Book writing tends to take attention away from other things in life. As I write

this and look at the overgrown jungle that is my backyard, it's time to reflect

and to find another project so I don't have to deal with whatever type of vine

has taken over my shed and is creeping towards the house.

Thank you first to Kenyon Brown and Carole Jelen for this (and other)

projects. Thank you also to the editors for this book, Kezia Endsley and David

Clinton. Their expertise and diligence is essential in order to make the book

the best it can be. Thank you to my family for their continued support. My

colleagues at University of Wisconsin- Stevens Point help provide guidance

and comic relief at times too.

As is the case for many books now, thank you to Jim, Patti, Tim, and Rob at

Partners Pub. Thank you also to Kent Laabs for his generosity and continued

help.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

About the Author

Steve Suehring is an assistant professor of computing and new media

technologies at University of Wisconsin—Stevens Point. Prior to joining the

faculty in 2015, Steve gained 20 years of field experience in a variety of

technical engineering, system and network administration, and system

architectural roles. Steve has written several books and has served as an

editor for LinuxWorld magazine.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

CONTENTS
Cover
Acknowledgments
About the Author
Introduction
Part I Exam 101-500
Chapter 1 Topic 101: System Architecture
Chapter 2 Topic 102: Linux Installation and Package Management
Chapter 3 Topic 103: GNU and UNIX Commands
Chapter 4 Topic 104: Devices, Linux Filesystems, Filesystem
Hierarchy Standard
Part II Exam 102-500
Chapter 5 Topic 105: Shells and Shell Scripting
Chapter 6 Topic 106: User Interfaces and Desktops
Chapter 7 Topic 107: Administrative Tasks
Chapter 8 Topic 108: Essential System Services
Chapter 9 Topic 109: Networking Fundamentals
Chapter 10 Topic 110: Security
Part III Practice Exams
Chapter 11 Practice Exam 1
Chapter 12 Practice Exam 2
Appendix Answers to Review Questions
Chapter 1: Topic 101: System Architecture
Chapter 2: Topic 102: Linux Installation and Package
Management
Chapter 3: Topic 103: GNU and UNIX Commands
Chapter 4: Topic 104: Devices, Linux Filesystems, Filesystem
Hierarchy Standard
Chapter 5: Topic 105: Shells and Shell Scripting
Chapter 6: Topic 106: User Interfaces and Desktops
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 7: Topic 107: Administrative Tasks

Chapter 8: Topic 108: Essential System Services

Chapter 9: Topic 109: Persistent Network Configuration

Chapter 10: Topic 110: Security

Chapter 11: Practice Exam 1

Chapter 12: Practice Exam 2

Index

Advert

End User License Agreement

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Introduction

This book provides practice questions for the Linux Professional Institute

LPIC-1 certification. Specifically, the book has been updated to reflect the

objectives for exams 101-500 and 102-500. The book includes numerous

multiple-choice questions related to the exam objectives found on the LPI

website.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

What Does This Book Cover?

Each chapter of the book connects directly to one of the objectives, and each

objective is covered throughout the book. In addition, two practice exams are

included in the book that you should find helpful in preparing for the exams.

The book does not require that you start at the beginning and read through in

a linear, page-by-page manner. Rather, you may skip to objective areas that

might be less familiar, and you can do so without losing any fidelity or

missing something from a previous chapter.

Who Should Read This Book

It is assumed that you would have a companion text for this book in order to

obtain deeper information on the given subjects for the exam. However, it is

possible to use this book as a stand-alone means for preparation.

Here are some basic assumptions about the audience for this book:

You have used Linux or are using the book to learn Linux.

You have used a computer for basic operations.

You will use the book as a means for practicing for the certification

exams.

How to Use This Book

This book is best used as a tool for testing your knowledge in the objective

domains specified for the exam. The book provides explanations for each

question, including, where applicable, explanations as to why the other

options were incorrect. Ideally, the book is used in conjunction with the

companion text in order to fully explain the concepts.

Certification Exam Policies

The Linux Professional Institute outlines various policies related to

certification and other similar matters. In addition, other policies applicable

may be through the testing facility or organization. More information on

some of the LPI policies can be found at www.lpi.org/policies.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Exam Objectives

The following lists contain the topics and weights for Exams 101 and 102. This

list follows the sequence in which they are covered in the book. You can find

more information about what is covered in each topic, including key

knowledge areas and files, terms, and utilities, at the start of the applicable

chapter.

Exam 101-500

Topic 101: System Architecture

101.1 Determine and configure hardware settings (weight 2).

101.2 Boot the system (weight 3).

101.3 Change runlevels/boot targets and shutdown or reboot system

(weight 3).

Topic 102: Linux Installation and Package Management

102.1 Design hard disk layout (weight 2).

102.2 Install a boot manager (weight 2).

102.3 Manage shared libraries (weight 1).

102.4 Use Debian package management (weight 3).

102.5 Use RPM and YUM package management (weight 3).

102.6 Linux as a virtualization guest (weight 1)

Topic 103: GNU and UNIX Commands

103.1 Work on the command line (weight 4).

103.2 Process text streams using filters (weight 2).

103.3 Perform basic file management (weight 4).

103.4 Use streams, pipes, and redirects (weight 4).

103.5 Create, monitor, and kill processes (weight 4).

103.6 Modify process execution priorities (weight 2).

103.7 Search text files using regular expressions (weight 3).

103.8 Basic file editing 3

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Topic 104: Devices, Linux Filesystems, Filesystem Hierarchy

Standard

104.1 Create partitions and filesystems (weight 2).

104.2 Maintain the integrity of filesystems (weight 2).

104.3 Control mounting and unmounting of filesystems (weight 3).

104.4 Removed

104.5 Manage file permissions and ownership (weight 3).

104.6 Create and change hard and symbolic links (weight 2).

104.7 Find system files and place files in the correct location (weight 2).

Exam 102-500

Topic 105: Shells and Shell Scripting

105.1 Customize and use the shell environment (weight 4).

105.2 Customize or write simple scripts (weight 4).

Topic 106: User Interfaces and Desktops

106.1 Install and configure X11 (weight 2).

106.2 Graphical desktops (weight 1)

106.3 Accessibility (weight 1)

Topic 107: Administrative Tasks

107.1 Manage user and group accounts and related system files (weight

5).

107.2 Automate system administration tasks by scheduling jobs (weight

4).

107.3 Localization and internationalization (weight 3)

Topic 108: Essential System Services

108.1 Maintain system time (weight 3).

108.2 System logging (weight 4)

108.3 Mail Transfer Agent (MTA) Basics (weight 3)

108.4 Manage printers and printing (weight 2).

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Topic 109: Networking Fundamentals

109.1 Fundamentals of Internet protocols (weight 4)

109.2 Persistent network configuration (weight 4)

109.3 Basic network troubleshooting (weight 4)

109.4 Configure client-side DNS (weight 2).

Topic 110: Security

110.1 Perform security administration tasks (weight 3).

110.2 Set up host security (weight 3).

110.3 Securing data with encryption (weight 4)

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

PART I

Exam 101-500

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 1

Topic 101: System Architecture

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

101.1 Determine and configure hardware settings.

Key knowledge areas:

Enable and disable integrated peripherals.

Differentiate between the various types of mass storage devices.

Determine hardware resources for devices.

Tools and utilities to list various hardware information (e.g.

lsusb, lspci, etc.)

Tools and utilities to manipulate USB devices

Conceptual understanding of sysfs, udev, and dbus

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/sys/

/proc/

/dev/

modprobe

lsmod

lspci

lsusb

101.2 Boot the system.

Key knowledge areas:

Provide common commands to the boot loader and options to

the kernel at boot time.

Demonstrate knowledge of the boot sequence from BIOS/UEFI

to boot completion.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Understand SysV init and systemd.

Awareness of Upstart

Check book events in the log files.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

dmesg

journalctl

BIOS

UEFI

bootloader

kernel

initramfs

init

SysV init

systemd

101.3 Change runlevels/boot targets and shut down or reboot

system.

Key knowledge areas:

Set the default runlevel or boot target.

Change between runlevels/boot targets including single-user

mode.

Shut down and reboot from the command line.

Alert users before switching runlevels/boot targets or other

major system events.

Properly terminate processes.

Awareness of acpid

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/inittab

shutdown

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

init

/etc/init.d/

telinit

systemd

systemctl

/etc/systemd/

/usr/lib/systemd/

wall

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. Which of the following commands is used to view kernel-related udev

events in real time?

A. udevls all

B. lsudev -f

C. udevmon -a

D. udevadm monitor

2. Which command enables you to view the current interrupt request (IRQ)

assignments?

A. view /proc/irq

B. cat /proc/interrupts

C. cat /dev/irq

D. less /dev/irq

3. Configuration of udev devices is done by working with files in which

directory?

A. /udev/devices

B. /devices/

C. /udev/config

D. /etc/udev

4. Which command is used to automatically load a module and its

dependencies?

A. modprobe

B. lsmod

C. insmod

D. rmmod

5. Which command is used to obtain a list of USB devices?

A. usb-list

B. lsusb

C. ls-usb

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. ls --usb

6. When working with hotplug devices, you need to gather more

information about them through udevadm. Which udevadm command

enables you to query the udev database for information on a device?

A. query

B. info

C. getinfo

D. devinfo

7. Which command can be used to view the kernel ring buffer in order to

troubleshoot the boot process?

A. lsboot

B. boot-log

C. krblog

D. dmesg

8. During the initialization process for a Linux system using SysV init,

which runlevel corresponds to single-user mode?

A. Runlevel 5

B. Runlevel SU

C. Runlevel 1

D. Runlevel 6

9. On a system using SysV init, in which directory are the startup and

shutdown scripts for services stored?

A. /etc/init-d

B. /etc/init

C. /etc/sysV

D. /etc/init.d

10. Which command can be used to reboot a system?

A. init 6

B. shutdown -h -t now

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. init 1

D. refresh-system

11. When using an SysV init-based system, which command would you use

if you make changes to the /etc/inittab file and want those changes to

be reloaded without a reboot?

A. init-refresh

B. init 6

C. telinit

D. reload-inittab

12. Which command displays the current runlevel for a system?

A. show-level

B. init --level

C. sudo init

D. runlevel

13. Within which folder are systemd unit configuration files stored?

A. /etc/system.conf.d

B. /lib/system.conf.d

C. /lib/systemd/system

D. /etc/sysconfd

14. Which command is used with systemd in order to list the available

service units?

A. systemd list-units

B. systemctl list-units

C. systemd unit-list

D. systemctl show-units

15. Which option to lspci is used to display both numeric codes and device

names?

A. -numdev

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. -n

C. -nn

D. -devnum

16. Which command can be used to obtain a list of currently loaded kernel

modules?

A. insmod

B. modlist

C. ls --modules

D. lsmod

17. Which option to the modprobe command shows the dependencies for a

given module?

A. --show-options

B. --list-deps

C. --show-depends

D. --list-all

18. Which command can you use to send a message to all users who are

currently logged into a system?

A. cat

B. wall

C. tee

D. ssh

19. Which of the following is a good first troubleshooting step when a hard

disk is not detected by the Linux kernel?

A. Unplug the disk.

B. Check the system BIOS.

C. Restart the web server service.

D. Run the disk-detect command.

20. Within which directory is information about USB devices stored?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. /etc/usbdevices

B. /var/usb

C. /lib/sys/usb

D. /sys/bus/usb/devices

21. If the kernel ring buffer has been overwritten, within which file can you

look to find boot messages?

A. /var/log/bootmessages

B. /var/log/mail.info

C. /var/adm/log/boot.info

D. /var/log/dmesg

22. Which command and option can be used to determine whether a given

service is currently loaded?

A. systemctl --ls

B. telinit

C. systemctl status

D. sysctl -a

23. Which command on a systemd-controlled system would place the system

into single-user mode?

A. systemctl one

B. systemctl isolate rescue.target

C. systemctl single-user

D. systemctl runlevel one

24. Which command on a system controlled by Upstart will reload the

configuration files?

A. initctl reload

B. systemd reload

C. upstart --reload

D. ups -reload

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

25. When working with a SysV system, which option to chkconfig will

display all services and their runlevels?

A. --reload

B. --list

C. --all

D. --ls

26. A drive connected to USB is considered which type of device?

A. Medium

B. Coldplug

C. Hotplug

D. Sideplug

27. The system is using a temporary flash USB disk for data mounted at

/dev/sda1. You need to remove the disk. Which of the following

commands will enable the disk to be safely removed from the system?

A. usbstop /dev/sda

B. umount /dev/sda1

C. unmount /dev/sda1

D. dev-eject /dev/sda1

28. You have connected a USB disk to the system and need to find out its

connection point within the system. Which of the following is the best

method for accomplishing this task?

A. Rebooting the system

B. Viewing the contents of /var/log/usb.log

C. Connecting the drive to a USB port that you know the number of

D. Running dmesg and looking for the disk

29. Which of the following commands will initiate an immediate shutdown

of the system?

A. shutdown -c

B. halt

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. systemd stop

D. stop-system

30. Which option within a systemd service file indicates the program to

execute?

A. StartProgram

B. ShortCut

C. ExecStart

D. Startup

31. Which command will display the default target on a computer running

systemd?

A. systemctl defaults

B. update-rc.d defaults

C. systemctl runlevel

D. systemctl get-default

32. Which option to the systemctl command will change a service so that it

runs on the next boot of the system?

A. enable

B. startonboot

C. loadonboot

D. start

33. Which of the following best describes the /proc filesystem?

A. /proc contains information about files to be processed.

B. /proc contains configuration files for processes.

C. /proc contains information on currently running processes,

including the kernel.

D. /proc contains variable data such as mail and web files.

34. Which command will retrieve information about the USB connections on

a computer in a tree-like format?

A. lsusb -tree

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. lsusb --tree

C. lsusb -t

D. usblist --tree

35. What is one reason why a device driver does not appear in the output of

lsmod, even though the device is loaded and working properly?

A. The use of systemd means that drivers are not required for most

devices.

B. The use of initramfs means that support is enabled by default.

C. The system does not need a driver for the device.

D. Support for the device has been compiled directly into the kernel.

36. Which option to rmmod will cause the module to wait until it’s no longer

in use to unload the module?

A. -test

B. -f

C. -w

D. -unload

37. You are using a storage area network (SAN) that keeps causing errors on

your Linux system due to an improper kernel module created by the SAN

vendor. When the SAN sends updates, it causes the filesystem to be

mounted as read-only. Which command and option can you use to

change the behavior of the filesystem to account for the SAN bug?

A. mount --continue

B. tune2fs -e continue

C. mkfs --no-remount

D. mount -o remount

38. Within which directory are rules related to udev stored?

A. /etc/udev.conf

B. /etc/udev.conf.d

C. /etc/udev/rules.d

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. /etc/udev.d

39. Which option to lspci displays the kernel driver in use for the given

Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) device?

A. -t

B. -k

C. -n

D. -a

40. Within which of the following directories will you find blacklist

information for modules loaded with modprobe?

A. /etc/blacklist

B. /etc/modprobe.d

C. /etc/blacklist.mod

D. /etc/modprobe

41. When working with a CentOS 6 system, which command is used to create

the initial RAM disk?

A. mkinit

B. dracut

C. mkraminit

D. mkinitfs

42. Within which file will you find a list of the currently available kernel

symbols?

A. /proc/kernelsyms

B. /etc/kernel.conf

C. /etc/lsyms

D. /proc/kallsyms

43. Which of the following commands can be used to show the various

information related to a currently loaded module, including core size and

settings for options?

A. systool -v -m <module>

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. modinfo -r <module>

C. lsmod <module>

D. infmod <module>

44. Which directory contains various elements and configuration

information about the kernel such as the release number, domain name,

location of modprobe, and other settings?

A. /proc/sys/kmod

B. /proc/sys/kernel

C. /proc/kernel

D. /proc/kernel/sys

45. Within which directory should systemd unit files that you create be

stored?

A. /etc/system

B. /etc/systemd/system

C. /usr/share/systemd

D. /usr/share/system

46. Which of the following commands should you execute after making

changes to systemd service configurations in order for those changes to

take effect?

A. systemd reload

B. reboot

C. systemctl daemon-reload

D. systemctl reboot

47. Which of the following files contains the runlevels for the system along

with a reference to the corresponding rc file?

A. /etc/runlevels

B. /etc/inittab

C. /etc/rc

D. /etc/runlevel

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

48. Which boot loader can be used for File Allocation Table (FAT)

filesystems and might be used for a rescue disk?

A. SYSBOOT

B. SYSLINUX

C. TIELINUX

D. FATLINUX

49. Which of the following is used to provide an early filesystem-based

loading process for key drivers needed to continue the boot process?

A. bootrd

B. driverload

C. initrd

D. initdrv

50. When booting a system you receive an error similar to "No init found"

and are then placed at an initramfs prompt. You need to check the hard

drive for errors. Which of the following commands performs an error

check on a hard drive partition in Linux?

A. defrag

B. fsck

C. checkfs

D. chkfs

51. Which of the following commands places the system in single-user

mode?

A. tellinit 1

B. chginit 1

C. telinet 1

D. telinit 1

52. Which of the following commands changes the boot order for the next

boot?

A. efibootmgr -c

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. efibootmgr -b -B

C. efibootmgr -o

D. efibootmgr -n

53. Which boot loader can be used with ISO9660 CD-ROMS?

A. ISOLINUX

B. EFIBOOT

C. ISOFS

D. BOOTISO

54. Within which directory are systemd user unit files placed by installed

packages?

A. /usr/lib/systemd/user

B. /usr/lib/systemd/system

C. /usr/systemd

D. /usr/system

55. When using Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI), which of the

following files can be used as a boot loader?

A. shim.uefi

B. shim.efi

C. shim.fx

D. efi.shim

56. Which directory on a SysV init-based system contains scripts that are

used for starting and stopping services?

A. /etc/rc.int

B. /etc/boot

C. /etc/bootscripts

D. /etc/init.d

57. Which of the following commands is used to find overriding

configuration files on a systemd-based system?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. diff

B. systemctl -diff

C. systemd-delta

D. systemctl configoverride

58. Which of the following commands on a Red Hat system lists all of the

SysV services set to be executed on boot along with their setting for each

runlevel?

A. rlevel

B. chkconfig --list

C. bootldr --list

D. init --bootlist

59. Which of the following commands, executed from within the UEFI shell,

controls the boot configuration?

A. bootcfg

B. bcfg

C. grub-install

D. grcfg

60. Which file must exist within /tftpboot on the Trivial File Transfer

Protocol (TFTP) server for a system that will use PXELINUX for its boot

loader?

A. pxelinux.tftp

B. pxelinux.boot

C. pxelinux.conf

D. pxelinux.0

61. Which utility can you use on a Debian or Ubuntu system to manage SysV

init scripts, such as setting them to run on boot?

A. bootorder

B. bootloader

C. configchk

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. update-rc.d

62. Which key, pressed during the operating system selection menu, is used

to enable editing of the parameters related to boot with GRUB?

A. v

B. e

C. r

D. y

63. Which systemctl subcommand is used to switch runlevels?

A. switch

B. move

C. runlevel

D. isolate

64. When examining the /etc/inittab file, which option signifies the default

runlevel to which the system will boot?

A. default

B. defaultboot

C. initdefault

D. defaultlvl

65. Which of the following is used instead of initrd to provide an early

filesystem for essential drivers?

A. initnext

B. initramfs

C. initialize

D. initfs

66. Which of the following commands sets the default systemd target to

multi-user?

A. systemctl set-default multi-user.target

B. systemd set-default multi-user.target

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. systemctl set-def muser.target

D. systemd set-def muser.target

67. When using a shim for booting a UEFI-based system, which of the

following files is loaded after shim.efi?

A. grubx64.cfg

B. grub.conf

C. grubx64.efi

D. efi.boot

68. Within which hierarchy are files from /etc/init.d linked so that the files

are executed during the various runlevels of a SysV system?

A. /etc/rc.S

B. /etc/rc

C. /etc/boot/rc

D. /etc/rc.d

69. What is the name of the unit to which a systemd system is booted in

order to start other levels?

A. default.target

B. init.target

C. initial.target

D. load.target

70. When viewing information in /dev/disk/by-path using the command ls

-l, which of the following filenames represents a logical unit number

(LUN) from Fibre Channel?

A. /dev/fc0

B. pci-0000:1a:00.0-fc-0x500601653ee0025f:0x0000000000000000

C. pci-0000:1a:00.0-scsi-0x500601653ee0025f:0x0000000000000000

D. /dev/fibre0

71. You have purchased new solid-state drive (SSD) hardware that uses the

NVMe (Non-Volatile Memory Express) protocol but cannot find the disks

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

in the normal /dev/sd* location in which you have traditionally found

such storage. In which location should you look for these drives?

A. /dev/nd*

B. /dev/nvme*

C. /dev/nv*

D. /dev/nvme/*

72. Which file contains information about the current md Redundant Array of

Inexpensive Disks (RAID) configuration such as the personalities?

A. /proc/raidinfo

B. /proc/rhyinfo

C. /proc/mdraid

D. /proc/mdstat

73. Which of the following directory hierarchies contains information such

as the World Wide Name (WWN) for Fibre Channel?

A. /sys/class/wwn

B. /sys/class/fc_host

C. /sys/class/fclist

D. /sys/class/fc/wwn

74. Information about logical volumes can be found in which of the

following directories?

A. /dev/lvinfo

B. /dev/map

C. /dev/mapper

D. /dev/lvmap

75. Which of the following commands will examine the PCI subsystem for

NVMe-based devices?

A. psnvme

B. lsnvme

C. lspci | grep scsi

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. lspci | grep -i nvme

76. Which of the following devices is the location of the first Small Computer

System Interface (SCSI) tape device detected at boot?

A. /dev/st1

B. /dev/sd0

C. /dev/sd1

D. /dev/st0

77. Which of the following files should be used to display a message to users

prior to logging in locally?

A. /etc/loginmesg

B. /etc/logmessage.txt

C. /etc/issue

D. /etc/banner

78. Which file contains a message that is displayed after a successful login?

A. /etc/loginbanner

B. /etc/issue

C. /etc/motd

D. /etc/message

79. Which of the following files can be used to provide a message to users

logging in remotely with a protocol such as telnet?

A. /etc/telnet.msg

B. /etc/issue.net

C. /etc/login.msg

D. /etc/telnet.login

80. Which of the following commands turns off the computer, including

removing power, if possible?

A. systemctl halt

B. systemctl reboot

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. systemctl stop

D. systemctl poweroff

81. Which of the following shutdown commands reboots the system in 15

minutes?

A. shutdown -r +15

B. shutdown +15

C. shutdown -15

D. shutdown -r 00:15

82. When terminating a process on a SysV init-based system, which

command can be used to stop the process?

A. service

B. sysv

C. syscl

D. servc

83. Which of the following commands show the boot messages captured by

systemd?

A. journalctl -b

B. systemctl -b

C. journalctl -bm

D. journalctl -l

84. Which option to the shutdown command halts or stops the system?

A. -h

B. -s

C. -f

D. -t

85. Which signal number is used as SIGKILL when used with the kill

command?

A. 1

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. 4

C. 9

D. 11

86. Which directory contains rc-related startup scripts on a legacy Debian

system?

A. /etc/init

B. /etc/inittab

C. /etc/init.d

D. /etc/rc.init

87. When attempting to enable an integrated peripheral on a basic

input/output system (BIOS) system, what should be done to determine

whether the peripheral has been enabled within the BIOS?

A. Examine boot messages to determine if the kernel has detected the

peripheral.

B. Examine /var/log/auth.log for detection of the peripheral.

C. Reboot the system to determine if the device works.

D. Enable the peripheral by removing it from the blacklisted modules.

88. Which option to the wall command suppresses the "Broadcast message"

banner that normally displays?

A. -b

B. -a

C. -n

D. -d

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 2

Topic 102: Linux Installation and Package

Management

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

102.1 Design hard disk layout.

Key knowledge areas:

Allocate filesystems and swap space to separate partitions or

disks.

Tailor the design to the intended use of the system.

Ensure the /boot partition conforms to the hardware

architecture requirements for booting.

Knowledge of basic features of LVM

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/(root) filesystem

/var filesystem

/home filesystem

/boot filesystem

EFI System Partition (ESP)

swap space

mount points

partitions

102.2 Install a boot manager.

Key knowledge areas:

Provide alternative boot locations and backup boot options.

Install and configure a boot loader such as GRUB Legacy.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Perform basic configuration changes for GRUB2.

Interact with the boot loader.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

menu.lst, grub.cfg, and grub.conf

grub-install

grub-mkconfig

MBR

102.3 Manage shared libraries.

Key knowledge areas:

Identify shared libraries.

Identify the typical locations of system libraries.

Load shared libraries.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

ldd

ldconfig

/etc/ld.so.conf

LD_LIBRARY_PATH

102.4 Use Debian package management.

Key knowledge areas:

Install, upgrade, and uninstall Debian binary packages.

Find packages containing specific files or libraries which may or

may not be installed.

Obtain package information like version, content, dependencies,

package integrity, and installation status (whether or not the

package is installed).

Awareness of apt

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/apt/sources.list

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

dpkg

dpkg-reconfigure

apt-get

apt-cache

102.5 Use RPM and yum package management.

Key knowledge areas:

Install, re-install, upgrade, and remove packages using RPM,

yum, and zypper.

Obtain information on RPM packages such as version, status,

dependencies, integrity, and signatures.

Determine what files a package provides, as well as find which

package a specific file comes from.

Awareness of dnf

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

rpm

rpm2cpio

/etc/yum.conf

/etc/yum.repos.d/

yum

zypper

102.6 Linux as a virtualization guest

Key knowledge areas:

Understand the general concept of virtual machines and

containers.

Understand common elements of virtual machines in an IaaS

cloud, such as computing instances, block storage, and

networking.

Understand unique properties of a Linux system that have to

change when a system is cloned or used as a template.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Understand how system images are used to deploy virtual

machines, cloud instances, and containers.

Understand Linux extensions that integrate Linux with a

virtualization product.

Awareness of cloud-init

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

Virtual machine

Linux container

Application container

Guest drivers

SSH host keys

D-Bus machine id

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. A Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk will use which of

the following identifiers?

A. /dev/hdX

B. /dev/sataX

C. /dev/sdX

D. /disk/sataX

2. Which option given at boot time within the GRUB configuration will boot

the system into single-user mode?

A. single-user

B. su

C. single

D. root

3. During boot of a system with GRUB, which key can be pressed to display

the GRUB menu?

A. Shift

B. E

C. V

D. H

4. When booting, which option can be added to a GRUB configuration line

to set or change the root partition at boot time to /dev/sda2?

A. rootpartition={hd0,2}

B. root=/dev/sda2

C. root={hd0,3}

D. rootpartition=/dev/sda2

5. Which key combination will enable you to edit the kernel options and

then boot when using GRUB Legacy?

A. ESC for editing and then Return to boot

B. v for editing and then Return to boot

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. e for editing and then b to boot

D. v for editing and then b to boot

6. During the boot process for a virtual machine, what is the next step in

the boot process after the kernel has taken over the initialization process

and initializes devices?

A. The system BIOS initializes devices.

B. The system is placed in multi-user mode.

C. The boot loader initializes the kernel.

D. The root partition is mounted.

7. Where in the filesystem will the EFI system partition (ESP) typically be

mounted?

A. /etc/efi

B. /efi

C. /sys/efi

D. /boot/efi

8. When partitioning a disk for a mail server running postfix, which

partition/mounted directory should be the largest in order to allow for

mail storage?

A. /etc

B. /usr/bin

C. /mail

D. /var

9. Which option within GRUB Legacy is used to indicate that a root

partition contains a non-Linux kernel?

A. initrd

B. non-linux

C. rootnoverify

D. root-win

10. Which command will output a new GRUB2 configuration file and send

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

the output to the correct location for booting?

A. update-grub > /boot/grub/grub.cfg

B. update-grub boot > /boot/grub.cfg

C. grub-rc.d

D. grub-boot

11. What is the maximum number of primary partitions available on an

MBR partitioning system?

A. 2

B. 4

C. 1

D. 5

12. Which command is used to update the links and cache for shared

libraries on the system?

A. ldcache

B. cache-update

C. link-update

D. ldconfig

13. Which command and option is used to update a Debian system to the

latest software?

A. apt-update

B. apt-get upgrade

C. dpkg -U

D. apt-cache clean

14. Which option given to a yum command will install a given package?

A. update

B. configure

C. install

D. get

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

15. What is the location of the home directory for the root user?

A. /home/root

B. /home/su

C. /root

D. /

16. When using rpm2cpio, by default the output is sent to which location?

A. STDOUT

B. The cpio.out file

C. The a.out file

D. The /tmp/cpi.out file

17. Which partition or directory structure typically holds most of the

programs for a Linux system?

A. /etc

B. /usr

C. /home

D. /var

18. Your GRUB Legacy configuration includes a dual-boot option with Linux

listed first and another operating system listed second. Which of the

following options will boot to the Linux partition by default?

A. default=linux

B. default=0

C. default=1

D. default=other

19. Which file should you edit when using GRUB2 in order to set things like

the timeout?

A. /etc/default/grub

B. /etc/grub/boot

C. /etc/boot/grub.d

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. /grub.d/boot

20. Which yum option displays the dependencies for the package specified?

A. list

B. deplist

C. dependencies

D. listdeps

21. Which options for an rpm command will display verbose output for an

installation along with progress of the installation?

A. -ivh

B. -wvh

C. --avh

D. --ins-verbose

22. Which of the following commands adds /usr/local/lib to the

LD_LIBRARY_PATH when using BASH shell?

A. set PATH=/usr/local/lib

B. export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LD_LIBRARY_PATH:/usr/local/lib

C. LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/usr/local/lib

D. connectpath LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/usr/local/lib

23. Which command can be used to download an RPM package without

installing it?

A. yumdl

B. yumdownloadonly

C. yumdown

D. yumdownloader

24. Which command will search for a package named zsh on a Debian

system?

A. apt-cache search zsh

B. apt-get search zsh

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. apt-cache locate zsh

D. apt search zsh

25. Which option within /etc/default/grub is used to configure the default

operating system for boot?

A. GRUB_OS

B. GRUB_ON

C. GRUB_DEFAULT

D. DEFAULT_OS

26. When found in a GRUB configuration file, what does the ro option

indicate?

A. Initially mount the root partition as read-only.

B. Mount the kernel as read-only.

C. Start the init program as read-once.

D. Mount the root partition in Raised Object mode.

27. Within which directory will you find the repositories used by yum?

A. /etc/yum.conf

B. /etc/repos

C. /etc/yum.conf.d

D. /etc/yum.repos.d

28. Which rpm option can be used to verify that no files have been altered

since installation?

A. -V

B. -v

C. --verbose

D. --filesum

29. Which option for the grub-mkconfig command sends output to a file

instead of STDOUT?

A. -stdout

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. --fileout

C. -o

D. -f

30. The presence of menu.lst within the filesystem typically indicates which

condition?

A. GRUB Legacy is in use on the system.

B. GRUB2 is in use on the system.

C. An error has occurred creating the output to menu.lst.

D. The options for rescue boot have been changed.

31. Which command is used to determine the libraries on which a given

command depends?

A. ldconfig

B. librarylist

C. listdeps

D. ldd

32. Which of the following is true of Linux swap space?

A. Swap is used to hold temporary database tables.

B. Swap is used as additional memory when there is insufficient RAM.

C. Swap is used by the mail server for security.

D. Swap is used to scrub data from the network temporarily.

33. Which of the following is not typically used to store libraries?

A. /lib

B. /etc/lib

C. /usr/lib

D. /usr/local/lib

34. Which of the following commands updates the package cache for a

Debian system?

A. apt-get cache-update

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. apt-cache update

C. apt-get update

D. apt-get upgrade

35. Within which file are details of the current package repositories stored

on a Debian system?

A. /etc/apt.list

B. /etc/sources.list

C. /etc/apt/sources.list

D. /etc/apt.d/sources.list

36. Of the following choices, which size would be most appropriate for the

/boot partition of a Linux system?

A. Between 100MB and 500MB

B. Between 1GB and 10GB

C. /boot should not be partitioned separately.

D. Less than 5MB

37. Which of the following commands initializes a physical disk partition for

use with Logical Volume Manager (LVM)?

A. lvmcreate

B. pvcreate

C. fvcreate

D. lvinit

38. Which of the following commands installs GRUB into the MBR of the

second SATA disk?

A. grub-install /dev/hdb2

B. grub-install /dev/sda2

C. grub-config /dev/sda

D. grub-install /dev/sdb

39. Which command should be used to make changes to the choices made

when a Debian package was installed?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. dpkg-reconfigure

B. dpkg -r

C. dpkg --reconf

D. apt-get reinstall

40. Which command is used to create a logical volume with LVM?

A. pvcreate

B. lvmcreate

C. lvcreate

D. volcreate

41. What is the logical order for creation of an LVM logical volume?

A. Physical volume creation, volume group creation, logical volume

creation

B. Physical volume creation, logical volume creation, volume group

creation

C. Logical volume creation, physical volume creation, volume group

creation

D. LVM creation, format, partition

42. Which of the Debian package management tools provides a terminal-

based interface for management?

A. apt-get

B. dpkg

C. apt-cache

D. aptitude

43. Which option for yum performs a search of the package cache?

A. seek

B. query

C. --search

D. search

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

44. Which command option for rpm can be used to show the version of the

kernel?

A. rpm kernel

B. rpm -qa kernel

C. rpm search kernel

D. rpm --list kern

45. Assuming a menu entry of Debian in your GRUB configuration, which

option in /etc/default/grub would set that as the default operating

system to boot?

A. GRUB_OS

B. GRUB_OS_DEF

C. GRUB_DEFAULT

D. GRUB_CONF

46. Which option in /etc/yum.conf is used to ensure that the kernel is not

updated when the system is updated?

A. exclude=kernel*

B. exclude-kernel

C. updatekernel=false

D. include-except=kernel

47. Which command should be run after making a change to the

/etc/default/grub file?

A. grub

B. grub-mkconfig

C. grub-inst

D. reboot

48. Which command searches for and provides information on a given

package on a Debian system, including whether or not the package is

currently installed?

A. dpkg -i

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. dpkg -s

C. apt-cache

D. apt-info

49. Which command is used to search for physical volumes for use with

LVM?

A. lvmcreate

B. pvcreate

C. lvmdiskscan

D. lvmscan

50. Which option added to yumdownloader will also download dependencies?

A. --deps

B. --resolve

C. --resdeps

D. -d

51. Which of the following installs a previously downloaded Debian package?

A. dpkg -i <package name>

B. apt-install <package name>

C. apt-slash <package name>

D. dpkg -U <package name>

52. A hard drive is reported as hd(0,0) by the GRUB Legacy configuration

file. To which of the following disks and partitions does this correspond?

A. /dev/hdb2

B. /dev/hda0

C. /dev/disk1

D. /dev/sda1

53. Which filesystem format type is used for the EFI System Partition (ESP)?

A. FAT

B. EXT4

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. NTFS

D. EXT3

54. Which of the following commands installs extlinux into the /boot

partition?

A. extlinux --install /boot

B. extlinux --inst /boot

C. extlinux -boot

D. extlinux /boot install

55. Which of the following commands mounts /dev/sda1 in the /boot

partition?

A. mount /dev/sda /boot

B. mount /boot /dev/sda1

C. mount /dev/sda1 /boot

D. mount -dev sda1 /boot

56. Which of the following can be identified as an initial sector on a disk that

stores information about the disk partitioning and operating system

location?

A. Minimal boot record (MBR)

B. Master boot record (MBR)

C. Init sector

D. Master partition table (MPT)

57. Which option to grub-install will place the GRUB images into an

alternate directory?

A. --boot-dir

B. -b

C. -boot

D. --boot-directory

58. Within which file is a list of the currently mounted filesystems stored?

A. /etc/fstab

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. /etc/curmount

C. /var/spool/files

D. /etc/mtab

59. Which command is used to activate swap space on a system?

A. mkswap

B. swapon

C. swapact

D. actswap

60. Which of the following commands displays information about a given

physical volume in an LVM setup?

A. pvdisp

B. pvlist

C. pvdisplay

D. pvl

61. Which of the following commands creates a logical volume with LVM?

A. lvc

B. lvcreate

C. lvlist

D. lvmake

62. Which of the following commands looks for LVM physical volumes and

volume groups involved in an LVM configuration?

A. vgscan

B. lvmscan

C. lvlist

D. pvlist

63. Which of the following commands is used to display a list of physical

volumes involved in LVM?

A. pvdisp

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. pvlist

C. pvscan

D. pvmm

64. Which option to lvchange sets whether the logical volume is available?

A. -a

B. -b

C. -c

D. -d

65. When working with a script to create directories, the script is checking to

see if srv/vhosts exists. When doing an ls of the root directory, /, you

see that it does exist. However, the script does not. What might be the

issue?

A. The script is not executable.

B. The script does not have the setuid bit set.

C. The script is using a relative path.

D. The script is owned by root.

66. You are architecting an application and need to choose between

application containerization and virtualization. Which of the following

describes a difference between application containers and a virtual

machine?

A. An application container can contain only one application whereas a

virtual machine can contain many.

B. An application container shares the host kernel whereas a virtual

machine can have its own kernel.

C. An application container is used for small applications whereas a

virtual machine is used for large applications.

D. The use of application containers is for testing only whereas a virtual

machine is used for production.

67. In addition to including /lib and /usr/lib, where does ldconfig look to

find additional directories to incorporate into the library path?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. /etc/lib.conf

B. /etc/ldconf

C. /etc/lib.cfg

D. /etc/ld.so.conf

68. You are working with a cloud instance virtual machine deployed with an

Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS) provider. The virtual machine is

running slowly. Which type of resource might you add to the cloud

instance in order to improve performance?

A. Compute

B. Block storage

C. Networking

D. Disk

69. When working with a system to determine if it is using GRUB or GRUB2,

the presence of which file indicates that it is GRUB2?

A. grub.cfg

B. grub.conf

C. menu.lst

D. grub2.conf

70. You are working to create a system image or template from which other

virtual machines will be deployed. Which of the following represents a

unique item that will change with each deployed virtual host or image?

A. System directories

B. MAC address

C. Guest drivers

D. Pilot homing

71. Which program can be used to deploy an Ubuntu image to a remote

cloud provider?

A. dep-image

B. cloud-init

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. init-cloud

D. image-dep

72. Which file is used as the primary configuration file for the yum package

manager?

A. /etc/yum.cfg

B. /etc/yum.d

C. /etc/yum.conf

D. /etc/yum.config

73. Which of the following commands and options lists all of the files

included with a package on a Debian system?

A. apt -L

B. dpkg -L

C. dpkg -f

D. apt-get show

74. When working with SSH (Secure Shell) keys for a virtual machine cloud

deployment, which key is deployed to the virtual machine so that you can

connect from the host?

A. The public key

B. The signature file

C. The private key

D. Both the public and private keys

75. When using a GPT disk, which partition needs to be created for a Linux

system to boot?

A. /boot/efi

B. /boot/gpt

C. /gpt

D. /vmgpt

76. Which option to zypper installs a package?

A. install

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. retr

C. get

D. ref

77. You are working with a Fedora 22 system and need to install a package.

Which of the following is the default package manager on this system?

A. yum

B. apt

C. dpkg

D. dnf

78. You need to list the files available on a package on CentOS. Which of the

following commands accomplishes this task?

A. repoquery -l

B. pkgquery -l

C. dpkg -L

D. pkglist

79. You need to create a backup of user home directories including root.

Which directory or directories need to be included in the backup?

A. /home

B. /home and /home/root

C. /home and /root

D. /home and /root/home

80. In which file can you find the unique D-Bus machine ID for a given

system?

A. /etc/machine-id

B. /etc/machineID

C. /etc/mch.conf

D. /etc/machine.id.conf

81. Which option to ldconfig can be used to process only those directories

given on the command line rather than the directories found in

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

/etc/ld.so.conf?

A. -n

B. -i

C. -v

D. -r

82. When working with package caches on Debian, you need to determine if

the package list is being updated. Which option to apt-cache shows the

number of available packages on the system?

A. packagenum

B. status

C. stats

D. liststatus

83. Which option to grub-install specifies the directory in which the EFI

partition is located?

A. --boot-dir

B. --efi

C. --efi-boot

D. --efi-directory

84. Within which file are mount points for the system stored?

A. /etc/fstab

B. /etc/mtab

C. /etc/partitions.list

D. /etc/disk.conf

85. Which of the following option sets for rpm lists the files within the

package?

A. lf

B. qlp

C. qf

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. eps

86. When working with a CentOS system, you need to determine the release

of a certain package. Which command and option will accomplish this

task?

A. dpkg -i

B. yum info

C. yum search

D. apt search

87. You are using a host machine and are unsure if it supports the extensions

to enable virtualization. Which of the following should you look for in

/proc/cpuinfo to indicate that the system is ready for virtualization?

A. vmx

B. virt

C. envirt

D. vtcapable

88. Within which file can you configure a filter for devices when using

vgscan?

A. lvm.conf

B. vg.conf

C. vgscan.conf

D. lv.cfg

89. Which of the following swapon options displays information on the size of

swap space along with its used space?

A. --list

B. -a

C. --show

D. -h

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 3

Topic 103: GNU and UNIX Commands

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

103.1 Work on the command line.

Key knowledge areas:

Use single shell commands and one-line command sequences to

perform basic tasks on the command line.

Use and modify the shell environment including defining,

referencing, and exporting environment variables.

Use and edit command history.

Invoke commands inside and outside the defined path.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

bash

echo

env

export

pwd

set

unset

type

which

man

uname

history

.bash_history

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Quoting

103.2 Process text streams using filters.

Key knowledge areas:

Send text files and output streams through text utility filters to

modify the output using standard UNIX commands found in the

GNU textutils package.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

bzcat

cat

cut

head

less

md5sum

paste

sed

sha256sum

sha512sum

sort

split

tail

uniq

xzcat

zcat

103.3 Perform basic file management.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Key knowledge areas:

Copy, move, and remove files and directories individually.

Copy multiple files and directories recursively.

Remove files and directories recursively.

Use simple and advanced wildcard specifications in commands.

Use find to locate and act on files based on type, size, or time.

Use tar, cpio, and dd.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

find

mkdir

rmdir

touch

tar

cpio

file

gzip

gunzip

bzip2

bunzip2

unxz

file globbing

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

103.4 Use streams, pipes, and redirects.

Key knowledge areas:

Redirect standard input, standard output, and standard error.

Pipe the output of one command to the input of another

command.

Use the output of one command as arguments to another

command.

Send output to both stdout and a file.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

tee

xargs

103.5 Create, monitor, and kill processes.

Key knowledge areas:

Run jobs in the foreground and background.

Signal a program to continue running after logout.

Monitor active processes.

Select and sort processes for display.

Send signals to processes.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

jobs

kill

nohup

top

free

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

uptime

pgrep

pkill

killall

watch

screen

tmux

103.6 Modify process execution priorities.

Key knowledge areas:

Know the default priority of a job that is created.

Run a program with higher or lower priority than the default.

Change the priority of a running process.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

nice

renice

top

103.7 Search text files using regular expressions.

Key knowledge areas:

Create simple regular expressions containing several notational

elements.

Understand the differences between basic and extended regular

expressions.

Understand the concepts of special characters, character classes,

quantifiers, and anchors.

Use regular expression tools to perform searches through a

filesystem or file content.

Use regular expressions to delete, change, and substitute text.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

grep

egrep

fgrep

sed

regex(7)

103.8 Basic file editing

Key knowledge areas:

Navigate a document using vi.

Understand and use Vi modes.

Insert, edit, delete, copy, and find text in Vi.

Be aware of Emacs, nano, and vim.

Configure the standard editor.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/, ?

h,j,k,l

i, o, a

d, p, y, dd, yy

ZZ, :w!, :q!

EDITOR

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. Assume that you’re using the Bash shell and want to prevent output

redirects from accidentally overwriting existing files. Which command

and option can be used to invoke this behavior?

A. setoutput -f

B. overwrite=no

C. overwrite -n

D. set -C

2. What command can be used to view the current settings for your

environment when using Bash?

A. environment

B. env

C. listenv

D. echoenv

3. Which command is used to access documentation on the Linux computer

for a given command?

A. doc

B. heredoc

C. man

D. manual

4. Which of the following commands will print various information about

the kernel and architecture, along with other details?

A. info --sys

B. man sys

C. sysinfo

D. uname -a

5. When using sed for a substitution operation, which option must be

included so that the substitution applies to the entire line rather than

just the first instance?

A. g

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. a

C. r

D. y

6. Which option for the wc command prints the number of lines given as

input?

A. -f

B. -a

C. -l

D. -o

7. What is the default number of lines printed by the head and tail

commands, respectively?

A. 10 for head, 5 for tail

B. 5 for head, 10 for tail

C. 10 for both head and tail

D. 3 for both head and tail

8. You are attempting to use rmdir to remove a directory, but there are still

multiple files and other directories contained within it. Assuming that

you’re sure you want to remove the directory and all of its contents, what

is the command and arguments to remove the directory and all of its

contents?

A. rm -f

B. rm -rf

C. rmdir -a

D. rmdir -m

9. Which command will find directories with names beginning with 2014

located beneath the current directory?

A. find ./ -name "2014"

B. find ./ -type d -name "2014"

C. find / -type d "2014"

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. find ./ -type d -name "2014*"

10. Which of the following commands will provide the usernames in a sorted

list gathered from the /etc/passwd file?

A. cat /etc/passwd | awk -F : '{print $1}' | sort

B. sort /etc/passwd | cut

C. echo /etc/passwd

D. cat /etc/passwd | awk '{print $1}' | sort

11. Which options to ls will produce output, including hidden (dot) files, in a

list that is ordered such that the newest files are at the end of the output?

A. -la

B. -lat

C. -latr

D. -ltr

12. What will be the result if the touch command is executed on a file that

already exists?

A. The access time stamp of the file will change to the current time

when the touch command was executed.

B. The file will be overwritten.

C. There will be no change.

D. The file will be appended to.

13. Which option to both mv and cp will cause the command to prompt before

overwriting files that already exist?

A. -f

B. -Z

C. -r

D. -i

14. Which of the following commands will send the contents of /etc/passwd

to both STDOUT and to a file called passwordfile?

A. cat /etc/passwd > passwordfile

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. var /etc/passwd | passwordfile

C. cat /etc/passwd | tee passwordfile

D. echo /etc/passwd | stdout > passwordfile

15. The current hierarchy on the server contains a directory called

/usr/local. You need to create additional directories below that are

called /usr/local/test/october. Which command will accomplish this

task?

A. mkdir -p /usr/local/test/october

B. mkdir /usr/local/test/october

C. mkdir -r /usr/local/test/october

D. mkdir -f /usr/local/test/october

16. Which option to the cp command will copy directories in a recursive

manner?

A. -v

B. -R

C. -Z

D. -i

17. You have received a file that does not have a file extension. Which

command can you run to help determine what type of file it might be?

A. grep

B. telnet

C. file

D. export

18. Which command will create an image of the /dev/sda1 disk partition and

place that image into a file called output.img?

A. dd if=sda of=/dev/sda1

B. dd if=output.img of=/dev/sda1

C. dd if=/dev/sda1 of=output.img

D. echo /dev/sda1 > output.img

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

19. What is the default delimiter used by the cut command?

A. Colon

B. Tab

C. Space

D. Comma

20. Which of the following will unzip and extract the contents of a file that

has been tarred and gzipped?

A. tar -zxf <file.tgz>

B. tar -xf <file.tgz>

C. tar -vz <file.tgz>

D. tar -fd <file.tgz>

21. What command is used to bring a command to foreground processing

after it has been backgrounded with an &?

A. bg

B. fore

C. 4g

D. fg

22. You need to write a script that gathers all of the process IDs for all

instances of Apache running on the system. Which of the following

commands will accomplish this task?

A. ps auwx | grep apache

B. pgrep apache

C. processlist apache

D. ls -p apache

23. Which of the following command lines would monitor a single process

called nagios in a continuous manner?

A. top -n 1

B. top -p 23

C. ps -nagios

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. top -p`pidof nagios`

24. Users are reporting that various programs are crashing on the server. By

examining logs, you see that certain processes are reporting out-of-

memory conditions. Which command can you use to see the overall

memory usage, including available swap space?

A. tree

B. pgrep

C. uptime

D. free

25. You are using the Vi editor for changing a file and need to exit. You

receive a notice indicating "No write since last change". Assuming

you want to save your work, which of the following commands will save

your work and exit Vi?

A. :wq

B. :q!

C. dd

D. x

26. What option is used to change the number of lines of output for the head

and tail commands?

A. -l

B. -f

C. -g

D. -n

27. Which command can be used to determine the current load average

along with information on the amount of time since the last boot of the

system?

A. uptime

B. sysinfo

C. bash

D. ls -u

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

28. You need to start a long-running process that requires a terminal and

foreground processing. However, you cannot leave your terminal window

open due to security restrictions. Which command will enable you to

start the process and return at a later time to continue the session?

A. fg

B. bg

C. kill

D. screen

29. You have attempted to stop a process using its service command and also

using the kill command. Which signal can be sent to the process using

the kill command in order to force the process to end?

A. -15

B. -f

C. -9

D. -stop

30. When working in the Bash shell, you need to redirect both STDOUT and

STDERR. Which of the following commands will redirect both STDOUT

and STDERR?

A. 1>2

B. >2

C. 2>&1

D. >>

31. Which command can be run to determine the default priority for

processes spawned by the current user?

A. prio

B. nice

C. renice

D. defpriority

32. Which of the following egrep commands will examine /etc/passwd to

find users who are using either /bin/bash or /usr/bin/zsh for their shell

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

environment?

A. grep sh /etc/passwd

B. egrep '/*/.sh$' /etc/passwd

C. grep '/*/.=sh$' /etc/passwd

D. egrep '/*/..?sh$' /etc/passwd

33. Which option to the man command accesses a different level of

documentation, for example, system call documentation?

A. man 2 <argument>

B. progman <argument>

C. man --sys <argument>

D. man --list sys

34. When editing with Vi, which command changes to insert mode and opens

a new line below the current cursor location?

A. f

B. a

C. o

D. i

35. Which kill signal can be sent in order to restart a process?

A. -HUP

B. -RESTART

C. -9

D. -SIG

36. Which of the following commands will display the last 50 lines of your

command history when using Bash, including commands from the

current session?

A. bashhist 50

B. history 50

C. cat .bash_history

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. tail -f .bash_history

37. You have backgrounded several tasks using &. Which command can be

used to view the current list of running tasks that have been

backgrounded?

A. procs

B. plist

C. jobs

D. free

38. Which of the following commands searches each user’s .bash_history

file to determine whether the user has invoked the sudo command?

A. find /home -name "bash_history" | grep sudo

B. find /home -name ".bash_history" | xargs grep sudo

C. find /home/.bash_history | xargs grep sudo

D. find /home -type history | xargs grep sudo

39. Which command will watch the Apache log at

/var/log/httpd/access.log and continually scroll as new log entries are

created?

A. watch /var/log/httpd/access.log

B. tail /var/log/httpd/access.log

C. tail -f /var/log/httpd/access.log

D. mon /var/log/httpd/access.log

40. You are debugging a configuration file and the daemon indicates there is

a problem on line 932. Which of the following commands will prepend

line numbers onto the file?

A. lines

B. wc -l

C. newline

D. nl

41. You receive a file with an .lzma extension. Which command can you use

to decompress this file?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. xz

B. lz

C. gz

D. bzip

42. Which find command will locate files within the current directory that

have been modified within the last 24 hours?

A. find ./ -type f -mtime 0

B. find ./ -type f -mtime 24

C. find ./ -type f -mtime +1

D. find ./ type -f time 24

43. Which command will move all files with a .txt extension to the /tmp

directory?

A. mv txt* tmp

B. move *txt /temp

C. mv *.txt /tmp

D. mv *.txt tmp

44. Which command prints your current directory?

A. cwd

B. curdur

C. cd

D. pwd

45. Assume that you have a file called zips.txt that contains several postal

ZIP codes and you need to determine how many unique ZIP codes there

are in the file. Which of the following commands can be used for that

purpose?

A. sort zips.txt | uniq -c

B. uniq zips.txt

C. count zips.txt

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. cat zips.txt | uniq -c

46. When using Bash, how would you execute the last command starting

with a certain string, even if that command was not the last one that you

typed?

A. Precede the command with ! and then the string to search for.

B. Search for the command in history.

C. Precede the command with a ? and then the string to search for.

D. This is not possible with Bash.

47. Which command can be used to kill all processes by using their name?

A. killproc

B. killname

C. killall

D. kill -f

48. You’re working with a large file in Vi and need to search for instances of a

string earlier in the file. Which key will search backward in the file?

A. /

B. h

C. ?

D. x

49. You need to declare a local environment variable that will then be

available to child processes. Which of the following commands

accomplishes this task?

A. ex

B. echo

C. dec

D. export

50. You are creating a Bash shell script and need to output the current script

name to the current terminal. Which of the following commands

accomplishes this task?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. cat <CMD>

B. echo $0

C. echo $SCRIPT

D. echo $PS1

51. You have downloaded a file with a .gz extension. What is the most likely

command that you will use to decompress this file?

A. unz

B. gunzip

C. hunzip

D. gzunzip

52. You need to remove a single file from a directory if it exists but would

like to be prompted for confirmation before doing so. Which option to

the rm command causes the command to prompt for confirmation?

A. -a

B. -e

C. -i

D. -o

53. You need to determine files that are sized above 1GB. Which of the

following commands accomplishes this task?

A. find / -size +1G

B. find / -size 10000M

C. find / +1M

D. find / -size +1B

54. Which option to cpio lists the files as it is operating on them?

A. -l

B. -v

C. -k

D. -s

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

55. Which command is used to send contents of a bzip2 archive to STDOUT?

A. bzout

B. bzcat

C. bz2cat

D. bz2echo

56. You are attempting to find more information about the jobs command;

however, an Internet search was not particularly helpful because there

are so many Linux-related jobs available. Additionally, you attempted to

view the man page for the jobs command but it was not available. Which

man page should you use to view more information on jobs?

A. jbs

B. procctl

C. bash

D. ps

57. You need to start a process that cannot be sent or will not accept a

SIGHUP signal. Which command should be used to start the process?

A. nosig

B. nohup

C. nokill

D. noproc

58. You need to run a command periodically and examine its output in real

time. Which of the following commands enables this scenario?

A. mon

B. procmon

C. pgrep

D. watch

59. You would like to tail a log file to watch entries as they are being added to

the log file. In addition, you would also like to work within the same

terminal window or SSH (Secure Shell) session to add entries to another

file at the same time. Which command can be used to create two sessions

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

within the same terminal window?

A. screen

B. tmux

C. sess

D. termse

60. You need to kill several processes at once. Rather than writing a complex

ps-based command to do so, you can use which other command?

A. pkill

B. psk

C. pskill

D. prock

61. You are using pgrep to find the process IDs for a given command.

However, several other commands seem to also appear. Which option to

pgrep enables matching against the full path of the process?

A. -f

B. -d

C. -o

D. -i

62. You need to determine the exact command that will be run based on your

current environment settings. Which command is used for this purpose?

A. what

B. which

C. find

D. ls

63. An environment variable has been set on login, but you need to remove

that variable temporarily for the current session. Which shell built-in

command can be used for this purpose?

A. reset

B. unset

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. undo

D. clear

64. You cannot find the man page of a command but you know the command

exists. For example, the alias command exists but there is no man page

for it. Which of the following commands could you execute to determine

what type of command alias is?

A. type

B. cmd

C. uses

D. listr

65. Which type of quotes are used so that variables are interpolated within a

Bash shell script?

A. Escaped quotes

B. Single quotes

C. Double quotes

D. Side quotes

66. Which of the following pagers includes the ability to search backward

and forward as well as move backward and forward, line-by-line, and

page-by-page?

A. more

B. mplus

C. less

D. catch

67. You have a specialized need for outputting a file in octal format. Which

command or series of commands can be used for this purpose?

A. oct

B. cat <file> | octalf

C. od

D. octf

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

68. Which option to sha256sum causes the file to be read in binary mode?

A. -i

B. -b

C. -c

D. -p

69. When operating in command mode, which keys enable you to move the

cursor in the Vi editor?

A. a, s, d, f

B. h, j, k, l

C. q, w, e, r

D. z, x, c, v

70. Which options to xz are functionally equivalent to the xzcat program?

A. decompress and output

B. output and format

C. decompress and stdout

D. stdout and format

71. Which environment variable is used to control the default text editor

used on a Linux system?

A. EDITOR

B. EDIT

C. TEXTEDITOR

D. DEFAULT_EDITOR

72. You need to examine the seventh section of the manual page for regular

expressions, or regex, on a Linux system. Which command displays the

seventh section of the manual?

A. man regex -7

B. man regex 7

C. man --page 7 regex

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. man 7 regex

73. Which of the following commands reprioritizes an already running

process?

A. nice

B. renice

C. chnice

D. altnice

74. The fgrep command is equivalent to running the grep command with

which option?

A. -f

B. -F

C. -a

D. -E

75. Which of the following regular expressions would find the pattern Steve

or steve in a file when used with grep?

A. '[sS]teve'

B. '[S]*teve'

C. '^[Ss]teve'

D. '[$Steve]'

76. Which of the following commands shows the currently running

processes and their resource usage in real time, updated every few

seconds?

A. nice

B. ps

C. top

D. procs

77. You have been asked to create a compressed file that will be readable by

those with other operating systems. Which tool can you use for this

purpose?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. gzip

B. bzip2

C. xz

D. tar

78. You need to match files that begin with 201, as in 2017, 2018, 2019.

Which of the following wildcard specifications can be used?

A. 201?

B. 201$

C. 201@

D. 201]

79. You need to break a large file into smaller pieces. Which command can

be used for this purpose?

A. cut

B. split

C. dice

D. rem

80. When examining the output from top, you see that a process has a value

in the PR column of 20. To what does the PR column refer?

A. The process ID

B. The process utilization

C. The process priority

D. The processor core on which the process is executing

81. You need to cut or remove eight lines from a file while editing with Vi.

Which combination should be used for this purpose?

A. d7

B. d8

C. r8

D. x7

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

82. Which command is used in order to decompress a file that has been

compressed with xz?

A. unxz

B. dexz

C. xzu

D. u2xz

83. Which of the following commands uses 128-bit message digests?

A. sha256sum

B. sha512sum

C. sh128sum

D. md5sum

84. You have several files that need to be combined, with a line from each

file being appended onto a single line. Which command can be used for

this purpose?

A. paste

B. comb

C. appfile

D. combo

85. You need to run a command that is not inside your current path. Which

of the following represents the typical method for doing so?

A. Use a fully qualified path for the command.

B. Set the PATH environment variable to include the correct path.

C. Restart the shell environment.

D. Restart the computer for settings to take effect.

86. Which signal is used by default by the pkill command?

A. SIGKILL

B. SIGTERM

C. SIGHUP

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. SIGKS

87. You are working with the jobs built-in command to display jobs. You

would like to see only running jobs. Which option to the jobs built-in

command will display only running jobs?

A. -s

B. -a

C. -l

D. -r

88. Which option to the bunzip2 command sends output to STDOUT, much

like the bzcat command?

A. -s

B. -o

C. -c

D. -d

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 4

Topic 104: Devices, Linux Filesystems, Filesystem

Hierarchy Standard

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

104.1 Create partitions and filesystems.

Key knowledge areas:

Manage MBR and GPT partition tables.

Use various mkfs commands to create various filesystems such

as:

ext2/ext3/ext4

XFS

VFAT

exFAT

Basic feature knowledge of Btrfs, including multi-device

filesystems, compression, and subvolumes

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

fdisk

gdisk

parted

mkfs

mkswap

104.2 Maintain the integrity of filesystems.

Key knowledge areas:

Verify the integrity of filesystems.

Monitor free space and inodes.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Repair simply filesystem problems.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

fsck

e2fsck

mke2fs

tune2fs

xfs_repair

xfs_fsr

xfs_db

104.3 Control mounting and unmounting of filesystems.

Key knowledge areas:

Manually mount and unmount filesystems.

Configure filesystems mounting on bootup.

Configure user mountable removable filesystems.

Use labels and UUIDs for identifying and mounting filesystems.

Awareness of systemd mount units

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/fstab

/media/

mount

umount

blkid

lsblk

104.4 Manage file permissions and ownership.

Key knowledge areas:

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Manage access permissions on regular and special files as well

as directories.

Use access modes such as suid, sgid, and the sticky bit to

maintain security.

Know how to change the file creation mask.

Use the group field to grant file access to group members.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

chmod

umask

chown

chgrp

104.5 Create and change hard and symbolic links.

Key knowledge areas:

Create links.

Identify hard and/or soft links.

Copying versus linking files

Use links to support system administration tasks.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

104.6 Find system files and place files in the correct location.

Key knowledge areas:

Understand the correct locations of files under the FHS.

Find files and commands on a Linux system.

Know the location and purpose of important file and directories

as defined in the FHS.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

find

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

locate

updatedb

whereis

which

type

/etc/updatedb.conf

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. Which option best describes the following output from the ls -la

command:

lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 35 Jul 8 2014 .fetchmailrc ->

.configs/fetchmail/.fetchmailrc?

A. It is a file called .fetchmailrc that is linked using a symbolic link.

B. It is a file called .configs/fetchmail/.fetchmailrc that is owned by

lrwxrwxrwx.

C. It is a directory called .fetchmailrc that is owned by user Jul.

D. It is a local directory called .configs/fetchmail/.fetchmailrc.

2. Assuming that a USB disk contains a single partition and is made

available on /dev/sdb, which command mounts the disk in /media/usb?

A. mount /dev/sdb1 /media/usb

B. usbconnect /dev/sdb0 /media/usb

C. mount /dev/sdb0 /media/usb

D. usbmount /dev/sdb1 /media/usb

3. Which option within a partition-mounting command will cause the

partition to be mounted in such a way as to prevent execution of

programs?

A. execless

B. stoprun

C. noexec

D. norun

4. When working with partitions on disk, you see the type 0x82. Which type

of partition is this?

A. Linux

B. Linux swap

C. NTFS

D. FAT

5. Which partition type should be created for a Linux system, non-swap

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

partition?

A. 82

B. 83

C. 84

D. L

6. Which command can be used to determine the location of a given

executable that would be run if typed from your current environment and

location?

A. which

B. what

C. whatis

D. when

7. Which of the following commands will correctly change the group

ownership of the file called a.out to users?

A. chgrp users a.out

B. chgrp a.out users

C. groupchg a.out users

D. grpchg users a.out

8. Another administrator made a change to one of the local scripts used for

administrative purposes. The change was also immediately reflected in

your copy of the script. However, when examining the file with ls, you

see that it appears to be a normal file. What is the likely cause of such a

scenario?

A. The file was executed after edit.

B. The administrator copied the file to yours.

C. Your file is a hard link to the original.

D. The file has been restored from backup.

9. Which of the following commands shows the usage of inodes across all

filesystems?

A. df -i

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. ls -i

C. du -i

D. dm -i

10. You’re running fsck on an ext3 filesystem, and the process is taking

longer than expected and requiring input from the administrator to fix

issues. What option could be added to fsck next time so that the

command will automatically attempt to fix errors without intervention?

A. -o

B. -V

C. -y

D. -f

11. Which of the following describes a primary difference between ext2 and

ext3 filesystems?

A. ext3 was primarily a bug fix update to ext2.

B. ext3 includes journaling for the filesystem.

C. ext3 completely changed the tools needed for management of the

disks.

D. ext3 filesystems have no significant differences.

12. Which option to umask will display the permissions to be used in a

Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX) format?

A. -P

B. -p

C. -S

D. -v

13. Which option to ln creates a symlink to another file?

A. -sl

B. -s

C. -l

D. --ln

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

14. Which of the following commands can be used if you need to locate

various elements of a given command, such as its binaries and man

pages?

A. whatis

B. find

C. whereis

D. ls

15. Which option in /etc/updatedb.conf will remove a path from inclusion

in the results?

A. PRUNEPATHS

B. EXCLUDEPATHS

C. INCLUDEEXCLUDE

D. SEPARATEPATH

16. According to the filesystem hierarchy standard (FHS), what is the correct

location for site-specific data for a server?

A. /etc

B. /var

C. /tmp

D. /srv

17. Which of the following commands enables the sticky bit for a user on a

file called homescript.sh?

A. chmod +sticky homescript.sh

B. chmod 755 homescript.sh

C. chmod u+s homescript.sh

D. chown u+sticky homescript.sh

18. Which option to the mount command will mount all filesystems that are

currently available in /etc/fstab?

A. -g

B. -a

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. -r

D. -y

19. Which command is used to format a swap partition?

A. fdisk

B. mkswap

C. formatswap

D. format -s

20. Which command and option is used to display the number of times that a

filesystem has been mounted?

A. tune2fs -l

B. cat /etc/fstab

C. mount -a

D. less /etc/fsmnt

21. Which option to xfs_metadump displays a progress indicator?

A. -g

B. -p

C. -f

D. -v

22. The system is running out of disk space within the home directory

partition and quotas have not been enabled. Which command can you

use to determine the directories that might contain large files?

A. du

B. df

C. ls

D. locate

23. Which file contains information about the filesystems to mount, their

partitions, and the options that should be used to mount them?

A. /etc/filesystems

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. /etc/mounts

C. /etc/fstab

D. /srv/mounts

24. According to the FHS, what is the proper mount point for removable

media?

A. /etc

B. /srv

C. /tmp

D. /media

25. Which file contains information on currently mounted filesystems,

including their mount options?

A. /etc/mtab

B. /etc/fstab

C. /tmp/files

D. /etc/filesystems

26. Which option to umount will cause the command to attempt to remount

the filesystem in read-only mode if the unmounting process fails?

A. -o

B. -r

C. -f

D. -v

27. The umask reports as 022. What is the permission that will be in effect

for a newly nonexecutable created file?

A. u+rw, g+r, w+r

B. 755

C. 022

D. a+r

28. The locate command is reporting out-of-date information. Which

command should be run in order to have the locate command update its

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

database?

A. locatedb -u

B. locate -u

C. updatedb

D. updatelocate

29. Which shell built-in command can be used to determine what command

will be run?

A. type

B. when

C. find

D. help

30. Which option to chown recursively changes the ownership?

A. -f

B. -R

C. -a

D. -m

31. Which of the following represents the correct format for the /etc/fstab

file?

A. <directory> <device> <type> <options>

B. <device> <type> <options>

C. <device> <type> <options> <directory> <dump> <fsck>

D. <filesystem> <mount point> <type> <options> <dump> <pass>

32. Which of the following commands is used to identify the UUID for

partitions?

A. blkid

B. ls

C. find

D. cat

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

33. Which of the following describes the priority order for configuration files

with systemd?

A. Files in /etc/, files in /run, and then files in /lib

B. Files in /run, files in /etc/, and then files in /lib

C. Files in /lib, files in /run, and then files in /etc

D. Files in /lib, files in /etc, and then files in /run

34. Which options to the fsck command will find and automatically assume

that it should repair errors that it finds?

A. -y

B. -vy

C. -my

D. -xy

35. Which option to mke2fs sets the type of filesystem to be created?

A. -F

B. -a

C. -t

D. -e

36. Which of the following files is the default configuration file for the

autofs automounter?

A. /etc/autofs

B. /etc/auto.master

C. /etc/autofs.conf

D. /etc/automounter.conf

37. Which of the following commands is used to create an ISO filesystem?

A. mkiso

B. mkfsiso

C. mkisofs

D. isofs-mk

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

38. Which option to the tune2fs command sets the maximum mount count

before the system will automatically run fsck on the partition on boot?

A. -b

B. -c

C. -C

D. -a

39. Which option to the mount command can be used to simulate the mount

process without actually mounting the filesystem?

A. -q

B. -v

C. -l

D. -f

40. When viewing /proc/mounts, you see a filesystem with the letters ro in

the fourth column. To what do the letters ro refer?

A. relative option

B. realtime option

C. read-only

D. relative-only

41. Which option to dumpe2fs displays the bad blocks for a given partition?

A. -bb

B. -C

C. -b

D. -f

42. Which of the following filesystem types features copy-on-write?

A. ext3

B. ext4

C. FAT

D. Btrfs

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

43. Which of the following commands displays filesystem geometry for an

XFS filesystem?

A. xfsinfo

B. xfs_info

C. xfs -info

D. xfs --info

44. Which of the following commands can be used to display information

such as the UUID for partitions on a system?

A. blkid

B. blockdev

C. devinfo

D. uuidinfo

45. Which option to the umount command will cause it to unmount only

filesystems of the specified type?

A. -v

B. -f

C. -t

D. -a

46. Which command causes unwritten data to be written to disk

immediately?

A. write

B. wrnow

C. connwrite

D. sync

47. Which option to xfs_check is used to verify a filesystem that is stored in

a file?

A. -v

B. -a

C. -f

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. -d

48. Which option to debugfs causes the filesystem to be opened in read-write

mode rather than the default read-only?

A. -rw

B. -w

C. -r

D. -n

49. Which daemon is responsible for monitoring Self-Monitoring, Analysis,

and Reporting Technology (SMART)-compatible hard drives?

A. smartmon

B. smarty

C. sartd

D. smartd

50. When checking an ext3 filesystem, which option to the fsck.ext3

command causes it to run the check even if the filesystem is apparently

marked as clean?

A. –f

B. -m

C. -a

D. -c

51. You are performing an xfsrestore. The xfsdump was executed with a

block size of 4MB. Which option do you need to invoke on xfsrestore in

order for it to successfully use this dump?

A. -b 4M

B. -g 1M

C. -i 1M

D. -k 1028K

52. You see the word defaults within /etc/fstab. Which options are

encompassed within the defaults?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. ro, exec, auto

B. rw, suid, dev, exec, auto, nouser, async

C. rw, exec, auto, nouser, async

D. rw, exec, nouser, async, noauto, suid

53. Which of the following commands creates a btrfs subvolume?

A. btrfs create subvolume

B. btrfs subvolume create

C. btrfs sv create

D. btrfs svcreate

54. Which of the following options to xfsdump sets the maximum size for

files to be included in the dump?

A. -p

B. -s

C. -z

D. -b

55. Which option to the tune2fs command sets the behavior when a

filesystem error occurs?

A. -f

B. -d

C. -e

D. -k

56. The /etc filesystem has been mounted as a read-only for a recovery

process. You need to mount another partition. Which option to the mount

command causes it to not write to /etc/mtab?

A. -a

B. -m

C. -b

D. -n

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

57. Which of the following commands deactivates swap space?

A. swapoff

B. swap -off

C. unmountswap

D. uswap

58. Within the [mount] section of a systemd mount unit, which directive

specifies the location for mounting the chosen filesystem?

A. Where=

B. Location=

C. List=

D. Dest=

59. Which of the following commands can be used to format a FAT

filesystem?

A. mkfs.fat

B. mkfs -f

C. mkfs --fat

D. mkfat

60. Which of the following commands adds a journal to an existing ext2

filesystem?

A. tune2fs -jrn

B. e2fs -x

C. tune3fs

D. tune2fs -j

61. Which of the following commands creates a snapshot of a btrfs

subvolume?

A. btrfs subvolume snapshot

B. btrfs snapshot --create

C. btrfs create snapshot

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. btrfs --create

62. Which option to xfs_repair will force log zeroing even if there may be

metadata within the log?

A. -L

B. -v

C. -d

D. -V

63. Which of the following commands mounts a filesystem in read-only

mode?

A. mount read-only

B. mount --read

C. mount -o ro

D. mount -or

64. When you are using tune2fs to set an extended option such as

stripe_width, which command-line option is needed to signify that an

extended option follows?

A. -extend

B. -E

C. -e

D. -f

65. Which utility is used for formatting GPT disks?

A. gdisk

B. gptdisk

C. gpdisk

D. pgdisk

66. What is the maximum size of a partition on an MBR-formatted disk?

A. 2TB

B. 4TB

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. 2MB

D. 512TB

67. Which option to mkfs.ext4 can be used to prevent reservation of blocks

for system or superuser use?

A. -r 0

B. -r 0b

C. -m 0

D. -m 0b

68. What is the default time in seconds that xfs_fsr will use to reorganize a

filesystem?

A. 3600

B. 7200

C. 86400

D. 5150

69. A user who is a member of the custom admins group is attempting to read

the contents of a file but is not the owner of the file. Rather than granting

sudo access to this file, what is another way to grant read access,

assuming that the file is currently marked with 640 permissions? Note

that you should choose the most appropriate answer to fulfill the need

while minimizing additional privileges.

A. Grant root access to the user.

B. Run chmod 777 on the file.

C. Use chgrp to change group ownership to admins.

D. Use chown to change the ownership of the file to the individual user.

70. Which option to lsblk shows empty devices?

A. -g

B. -a

C. -r

D. -y

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

71. The /media/ mount point is used frequently for which types of devices?

A. Hard drives

B. SAN

C. NAS

D. USB devices

72. Which of the following commands is used to format an exFAT

filesystem?

A. mkexfat

B. mkfat.ex

C. mkfs.exfat

D. mkfs2.exf

73. Which of the following commands is used for debugging an XFS-

formatted filesystem?

A. debug_xfs

B. xfs_debug

C. xfs_db

D. debugxfs

74. You’re working with an ext2 filesystem and you suspect the superblock is

corrupted. Which option to e2fsck enables you to specify the location of

an alternate superblock?

A. -B

B. -s

C. -b

D. -o

75. Which option to df shows the numerical output in larger size increments,

like MB, GB, TB, and so on rather than in bytes?

A. -h

B. -m

C. -n

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. -s

76. Assuming the use of Bash for the shell, in which file can the umask be

set such that the file creation mask is set automatically on login?

A. /etc/umask.def

B. /etc/profile

C. /etc/bash.d/umask

D. /etc/bash.umask

77. You need to enable two users to edit the same file but keep their own

individual changes. Another administrator suggested making a symbolic

link for the file. Is a symbolic link the appropriate solution for this

scenario and, if not, what is?

A. A symbolic link is not appropriate because the users cannot keep

their own changes. A copy would be a better option.

B. A symbolic link is appropriate here because each user can access the

file, assuming write permissions.

C. A symbolic link is not appropriate given that the users will not have

permissions on symbolic links. Linux cannot meet the scenario

described.

D. A symbolic link is appropriate because symbolic links have the

ability to do version control, thus enabling the scenario.

78. You have deleted a user from the system and want to determine if this

user still has files on the system. Which command will fulfill this

scenario?

A. locate <user>

B. find -uid <uid>

C. find -user <user>

D. fileloc -user <user>

79. You need to update the locate database. Which of the following

commands is used for this purpose?

A. updatedb

B. locatedb

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. updlocdb

D. locdbupd

80. Which option to lsblk shows the UUID of each filesystem?

A. –u

B. -f

C. -o

D. -a

81. Which option to mkswap checks the device for bad blocks before

formatting?

A. -b

B. -B

C. -c

D. -d

82. You are examining output from ls -la and one file contains the

permissions -rwSrw-r--. To what does the S refer?

A. Specific execute

B. Source formatting

C. Selective execution

D. Sticky bit

83. You need to change file permissions to be setgid for a file called sync.sh.

The file is normally permission 755. Which of the following commands

accomplishes this task?

A. chmod 2775 sync.sh

B. chmod u+s sync.sh

C. chmod 2755 sync.sh

D. chmod 4755 sync.sh

84. Which of the following commands finds files with a .sql extension

across the entire filesystem?

A. find . -name "*.sql"

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. find /root -ext sql

C. find / -name "*.sql"

D. find / -exten ".sql"

85. When working with /etc/fstab to mount by UUID, which syntax is

correct as the first column in /etc/fstab, assuming a UUID denoted by

<UUID>?

A. <UUID>

B. UUID=<UUID>

C. ID=<UUID>

D. GPT=<UUID>

86. Which option to du displays information on inode usage?

A. -i

B. -h

C. --inodes

D. -d

87. Which of the following find commands will look for files that are over

1GB in size?

A. find -size +1G

B. find -size 1GB

C. find -fssize +1GB

D. find -filesize +1G

88. You have a set of libraries that were installed into /usr/local/lib and

would like to ensure that the libraries are also available in /usr/lib.

What is the preferred way to make the libraries available in this location?

A. Copy the libraries.

B. Create a symbolic link.

C. Move the libraries.

D. Create a script to synchronize the libraries between the two locations

with rsync.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

PART II

Exam 102-500

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 5

Topic 105: Shells and Shell Scripting

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

105.1 Customize and use the shell environment.

Key knowledge areas:

Set environment variables (e.g. PATH) at login or when spawning

a new shell.

Write bash functions for frequently used sequences of

commands.

Maintain skeleton directories for new user accounts.

Set command search path with the proper directory.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

source

/etc/bash.bashrc

/etc/profile

env

export

set

unset

∼/.bash_profile

∼/.bash_login

∼/.profile

∼/.bashrc

∼/.bash_logout

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

function

alias

105.2 Customize or write simple scripts.

Key knowledge areas:

Use standard sh syntax (loops, tests).

Use command substitution.

Test return values for success or failure or other information

provided by a command.

Execute chained commands.

Perform conditional mailing to the superuser.

Correctly select the script interpreter through the shebang (#!)

line.

Manage the location, ownership, execution, and suid-rights of

scripts.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

for

while

test

read

seq

exec

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. Which of the following best describes the PS1 environment variable?

A. PS1 is used to set the location of the PostScript command.

B. PS1 is used to define the default shell prompt for bash.

C. PS1 is used as a per-system variable.

D. PS1 is user-defined and does not have a default value or setting.

2. Which command is used to read and execute commands from a file in the

Bash shell?

A. run

B. execute

C. source

D. func

3. You need a command to be executed on logout for all users. Within

which file should this be placed (assuming all users are using Bash)?

A. ∼/.bash_logout

B. /etc/bash.bash_logout

C. /home/.bash_logout

D. /etc/bash_logout

4. Which of the following commands removes an environment variable that

has been set?

A. profile --unset

B. env -u

C. set -u

D. import

5. Which option to the unset command explicitly informs the command

that the name given refers to a shell variable and not a function?

A. -a

B. -s

C. -v

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. -e

6. Which of the following commands ensures that the -la options are used

when the ls command is executed without other options?

A. alias ls="ls -la"

B. ln -s ls ls -la

C. alias "ls -la" = ls

D. set ls

7. What is the order in which user configuration files are located on login to

a Bash shell?

A. .bash_login, .profile, /etc/profile

B. .bash_profile, .bash_login, .profile

C. .profile, .bash_login, .bash_profile

D. .bash_login, .bash_profile, .profile

8. Which variable within a Bash script is used to access the first command-

line parameter?

A. $ARG

B. $CMD

C. $1

D. $ARG0

9. Which of the following provides the end for an if conditional in a Bash

script?

A. ex

B. }

C. ]

D. fi

10. Which of the following commands will print a list of 6 numbers

beginning at 0 within a Bash script?

A. list 0-5

B. seq 0 1 5

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. echo 0-5

D. seq 0 1 6

11. When creating a shell script, which of the following commands is used to

display the contents of variables?

A. var_dump

B. echo

C. ls

D. env

12. A command has the following listing obtained with ls -la:

-rwsr-xr-x 1 suehring suehring 21 Nov 2 13:53 script.sh

What does the s denote within the user permissions in the listing?

A. The suid bit has been set for this program.

B. This is a symlink.

C. The file will not be executable.

D. The file is a special system file.

13. Which of the following commands will execute a script and then exit the

shell?

A. run

B. source

C. ./

D. exec

14. Which sequence of characters will execute two commands but only if the

first command exits successfully?

A. --

B. &*

C. &&

D. &

15. Which command within a shell script awaits user input and places that

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

input into a variable?

A. exec

B. get

C. read

D. prompt

16. What characters are used to mark a sequence of commands as a function

in a Bash script?

A. Parentheses to declare the function (optional) and curly braces to

contain the commands

B. Curly braces to declare the function and parentheses to contain the

commands

C. Square brackets to declare the function and curly braces to contain

the commands

D. Runquotes to denote the function

17. Which character sequences denote an alternate command to execute if

the preceding command does not exit successfully?

A. &&

B. --

C. ||

D. EL

18. Which keyword(s) is/are used to begin an alternate condition within a

Bash script?

A. if

B. else if

C. elif

D. elsif

19. Which of the following commands removes a currently defined aliased

command?

A. remove

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. rm

C. unalias

D. delete

20. When sourcing a file in Bash, which chmod command would be necessary

to provide the minimum privileges in order for the file to be sourced

correctly, assuming that your current user owns the file?

A. chmod 600

B. chmod 755

C. chmod 777

D. chmod 400

21. Assuming that a space-separated list of values has been defined as

LIST="one two three four", which of the following for loop constructs

will iterate through the elements in the list?

A. for LIST

B. for VAR in LIST

C. for VAR in $LIST

D. for $LIST -> $VAR

22. Which test within a shell script while loop will examine one value to see

if it is less than another?

A. -less

B. -lessThan

C. -lt

D. -lthan

23. Which of the following tests will determine if a file exists in the context

of a shell script?

A. -a

B. -e

C. -m

D. -i

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

24. Within which directory should you place files to have them automatically

copied to a user’s home directory when the user is created?

A. /etc/userhome

B. /etc/templateuser

C. /etc/skel

D. /home/skel

25. Which option to bash will cause the shell to be executed without reading

the initialization files?

A. --no-rc

B. --no-init

C. --norc

D. --rc-none

26. Which of the following creates an array in a Bash script?

A. ARRAY=(val1 val2)

B. ARRAY = "val1 val2"

C. ARRAY_PUSH($ARRAY,"val1","val2");

D. ARRAY{0} = "val1"

27. Which option of declare displays output in a way that could then be used

as input to another command?

A. -o

B. -n

C. -p

D. -m

28. You need to create a function that will be available each time that you log

in to the system. Within which file should this function be placed?

A. .bash_profile

B. .rc

C. /etc/profile

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. .bash_run

29. Which shell built-in command is used to display a list of read-only

variables?

A. ro

B. readonly

C. env-ro

D. ro-env

30. Which characters are used to denote the beginning and end of the test

portion of a while loop in a shell script?

A. Parentheses ( )

B. Curly braces { }

C. Square brackets [ ]

D. Double-quotes " "

31. When using the test built-in with one argument, what will be returned if

its argument is not null?

A. false

B. true

C. unknown

D. -1

32. Which environment variable is used when changing directory with the

tilde character, such as cd ∼ ?

A. HOMEDIR

B. HOMEPATH

C. HOME

D. MAILPATH

33. Which environment variable can be set if you want to automatically log

users out of their shell after a certain period of inactivity?

A. TIMEOUT

B. TMOUT

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. TO

D. IDLETIME

34. When using a case statement within a shell script, which sequence

denotes the ending of the case/switch statement?

A. caseend

B. esac

C. endcase

D. }

35. Which of the following commands will obtain the date in seconds since

the epoch and place it into a variable called DATE within a shell script?

A. DATE="$(date +%s)"

B. DATE="date"

C. DATE="$(date)";

D. DATE="$date %s"

36. Assume that you have a variable called $FILEPATH within a Bash shell

script. Which characters can be used to ensure that the variable will be

interpolated correctly regardless of where the variable appears within the

script?

A. Dollar sign: $FILEPATH

B. Curly braces: ${FILEPATH}

C. Parentheses: $(FILEPATH)

D. Square brackets: $[FILEPATH]

37. Which sequence is used to mark the beginning and end of the commands

to execute within a for loop in a shell script?

A. Curly braces: { }

B. The keywords do and done

C. Semicolons: ;

D. Tabs

38. Which of the following tests will determine if a file exists and can be read

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

by the user executing the test?

A. -e

B. -m

C. -a

D. -r

39. Which option of the declare command will create a variable that is read-

only?

A. -r

B. -ro

C. -p

D. -x

40. Which character sequence is used to provide a default case when used

within a case statement in a shell script?

A. default:

B. =)

C. -->

D. *)

41. Which character sequence can be used for command substitution in

Bash?

A. Backquotes: ` `

B. Single quotes: ‘ '

C. Double quotes: ""

D. Backslashes: \\

42. When using a while loop in Bash, which character sequence marks the

end of the loop?

A. elihw

B. done

C. end

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. od

43. Which operator is used to test if a value is greater than or equal to

something in a Bash script?

A. !=

B. >=

C. =>

D. >>

44. You are working with a shell script called listusers and the script does

not execute with the error "permission denied". What could be the

possible cause of this issue?

A. The script should have an .sh extension.

B. The script contains a syntax error.

C. The script does not have its execute permission set correctly.

D. The script is named with lowercase letters.

45. Which option to the export built-in command makes names available as

functions to child processes?

A. -m

B. -e

C. -w

D. -f

46. If a variable has been created using the set command, which command

can be used to remove the variable?

A. remove

B. del

C. delete

D. unset

47. Which of the following files is a systemwide initialization script for

Bash?

A. /etc/bash.bashrc

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. /etc/bash.init

C. /etc/bash.cfg

D. /etc/bash/bash.init

48. Which option to the set command enables debugging output?

A. -d

B. +d

C. -x

D. +x

49. Which of the following files is executed with every interactive Bash shell

invocation?

A. /etc/bash.d

B. /etc/bash.interactive

C. ∼/.bash_inter

D. ∼/.bashrc

50. Which keyword declares a block of code to be a function in a Bash script?

A. function

B. repeat

C. func

D. block

51. Which of the following statements adds the /srv/bin path to the path for

a Bash shell?

A. PATH=/srv/bin

B. PATH=$PATH:/srv/bin

C. PATH = /srv/bin

D. PATH=/srv/bin;$PATH

52. Which variable is available to a Bash script and contains the name of the

script itself?

A. $SCR

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. $SCRIPT

C. $CMD

D. $0

53. Which option to the seq command sets a delimiter of a space between the

numbers 1 through 5?

A. seq -s ' ' 1 5

B. seq -d ' ' 1 5

C. seq 1 5

D. seq -m 1 5

54. Which file test is used to determine if you are the owner of the file being

tested?

A. -m

B. -k

C. -w

D. -O

55. When testing a return value in a Bash script, which exit code indicates

success?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 2

D. C

56. You have created a README file and placed it into /etc/skel so that users

get the file in their home directories. The file is missing from some home

directories on the system. Which of the following best explains this

scenario?

A. The file is not copied automatically for existing users.

B. The file is too big for a user’s home directory.

C. The file already exists.

D. The file needs a file extension.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

57. You have a Bash script that uses the following find command:

find . -name ".git" -type d

When another administrator uses the script, it does not find all of

the indicated directories. Which of the following is the best

explanation for this scenario?

A. The find command is tied to specific users.

B. The find command cannot find directories beginning with a dot.

C. The find command begins the search in the current directory.

D. The find command cannot find directories.

58. You have specialized software that needs to be installed with an empty

environment. Which option to the env command can be used to meet this

requirement?

A. -e

B. –i

C. -f

D. -c

59. Which option enables debugging when used on the interpreter (#!) line

within a Bash script?

A. -x

B. -d

C. -a

D. -f

60. Which of the following will output the number 5 as part of a Bash script?

A. echo 2+3

B. echo 2 + 3

C. echo $[2+3]

D. echo ${2+3}

61. You need to prompt the user to enter two values in a Bash script and

capture them in variables VAL1 and VAL2. Which of the following

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

commands can be used for this purpose?

A. read VAL1 VAL2

B. prompt VAL1 VAL2

C. VAL1=$0 VAL2=$1

D. (VAL1 VAL2) = prompt

62. Which option to the export built-in command removes a variable from

being exported?

A. -m

B. -o

C. -r

D. -n

63. Which of the following tests the return value from the previous

command to see if the command was successful?

A. if [ $? -eq 0 ];

B. if [ $? = 0 ];

C. if ($PREV == 0) {

D. if [ $RETV === 0 ];

64. You have a file containing bash functions. Which command can be used

to add these functions to the current environment?

A. function

B. include

C. require

D. source

65. Which chmod command grants the user execute permission on a script?

A. chmod user += exec

B. chmod u+x

C. chmod 644

D. chmod u+all

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

66. Which find command will locate all files named with an .sh extension?

A. find / -name "*.sh"

B. find / -name "*.sh" -type f

C. find / -name "*.sh" -type d

D. find ./ -name "*.sh"

67. Which unset option can be used to remove a function from being

defined?

A. -r

B. -a

C. -f

D. -g

68. When setting the shebang line of a shell script, which of the following

commands will help to determine the location of the interpreter

automatically?

A. #!/usr/bin/env bash

B. #!/bin/bash

C. #!env

D. /bin/int bash

69. Which mathematical operator is used for division within a Bash script?

A. \

B. /

C. *

D. //

70. You need to send an email to the superuser if a command is successful.

Which of the following commands will send mail from a Bash script?

A. smtpsend

B. mailx

C. sendm

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. mailsend

71. Which file test operator is used to determine if the file is not zero size?

A. -d

B. -e

C. -f

D. -s

72. You have created an alias but it is gone the next time you log in. Which of

the following best explains this scenario?

A. The alias was not placed into an initialization script.

B. The alias was invalid.

C. The command is not valid for which the alias was created.

D. The alias created an invalid symlink.

73. Which of the following is valid syntax to create a variable named

FILENAME in a Bash script and set it equal to the second command-line

argument?

A. $FILENAME = $2

B. FILENAME=1

C. FILENAME = $(2)

D. FILENAME=$2

74. You are working with a user who is reporting that their environment

does not have certain variables defined, but other users do have those

same variables available within their environment on login. The issue

was not corrected by having the user log out and then log in again, and

you can see their successful login. What is the most likely explanation for

this issue?

A. The user has logged in from the console.

B. The user is using a different shell.

C. The user has removed the environment variables manually.

D. The user is logging in to a different system.

75. Which environment variable contains the username of the currently

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

logged-in user?

A. LOGNAME

B. LOGIN

C. LOGGEDIN

D. LOGINUSER

76. Which file test operator is used to determine if the file is a symbolic link?

A. -h

B. -p

C. -S

D. -t

77. Which option to the readonly command marks a function as being read-

only?

A. -a

B. -r

C. -f

D. -p

78. Which find command will locate all files where the users have the

execute bit set?

A. find ./ -type f -perm 700

B. find / -type f -perm -u+x

C. find / -type f -perm 777

D. find / -type f -perm -execuser

79. According to the FHS, which of the following directories is used for local

binaries?

A. /usr/local/bin

B. /usr/bin

C. /usr/sbin

D. /home/scripts

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

80. Which key sequence can be used to terminate a Bash script?

A. Ctrl+d

B. Ctrl+l

C. Ctrl+a

D. Ctrl+c

81. You need to view the current environment variables in a single line

rather than with newlines separating each variable. Which option to the

env command can be used for this purpose?

A. -n

B. -0

C. -c

D. -e

82. You are attempting to copy several files, but the cp command keeps

asking for confirmation before overwriting. Which of the following best

describes the most likely cause?

A. The cp command has been compiled to ask for confirmation.

B. The cp command always prompts for confirmation.

C. The cp command cannot be used for the purpose described.

D. The cp command has been aliased to include the -i option.

83. You receive an exit code of 1 when working with the grep command in a

Bash script. What does exit code 1 mean with grep?

A. Error

B. Success

C. Search pattern not found

D. Search pattern found

84. Which of the file test operators is used to determine if a file is a

directory?

A. -e

B. -d

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. -w

D. -a

85. Which of the following statements prepends the /usr/local/bin path to

the path for a Bash shell?

A. $PATH=/usr/local/bin:$PATH

B. PATH=/usr/local/bin:$PATH

C. PATH=$PATH:/usr/local/bin

D. PATH=$PATH;/usr/local/bin

86. Which looping construct is executed at least once in a Bash script?

A. while

B. for

C. until

D. case

87. Which character or character sequence is equivalent to the source built-

in in Bash?

A. <>

B. .

C. ->

D. %

88. Which option to the export built-in command displays the list of

exported variables?

A. -p

B. -a

C. -t

D. -d

89. Which character or character sequence denotes the beginning of a while

loop in a Bash script?

A. start

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. {

C. >>

D. do

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 6

Topic 106: User Interfaces and Desktops

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

106.1 Install and configure X11.

Key knowledge areas:

Understanding of the X11 architecture

Basic understanding and knowledge of the X Window

configuration file

Overwrite specific aspects of Xorg configuration, such as

keyboard layout.

Understand the components of desktop environments, such as

display managers and window managers.

Manage access to the X server and display applications on

remote X servers.

Awareness of Wayland

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/X11/xorg.conf

/etc/X11/xorg.conf.d/

~/.xsession-errors

xhost

xauth

DISPLAY

106.2 Graphical desktops

Key knowledge areas:

Awareness of major desktop environments

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Awareness of protocols to access remote desktop sessions

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

KDE

Gnome

Xfce

X11

XDMCP

VNC

Spice

RDP

106.3 Accessibility

Key knowledge areas:

Basic knowledge of visual settings and themes

Basic knowledge of assistive technology

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

High contrast/large print desktop themes

Screen reader

Braille display

Screen magnifier

On-screen keyboard

Sticky/repeat keys

Slow/bounce/toggle keys

Mouse keys

Gestures

Voice recognition

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. Within which configuration file is the greeter configured for LightDM?

A. /etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf

B. /etc/lightdm/greeter.conf

C. /etc/lightdm.conf

D. /var/lib/lightdm/lightdm.conf

2. Which section in /etc/X11/xorg.conf is used to describe configurations

for a given graphics card and monitor pair?

A. Server

B. Screen

C. VidMode

D. Video

3. When you’re setting the frequency options for a given monitor, which of

the following is not an available frequency unit?

A. uHz

B. MHz

C. kHz

D. M

4. Which command on a systemd-based system is used to disable booting

into a GUI?

A. systemctl gui-boot disable

B. systemctl set-default boot-gui false

C. systemctl set-default multi-user.target

D. systemctl set-default-multi false

5. Assuming X forwarding has been enabled on the SSH server, which

environment variable is used to set the location for newly spawned

windows from within an SSH session?

A. DISPLAY

B. XTERMINAL

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. XTERM

D. XDISP

6. Within the greeter section of a display manager such as GNOME Display

Manager (GDM), which option sets the welcome message for users

logging in locally?

A. LoginMessage

B. Login

C. WinGreet

D. Welcome

7. Within GNOME, enabling sticky keys can be done by pressing which key

five times in a row?

A. Ctrl

B. Enter

C. Shift

D. Tab

8. Which option in the Module section of the xorg.conf configuration file

causes a default module to be unloaded or not loaded by default?

A. Disable

B. Unload

C. LoadDisable

D. DisableLoad

9. Which program is used in a GNOME environment as a screen reader?

A. Orca

B. Screed

C. Screen

D. Reader

10. Assuming a monitor that is currently set at 1024×768, which command

will change the screen resolution so that icons and other elements appear

larger?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. xterm -r 0

B. xset res 1024x768

C. xrandr -s 800x600

D. xVGA

11. LightDM typically allows guest login by default. Which configuration

option within SeatDefaults changes this to disallow guests?

A. guest-login=false

B. guest=false

C. allowg=false

D. allow-guest=false

12. When using XFree86 as the X server, which command will cause the X

server to query for hardware and create a new configuration file?

A. XFree86 --newconfig

B. XFree86 --query

C. XFree96 -configure

D. xf -config

13. Which configuration option for X is used to configure the keyboard

model?

A. XkbLayout

B. XkbModel

C. XkbType

D. XkbInput

14. Which configuration line with a Monitor section of an X server

configuration file will set the vertical refresh rate between 55 and 75

hertz?

A. Vert 55-75

B. VertRefresh 55.0 - 75.0

C. VertSync 55.0 - 75.0

D. RefreshMode 55.0 - 75.0

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

15. Within which file can a user place commands for executing X clients?

A. ∼/.xclients

B. ∼/.xsess.rc

C. ∼/.xsessrc

D. ∼/.xsession

16. Which AccelerationProfile for an input device such as a mouse enables

linear acceleration (more speed and more acceleration)?

A. 0

B. –1

C. 6

D. 7

17. Which of the following directories is used by an Xorg-based server for

storage of fonts?

A. /usr/share/fonts

B. /usr/X11/fonts

C. /etc/fonts

D. /var/font/xorg

18. Native support for a Braille display requires a minimum of which kernel

version?

A. 2.2.0

B. 2.4.22

C. 2.6.26

D. 3.2.1

19. Which configuration option in an xorg.conf file can be set to prevent a

user from changing video modes using the Ctrl+Alt+Keypad-Plus and

Ctrl+Alt+Keypad-Minus?

A. DontZoom

B. Modes=No

C. NoModeSwitch

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. DontZap

20. In which location does the xauth utility look for the X authority file?

A. ∼/.Xauth

B. ∼/.xauth.cfg

C. ∼/.Xauthority

D. ∼/.xau

21. Access to hosts controlled with XDMCP is configured in which file?

A. xdmcp.access.conf

B. XDMCPAccess.cfg

C. Xaccess

D. XDaccess.conf

22. When using KDE, which program provides magnification functionality?

A. xmag

B. mag

C. pmag

D. kmag

23. Which signal is used by an X server to cause a clean exit?

A. SIGTERM

B. SIGKILL

C. SIGCLEAN

D. SIGEX

24. Within GNOME, which section of GNOME Control Center is used to

choose a high-contrast theme?

A. Display

B. Appearance

C. Locale

D. Contrast

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

25. Which of the following best describes the concept of a mouse gesture?

A. A mouse gesture enables special clicks, such as a right-click context

menu.

B. A mouse gesture facilitates the use of programs by moving the

mouse in a certain way.

C. A mouse gesture is used for login purposes.

D. A mouse gesture is used to capture screenshots.

26. In GNOME 3.9 or later, which keyboard shortcut activates the screen

reader?

A. Super+R

B. Super+S

C. Ctrl+Super+S

D. Alt+Super+S

27. Assume that the display manager has been disabled on boot. Which

command can be used after login to start the X server?

A. xs

B. xstart

C. X -start

D. startx

28. Which option in an xorg.conf file configures the amount of time before

the screen goes into blank mode but does not go into standby and is

available on non-Display Power Management Signaling (DPMS)-capable

monitors?

A. StandbyTime

B. BlankTime

C. SuspendTime

D. OffTime

29. Which of the following commands helps you to determine information

about a given window within an X session, including information on the

window size and its position?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. xkbinfo

B. xdspy

C. xwininfo

D. xver

30. Which option/button on the GNOME On-Screen Keyboard (GOK) is used

show the keys that would be used in place of a mouse?

A. Mouse

B. MouseKeys

C. Movement

D. Compose

31. Which of the following commands allows a host named cwa to connect to

the X server?

A. xconnect cwa

B. xterm +cwa

C. xhost +cwa

D. xf cwa

32. Which of the following options in the client SSH configuration file needs

to be enabled so that X sessions can be sent over an SSH connection?

A. X11Connect yes

B. ForwardX11 yes

C. ForwardX yes

D. XForward yes

33. Which configuration option in a Files section of an xorg.conf

configuration file can be used to add a path in which the server will

search for fonts?

A. FontSection

B. Fonts

C. FontLoc

D. FontPath

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

34. Which assistive technology is used to provide an input method for users

who cannot type but can use a pointer, such as a mouse?

A. Keyboard

B. Sticky keys

C. Mouse keys

D. On-screen keyboard

35. Which environment variable can be used to specify the location of a

user’s xauth authority file?

A. XAUTH

B. USERXAUTH

C. XAUTHORITY

D. xauthloc

36. When using LightDM, which key combination is used to revert back to a

terminal?

A. Alt+Ctrl+F2

B. Alt+Ctrl+F1

C. Ctrl+F1

D. Ctrl+Esc

37. Which option in the LightDM configuration enables automatic login for a

specific user?

A. auto-login

B. autologin-user

C. autologin

D. auto-login-user

38. Which of the following is a legacy utility that can be used to set

accessibility options on older systems?

A. Xaccessibility

B. Xas

C. AccessX

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. setX

39. Which command, when executed on a remote host, will send the display

of X programs to the local client? (Assume Bash is used as the shell.)

A. export DISPLAY

B. env DISPLAY

C. setx HOST

D. export XHOST

40. Which option in GOK is used to display the keys that correspond to a

given application’s menu?

A. Menus

B. Activate

C. MenuKeys

D. Keys

41. Which directory is used to store individual configuration files related to

LightDM?

A. /etc/light

B. /etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf.d

C. /usr/lightdm

D. /etc/lightdm.conf

42. Which environment variable is used by Xsession to specify the width of a

terminal device?

A. TERMCHAR

B. COLUMNS

C. CHARACTERWIDTH

D. TERMCOL

43. Which option within the Device section for a video card will set the

amount of RAM available on the card?

A. VRAM

B. RAM

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. VideoRam

D. vRam

44. When configuring a Screen section in an X configuration file, the Display

subsection can contain the color depth. What is the name of the option to

set the color depth of the given display?

A. ColorDepth

B. Depth

C. CDepth

D. colorDep

45. Multiple server layouts may be created within an X configuration file.

Which option is used to differentiate between the different server layout

options?

A. ID

B. Identifier

C. LayoutName

D. Layout

46. Which command can be used to create a fonts.scale file definition when

executed against the current directory?

A. mkfontsscale

B. mk.fonts

C. mkfontfile

D. fontmk

47. What abbreviation used in X signifies a display that utilizes additional

capabilities such as extended power-saving capabilities?

A. DPMS

B. XPMS

C. DISPPWR

D. PWRD

48. What is the name of the accessibility function that provides an

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

alternative to the Orca program to assist users who have visual

impairments?

A. Viz

B. emacspeak

C. Ahleah

D. vAssist

49. Which of the following is a reference implementation of the Wayland

protocol?

A. Wlnd

B. Weston

C. Wausau

D. Wittenberg

50. Within an xorg configuration file, which option sets the inactivity

timeout for the suspend mode of a DPMS-capable monitor?

A. InactTimeout

B. InactivityTime

C. SuspendTime

D. InTmout

51. When the X server is started as a normal user, configuration files from

which directory are also included?

A. /etc/X

B. /etc/X11/UserConfig

C. /etc/X11/xorg.conf.d

D. /etc/X/UserConf.d/

52. Which of the following remote desktop protocols uses no compression or

transport/session encryption?

A. SSH

B. XDMCP

C. XR

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. RD

53. Within which desktop implementation would you find the xfwm4

window manager?

A. XWin

B. KDXF

C. Exf

D. Xfce

54. Which option to Spice startup disables simple authentication?

A. disable-auth

B. disable-ticketing

C. disable-authentication

D. disable-simpleauth

55. Which speech recognition software is included with the KDE desktop

environment?

A. Alvin

B. Simon

C. Theodore

D. Zeppo

56. Within the GNOME 3 desktop environment, within which Settings panel

are the options for slow keys found?

A. Access

B. Typing Settings

C. Keyboard

D. Universal Access

57. When an X session is already running, which command can be used to

enable pointer keys?

A. setxkbmap

B. ptrkeys

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. pointerkeys

D. keypad -ptrkeys

58. Which of the following provides a server-side implementation of Remote

Desktop (RDP) for Linux?

A. lrdp

B. xrdp

C. rdp-linux

D. lindp

59. You are attempting to edit the sudoers file with visudo over an SSH

connection on a system that has GNOME installed and you receive an

error indicating that gedit cannot run. Which of the following commands

can be used to solve this issue?

A. export VISUAL="/bin/vim"

B. export DISPLAY

C. subst DISPLAY=local

D. env VISUAL=ssh

60. Which option to x11vnc sets the password to be used for clients

connecting to the server?

A. -password

B. -passwd

C. -pass

D. -auth

61. Which program is used to add entries to the X authority file?

A. xf

B. xauthen

C. authx

D. xauth

62. Which assistive technology will ignore keys that are pressed in

succession or held down?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. Sticky keys

B. Mouse keys

C. Bounce keys

D. On-screen keyboard

63. Which environment variable is used by Xsession if the Xsession error file

cannot be opened in its default location?

A. XLOG

B. TMPDIR

C. SESSLOG

D. LOGTMP

64. From within an X session, which of the following commands shows

information about the display, including resolution and color depth?

A. xinfo

B. xterm

C. xwin

D. xdpyinfo

65. Which of the following files is the configuration file for Weston?

A. ∼/.config/weston.cfg

B. ∼/.config/weston.ini

C. ∼/weston.cfg

D. ∼/.westoncfg

66. Which of the following remote desktop programs offers transport layer

security?

A. x11vnc

B. xrd

C. tls

D. x11rtm

67. Which add-on to Orca enables braille display support?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. brl

B. brltty

C. brldis

D. dispbrl

68. Which of the following is a screen magnifier program?

A. xmag

B. xzoom

C. xzmag

D. scrmag

69. Which GRUB variable can be used to beep when the GRUB prompt is

ready to accept input?

A. GRUB_BEEP

B. BEEP_START

C. GRUB_START_TONE

D. GRUB_INIT_TUNE

70. You need to remove a host from being able to connect to the X server.

Which of the following will remove a host named cwa from being able to

connect?

A. xrem cwa

B. xhost -cwa

C. xhost -rem:cwa

D. xrem -host cwa

71. The X Display Manager, xdm, runs various scripts as part of the login

process. Which of the following scripts is executed as the user logging in?

A. Xstart

B. Xsession

C. Xstartup

D. Xuser.conf

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

72. Which option to the X server disables listening for TCP connections?

A. -nolisten tcp

B. -notcp

C. -noconn tcp

D. -noconnect tcp

73. Which signal is used to close existing connections, free resources, and

restore defaults for an X server?

A. SIGKILL

B. SIGHUP

C. SIGN4

D. SIGALL

74. Which option in the SeatDefaults section of the lightdm.conf

configuration file is used to disable the display of usernames for login?

A. greeter-disable-user

B. greeter-enable-login

C. greeter-show-manual-login

D. greeter-disable-auto-login

75. Which option to the xauth program disables hostname resolution?

A. -r

B. -n

C. -h

D. -m

76. Which command will switch the system into an init in which the X server

is not typically executed?

A. telinit 6

B. telinit 1

C. telinit 3

D. telinit 5

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

77. What is the default location for the error log if the X server is run with

xdm?

A. /etc/X11.log

B. /var/log/Xdm.log

C. /usr/lib/X11/xdm/xdm-errors

D. /var/log/xdmerrors

78. Which script can be used for per-user initialization of xinit?

A. ∼/.xinit.conf

B. ∼/.xinitrc

C. ∼/.xinit.rc

D. ∼/.xinit.cfg

79. Which option prevents abstract sockets from listening with X11?

A. -nolisten sock

B. -nolisten absock

C. -nolisten local

D. -nolisten socklocal

80. Which option to XDMCP enables sending of BroadcastQuery packets?

A. -bcast

B. -bcastQ

C. -broadcastQuery

D. -broadcast

81. When using GDM as the display manager, which GUI program can be

used to set options for the login window?

A. gdmlogin

B. gdmconfig

C. gdmsetup

D. gdm

82. Within the XDMCP access configuration file, there is a line like the

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

following:

*.example.com

Which of the following describes how access will be treated for hosts

from example.com?

A. Only the host named *.example.com can connect.

B. No hosts from example.com can connect.

C. Any host within example.com can connect.

D. Hosts that begin with * within example.com can connect.

83. When using xhost, what is the syntax to enable a host named san to

connect using IPv6?

A. xhost +ipv6:san

B. xhost -enablev6 san

C. xhost +inet6:san

D. xhost +enablev6 san

84. Within which file are errors for Xsession and X client processes placed?

A. ∼/.xsession-error.log

B. ∼/.xsession-errors

C. ∼/.xclient.log

D. ∼/.xclient.errorlog

85. GNOME includes native on-screen keyboard functionality. Which of the

following commands starts the on-screen keyboard?

A. gok

B. osk

C. kb

D. oskb

86. Which option to the xauth program specifies the authority file to use?

A. -a

B. -f

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. -a

D. -v

87. Which accessibility option is helpful if several keys are sometimes

pressed or if there is difficulty in consistently pressing the correct key on

the keyboard?

A. Key toggle

B. Slow keys

C. KeyAssist

D. UniversalKeys

88. On which port does RDP listen by default?

A. 389

B. 8080

C. 3389

D. 3306

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 7

Topic 107: Administrative Tasks

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

107.1 Manage user and group accounts and related system

files.

Key knowledge areas:

Add, modify, and remove users and groups.

Manage user/group info in password/group databases.

Create and manage special purpose and limited accounts.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/passwd

/etc/shadow

/etc/group

/etc/skel/

chage

getent

groupadd

groupdel

groupmod

passwd

useradd

userdel

usermod

107.2 Automate system administration tasks by scheduling

jobs.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Key knowledge areas:

Manage cron and at jobs.

Configure user access to cron and at services.

Understand systemd timer units.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/cron.{d,daily,hourly,monthly,weekly}/

/etc/at.deny

/etc/at.allow

/etc/crontab

/etc/cron.allow

/etc/cron.deny

/var/spool/cron

crontab

atq

atrm

systemctl

systemd-run

107.3 Localization and internationalization

Key knowledge areas:

Configure locale settings and environment variables.

Configure time zone settings and environment variables.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/timezone

/etc/localtime

/usr/share/zoneinfo/

LC_*

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

LC_ALL

LANG

/usr/bin/locale

tzselect

timedatectl

date

iconv

UTF-8

ISO-8859

ASCII

Unicode

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. You need to enable the web server (running as the www-data user and

group) to write into a directory called /home/webfiles. Which commands

will accomplish this task in the most secure manner?

A. chgrp www-data /home/webfiles ; chmod 775 /home/webfiles

B. chmod 777 /home/webfiles

C. chgrp www-data /home/webfiles ; chmod 711 /home/webfiles

D. chmod 707 /home/webfiles

2. Which of the following will execute a job through cron at 12:15 a.m. and

12:15 p.m. every day?

A. 0,12 15 * * *

B. 15 0,12 * * *

C. 15 * * * 0/12

D. */12 * * * 15

3. Which file is used to indicate the local time zone on a Linux server?

A. /etc/timez

B. /etc/timezoneconfig

C. /etc/localtime

D. /etc/localtz

4. When importing entries into the LDAP database using ldapadd -f

<filename>, in which format should the file be?

A. LDAP

B. TXT

C. CSV

D. LDIF

5. Which of the following commands removes an expiration from an

account?

A. sudo chage -l username

B. sudo chage -E -1 username

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. sudo chage -E now username

D. sudo chage --noexpire username

6. Within which directory will you find files related to the time zone for

various regions?

A. /etc/timezoneinfo

B. /etc/zoneinfo

C. /var/zoneinfo

D. /usr/share/zoneinfo

7. Which of the following commands schedules a series of commands to

execute 1 hour from now?

A. atq +1hr

B. at now + 1 hour

C. atq

D. at -1

8. You need to delete a user from the system, including their home

directory. Which of the following commands accomplishes this task?

A. userdel

B. userdel -r

C. userdel -R

D. deluser

9. Which file contains a list of usernames, UIDs, and encrypted passwords?

A. /etc/passwd

B. /etc/shadow

C. /etc/encpass

D. /etc/grouppass

10. Which job scheduler should you use if the computer on which you need

to schedule the job is powered down at various times?

A. cron.d

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. cron.hourly

C. anacron

D. at

11. Which of the following commands provides the current date and time in

a format of seconds since the epoch?

A. date +%seconds

B. date +%s

C. date --seconds

D. date --now

12. Which option to the iconv command shows the available character sets

on a given system?

A. --showchar

B. --show

C. --list

D. --all

13. Which environment variable controls the format of dates and times, such

as a 12-hour or 24-hour formatted clock?

A. LOCALE_DATE

B. DATE_FORMAT

C. LC_TIME

D. LC_DATE

14. Which command is recommended for configuration of slapd for

OpenLDAP versions 2.3 and later?

A. slapd-conf

B. config-slapd

C. openldap-config

D. slapd-config

15. Which shortcut within cron enables running of a task every day at

midnight?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. @daily

B. @daybegin

C. @topday

D. @beginday

16. Which of the following encoding provides a multibyte representation of

characters?

A. ISO-8859

B. UTF-8

C. ISO-L

D. UFTMulti

17. Which of the following commands changes a group called

DomainAdmins to DomainUsers?

A. groupmod -n DomainAdmins DomainUsers

B. groupchg DomainAdmins DomainUsers

C. chgroup DomainAdmins DomainUsers

D. group -N DomainAdmins DomainUsers

18. Which file stores group information on a Linux server?

A. /etc/groupinfo

B. /etc/groups

C. /etc/roles

D. /etc/group

19. Which command can be used to create an LDIF file from the current

LDAP database?

A. slapdump

B. ldapdump

C. slapcat

D. catldap

20. You are looking for a scheduled job that is not found in /etc/crontab,

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

through systemd timers, or within /var/spool/cron. What is another

location in which the scheduled job might be stored?

A. /etc/crontabs

B. /etc/cron.conf

C. /etc/cron.d/

D. /etc/sked

21. You need to determine if LDAP integration is working correctly. In order

to do so, you would like to obtain a list of users, as read by

/etc/nsswitch.conf. Which command can be used for this purpose?

A. getuser

B. getent

C. usermod

D. userlist

22. What is the name of the configuration file that contains information

about group and user addition, such as the maximum and minimum user

and group IDs, to be used when adding users and groups?

A. /etc/groupinfo

B. /etc/login.defs

C. /etc/login.info

D. /etc/loginlist

23. Which environment variable is used for localization related to

measurement units such as metric?

A. LC_METRIC

B. LC_MEASURE

C. LC_MEASUREMENT

D. LC_MEASUREUNITS

24. Which of the following lines added to .profile in a user’s home directory

will set their time zone to Central time?

A. TZ=/Central ; export TZ

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. TIMEZONE='America/Chicago' ; export TIMEZONE

C. set TZ=/Central

D. TZ='America/Chicago'; export TZ

25. Within which directory will you find scripts that are scheduled to run

through cron every 24 hours?

A. /etc/cron.daily

B. /etc/cron.weekly

C. /etc/cron.hourly24

D. /etc/crontab

26. Which of the following values for the LANG variable will configure the

system to bypass locale translations where possible?

A. LANG=COMPAT

B. LANG=NONE

C. LANG=C

D. LANG=END

27. When running useradd, which option needs to be specified in order for

the user’s home directory to be created?

A. -h

B. -m

C. -x

D. -a

28. Which of the following commands locks out password-based login for a

user but does not prevent other forms of login?

A. usermod -L

B. userdel -r

C. useradd -h

D. userlock

29. If you need to temporarily reconfigure all locale variables and settings for

a given session, which environment variable can be used?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. LC_LIST

B. LC_GLOBAL

C. LC_ALL

D. ALL_LOCALE

30. Which of the following will run a command called

/usr/local/bin/changehome.sh as the www-data user when placed in

/etc/crontab?

A. 1 1 * * * www-data /usr/local/bin/changehome.sh

B. www-data changehome.sh

C. */1 www-data changehome.sh

D. * * */www-data /usr/local/bin/changehome.sh

31. Which of the following commands produces a report listing the last

password change date for all users on the system?

A. passwd -a

B. passwd -S

C. passwd -a -S

D. passwd --all

32. Assume that passwords must be changed every 60 days. Which command

will change the date of the user’s last password change without the user

actually changing the account password?

A. chage -f

B. chage -W

C. chage -l

D. chage -d

33. Which of the following files is used by anacron for reading configuration

information related to jobs?

A. /etc/anacron.d

B. /etc/anacrontab

C. /etc/anacron.config

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. /etc/anacron.conf

34. Which of the following commands is used to add entries to the

OpenLDAP database?

A. ldapd

B. adduser

C. addldap

D. ldapadd

35. Which file contains a list of users who are not allowed to create cron

scheduled tasks?

A. /etc/cron.users

B. /etc/cron.deny

C. /etc/cron.denyusers

D. /etc/cron.userlist

36. You are viewing the /etc/passwd file and see a * where the password

should be. What does the presence of a * indicate within the password

file?

A. The system uses forward password aging.

B. The system uses shadow passwords.

C. The system has been compromised.

D. Users have a * for their passwords.

37. Which of the following best describes the relationship between UIDs and

GIDs on a Linux system?

A. The UID and GID are the same across the system for a given user.

B. Each user has a UID and GID that are the same and are created

when the user is created.

C. The UID represents the user whereas the GID is a globally unique

user ID.

D. There is no direct relationship between UID and GID.

38. Which of the following commands is used to re-create indexes based on

existing slapd databases?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. ldapind

B. ldapindex

C. slapindex

D. indexldap

39. Which command is used to change a user’s home directory to

/srv/data/username and move the contents at the same time?

A. usermod -md /srv/data/username <username>

B. homedir -m /srv/data/username <username>

C. userex -m /srv/data/username <username>

D. userchg /m /srv/data/username -d <username>

40. Which option to useradd will add groups for a user?

A. -g

B. -x

C. -l

D. -G

41. Which command will list the cron entries for a given user as denoted by

<username>?

A. crontab -l -u <username>

B. crontab -u <username>

C. cron -u <username>

D. cronent -u <username>

42. Which option to useradd creates a system user rather than a normal

user?

A. -r

B. -s

C. -a

D. -S

43. Which file contains encrypted password information for groups?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. /etc/group

B. /etc/gshadow

C. /etc/gsecure

D. /etc/group.conf

44. Which of the following commands can be used to help with recovery of a

corrupted OpenLDAP database?

A. openldap-recover

B. oreco

C. slapd-recover

D. slapd_db_recover

45. Which of the following best describes the use of the groupdel command?

A. You may force group deletion with the -f option.

B. If a user’s primary group is to be deleted, that user must be deleted

first or have their primary group changed.

C. groupdel can be run at any time, regardless of group membership.

D. The -r option for groupdel will recursively change user’s GIDs after

group deletion.

46. Which of the following commands displays the UID, primary group, and

supplemental groups for a given user?

A. id

B. getid

C. passwd

D. chage

47. Which option to the usermod command is used to change a given user’s

real name?

A. -R

B. -n

C. -d

D. -c

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

48. Assume that you have deleted a user account with UID 1501, including

the -r option. Which command should you also run to look for other files

that might have been owned by the user?

A. find -id 1501

B. grep 1501 *

C. grep -u 1501 *

D. find / -uid 1501

49. On which port does the slapd LDAP daemon listen for connections?

A. 389

B. 3389

C. 3306

D. 110

50. Which of the following commands will set the systemwide time zone to

America/Los_Angeles?

A. ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/America/Los_Angeles /etc/localtime

B. ln -sf America/Los_Angeles ; /etc/localtime

C. ln -sd /etc/localtime /usr/share/timezone/America/Los_Angeles

D. ln -sf /etc/localtime /usr/share/zoneinfo/America/Los_Angeles

51. Which locale-related variable is used for currency-related localization?

A. LC_MONE

B. LC_CURRENCY

C. LC_MONETARY

D. LC_CURR

52. Which option to systemd-run adds a timed event?

A. --timed

B. --add-timer

C. --on-calendar

D. --on-time

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

53. Which file is used to provide a list of users who can add and delete cron

jobs?

A. /etc/cron.job

B. /etc/cron.allow

C. /etc/cron.users

D. /etc/crontab

54. Which debug level for slapd is used to provide debugging of

configuration file processing?

A. 1

B. 64

C. 8

D. 0

55. Which command deletes an at job with an ID of 3?

A. atdt

B. at -l

C. atrm 3

D. rmat 3

56. Which command on a Debian-based system can be used to change the

time zone using the package-based tools?

A. dpkg-reconfigure time

B. dpkg-reconfigure tzdata

C. apt-select tzdata

D. apt-config timezone

57. What will be logged with the loglevel set to 0x10 in a slapd.conf

configuration file?

A. No debugging

B. Trace debugging

C. Stats logging

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. Packets sent and received

58. Within which directory should you place files in order for the files to be

copied to a user’s home directory when the user is created?

A. /etc/skel

B. /etc/homedir

C. /home/usertemplate

D. /etc/template

59. Which command displays a list of jobs currently scheduled with at?

A. atlist

B. atq

C. atl

D. at --jobs

60. On which port does LDAP over SSL listen for connections?

A. 389

B. 443

C. 636

D. 3128

61. Which scheduler can be used to schedule a command to run once at a

certain time?

A. at

B. cron

C. job

D. jobctl

62. Which file provides a list of users who are allowed to create at jobs?

A. /etc/at.users

B. /etc/at.scheduler

C. /etc/at.conf

D. /etc/at.allow

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

63. Which file extension is used for systemd timer units?

A. .conf

B. .timer

C. .timerd

D. .timeevent

64. Within which directory would you find a list of files corresponding to the

users who have current cron jobs on the system?

A. /var/spool/cron/crontabs

B. /var/spool/jobs

C. /etc/cron

D. /etc/cron.users

65. When using slapadd for a large import, an error occurs at roughly 90

percent completion. Which option to slapadd enables specification of a

line number from which the import will be restarted?

A. -l

B. -f

C. -q

D. -j

66. Which argument to the locale command displays currently available

locales for a given system?

A. -c

B. -a

C. -p

D. -s

67. Which option to timedatectl sets the system clock?

A. --adjust-system-clock

B. -s

C. -c

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. -a

68. Which option to the file command displays information on the MIME

type of the file being interrogated?

A. -i

B. -m

C. -l

D. -a

69. Which environment variable is used to set the paper size?

A. LC_PAPERSIZE

B. LC_PAPER

C. LC_PRINTERQ

D. LC_PRINTSIZE

70. Which of the following is used as a systemwide cron file?

A. /etc/cron.d

B. /etc/cron.sys

C. /etc/crontab

D. /etc/cron.tab

71. Which command can be used to view the available timezones on a

system and obtain output that can be used in scripts for setting the time

zone?

A. tzd

B. /etc/locale

C. tzdata

D. tzselect

72. Which option within a systemd timer unit will start a timer 90 minutes

after boot?

A. OnBootSec=90min

B. OnBoot=90min

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. OnBootHour=1.5

D. StartOnBoot=90min

73. Which abbreviation is another name for information like the user’s full

name, telephone number, and other contact information found in

/etc/passwd?

A. USERINFO

B. GECOS

C. HOMEINFO

D. CDATA

74. Which option to the groupadd command specifies the GID for the group?

A. -g

B. -a

C. -h

D. -k

75. When working with systemd timer units, which option to systemctl

displays the active timers?

A. list-timerunits

B. show-timers

C. list-timers

D. list-activetimers

76. Which shortcut to the OnCalendar systemd timer function indicates that

the timer unit should run once a week?

A. OnceAWeek

B. weekly

C. everyweek

D. oneperweek

77. Which option to the crontab command removes the current crontab?

A. -r

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. -l

C. -g

D. -f

78. Which variable in /etc/default/useradd controls the location of the

skeleton home directory?

A. SKELETON

B. SKEL

C. SKELDIR

D. SKELLOC

79. Which option to getent enumerates the password database for a given

system?

A. password

B. listpass

C. passwd

D. showpassdb

80. Which directory contains the jobs scheduled with at?

A. /var/spool/cron/atjobs

B. /var/spool/at

C. /var/spool/cron/at

D. /var/spool/atjobs

81. Which variable in /etc/login.defs controls the minimum group ID to

use on the system?

A. GIDMIN

B. GROUPID_MIN

C. GID_MIN

D. MIN_GID

82. Which variable in /etc/login.defs contains the location of a user’s email

directory for use by programs such as userdel?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. EMAILDIR

B. DIR_EMAIL

C. MAILDIR

D. MAIL_DIR

83. Which file contains user information such as username and real name

and is readable by all users of the system?

A. /etc/pass

B. /etc/shadow

C. /etc/passwd

D. /etc/userinfo

84. Which shortcut can be used to indicate that a cron job should be

executed on restart?

A. @restart

B. @startup

C. @reboot

D. @onboot

85. Which option to groupadd specifies that the group will be a system

group?

A. -r

B. -m

C. -j

D. -b

86. Within which directory are databases stored for OpenLDAP?

A. /var/lib/ldap

B. /var/cache/openldap

C. /var/share/ldap

D. /usr/share/openldap

87. When listing systemd timer units, which option to list-timers shows

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

both active and inactive units?

A. --all

B. --active-and-inactive

C. --inactive

D. All are shown by default.

88. Which file provides a list of users who are not allowed to create at jobs?

A. /etc/at.allow

B. /etc/at.deny

C. /etc/at.denyusers

D. /etc/at.conf.deny

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 8

Topic 108: Essential System Services

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

108.1 Maintain system time.

Key knowledge areas:

Set the system date and time.

Set the hardware clock to the correct time in UTC.

Configure the correct timezone.

Basic NTP configuration using ntpd and chrony

Knowledge of using the pool.ntp.org service

Awareness of the ntpq command

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/usr/share/zoneinfo/

/etc/timezone

/etc/localtime

/etc/ntp.conf

/etc/chrony.conf

date

hwclock

timedatectl

ntpd

ntpdate

chronyc

pool.ntp.org

108.2 System logging

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Key knowledge areas:

Basic configuration of rsyslog

Understanding of standard facilities, priorities, and actions

Query the systemd journal.

Filter systemd journal data by criteria such as date, service, or

priority.

Configure persistent systemd journal storage and journal size.

Delete old systemd journal data.

Retrieve systemd journal data from a rescue system or

filesystem copy.

Understand interaction of rsyslog with systemd-journald.

Configuration of logrotate

Awareness of syslog and syslog-ng

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/rsyslog.conf

/var/log/

logger

logrotate

/etc/logrotate.conf

/etc/logrotate.d/

journalctl

systemd-cat

/etc/systemd/journald.conf

/var/log/journal/

108.3 Mail Transfer Agent (MTA) basics

Key knowledge areas:

Create email aliases.

Configure email forwarding.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Knowledge of commonly available MTA programs (Postfix,

sendmail, Exim) (no configuration)

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

~/.forward

sendmail emulation layer commands

newaliases

mail

mailq

Postfix

sendmail

Exim

108.4 Manage printers and printing.

Key knowledge areas:

Basic CUPS configuration (for local and remote printers)

Manage user print queues.

Troubleshoot general printing problems.

Add and remove jobs from configured printer queues.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

CUPS configuration files, tools, and utilities

/etc/cups/

lpd legacy interface (lpr, lprm, lpq)

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. Which of the following commands is used to examine the systemd

journal or log file?

A. journallist

B. ctlj

C. journalctl

D. jctl

2. Which system logging facility is used for messages from the kernel?

A. syslog

B. kernel

C. kern

D. system

3. To what server address can you set a Network Time Protocol (NTP) client

in order to receive time from a regionally local server?

A. 127.0.0.1

B. 192.168.1.100

C. ntp.example.com

D. pool.ntp.org

4. What is the name of the systemd service that provides logging facilities?

A. systemd-journald

B. systemd-loggingd

C. systemd-syslog

D. journalctl

5. Which option within a logrotate configuration stanza informs logrotate

to create a new log file owned by the user and group www-data and with

permission 600?

A. new www-data.www-data mode 600

B. create 600 www-data www-data

C. new 600 www-data

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. createlog mode 600 user www-data group www-data

6. Within which directory hierarchy will you find configuration files related

to printing with the Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS) printing

system?

A. /etc/cupsd

B. /etc/cups.d

C. /etc/CUPS

D. /etc/cups

7. Which access control directive in a CUPS configuration file configures

the system to accept connections from the local network with addresses

from 192.168.1.1 through 192.168.1.127?

A. Allow 192.168.1.0/25

B. Allow 192.168.1.0/24

C. Allow 127.0.0.0/8

D. AllowHosts 192.168.1.0

8. Which of the following commands will set the date immediately and can

be used from the command line in a script?

A. ntpd

B. ntpdate pool.ntp.org

C. settime

D. time

9. When executing the ntpq command, you receive a message like read:

Connection refused. What would this typically indicate?

A. The network is down.

B. The NTP daemon is not running.

C. The use of NTP is administratively prohibited.

D. The current user does not have permission to execute ntpq.

10. Which command is used to query and work with the hardware clock on

the system?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. hwc

B. ntpdate

C. systime

D. hwclock

11. Which directory contains a listing of available time zones on a Linux

system?

A. /etc/timezones

B. /etc/tzdata

C. /usr/share/zoneinfo

D. /usr/share/timezones

12. Which syslog level is used to provide informational messages?

A. kern

B. emerg

C. debug

D. info

13. Within /etc/ntp.conf, which of the following configuration lines sets the

location of the drift file?

A. drift /var/lib/ntp/drift

B. driftfile /var/lib/ntp/drift

C. drift-file /var/lib/ntp/drift

D. driftconfig /var/lib/ntp/drift

14. Which configuration option in /etc/logrotate.conf will cause the log to

be emailed to admin@example.com when the logrotation process runs

for the selected log?

A. mailadmin@example.com

B. sendmailadmin@example.com

C. maillogadmin@example.com

D. logmailadmin@example.com

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

15. Which of the following commands is used to determine the amount of

disk space used by systemd journal logfiles?

A. journalctl --disk

B. journalctl -du

C. journalctl --disk-usage

D. journalctl -ls

16. Which of the following commands displays the current mail queue on a

Postfix server?

A. qmail

B. mailqueue

C. mail -q

D. mailq

17. When you’re running the NTP daemon, which command can you execute

to work with the NTP server in an interactive mode?

A. ntpd

B. ntpdate

C. ntpq

D. ntp-interactive

18. Assume that you want all email for the root user to be sent to

admin@example.com. Which of the following lines in /etc/aliases will

accomplish this task?

A. admin@example.com-> root

B. root ->admin@example.com

C. root,admin@example.com

D. root:admin@example.com

19. When you’re working with klogd, which option can be used to control the

file to which messages are logged?

A. -d

B. -f

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. -v

D. -l

20. Which set of programs or packages can be used for setting the system

time on a device that is offline frequently?

A. chrony

B. htpoffline

C. ntpd-off

D. chrondate

21. Which of the following commands places a file into the print queue?

A. lpr

B. lpd

C. lpq

D. lpx

22. Which of the following options to the sendmail command will print

information about the mail queue?

A. -bi

B. -queue

C. -bp

D. -f

23. Which function of the hwclock command will set the hardware clock to

the current system time?

A. -w

B. -s

C. -a

D. -m

24. What is the default port for the CUPS administrative web interface?

A. tcp/53

B. tcp/8080

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. udp/456

D. tcp/631

25. Which of the following commands causes sendmail to attempt to deliver

the messages in its queue?

A. sendmail -q

B. sendmail -b

C. sendmail -f

D. sendmail -v

26. You need to create an email address to accept email for

abuse@example.com. However, you would like abuse reports sent to

multiple email addresses within your organization. Which of the

following will send email destined for the abuse account to

admin@example.com and security@example.com?

A. Create a .forward in the home directory for the abuse user and

forward email accordingly.

B. Within /etc/aliases, add this:

abuse:admin@example.com,security@example .com.

C. Create a .forward file for root and forward email accordingly.

D. Within /etc/aliases, add this:

abuse:admin@example.com\tsecurity@example .com.

27. Which of the following commands sets the hardware clock to

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) based on the current system time?

A. hwclock --systohc --utc

B. hwclock --systohc --localtime

C. hwclock --systohc

D. hwclock --systoutc

28. You need to delete all messages from the queue on a Postfix server.

Which of the following commands will perform this action?

A. postqueue -remove

B. rm -rf

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. postfix -f

D. postsuper -d ALL

29. Which of the following URLs can be used to view a list of completed print

jobs in CUPS?

A. http://localhost:631/jobs?which_jobs=completed

B. http://localhost:631?completed

C. http://localhost:631/?completed

D. http://cups/jobs=completed

30. Which option to the journalctl command will continuously update the

display as new log entries are created?

A. -tail

B. -t

C. -f

D. -l

31. Assuming that the $ModLoad imudp configuration option has been set in

the configuration for rsyslogd, which of the following additional options

is necessary to configure the port on which the server will listen?

A. $Port 514

B. $UDPServerRun 514

C. $Listen 514

D. $UDPListen 514

32. Which of the following commands causes the mail queue to be processed

on a Postfix server?

A. postqueue -f

B. postqueue -D

C. postfix -q

D. postsuper -q

33. When running ntpd, the server will not adjust or synchronize if the time

is skewed from the NTP server by a significant amount of time. Which

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

option to ntpd disables this and causes the synchronization process to

continue even if there is a large skew?

A. ntpd -noskew

B. ntpd -skewcheck=off

C. ntpd -g 0

D. ntpd -s 0

34. Which option in journald.conf controls the maximum file size for

individual journal logs?

A. SystemMaxFileSize

B. MaxFile

C. LogFileSize

D. LogSize

35. Which command can be executed to view completed print jobs?

A. lpstat -q

B. lpq

C. lpstat -W completed

D. lpqueue -c

36. When configuring a log file for rotation, you need to execute a command

to run a script after log file rotation. Which option within the

logrotate.conf configuration file can be used to facilitate this behavior?

A. after-rotate

B. run-script

C. rotatecomplete

D. postrotate

37. You are deploying an Exim server and need to work with the firewall to

ensure the proper incoming ports are open. Which protocol and port

should you allow inbound for normal Simple Mail Transfer

Protocol (SMTP) traffic?

A. TCP/23

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. TCP/25

C. TCP/110

D. TCP/143

38. Which command should be executed after making a change to the

sendmail access database /etc/access?

A. makemap

B. makedb

C. newaccess

D. rebuilddb

39. When working with syslog-ng, which of the following is the correct path

and filename for the primary configuration file?

A. /etc/syslog-ng/syslog-ng.conf

B. /etc/syslog/syslog-ng.conf

C. /etc/syslog-ng/ng.conf

D. /etc/syslog-ng/ngd.conf

40. A developer has created an application and wants to take advantage of

syslog for logging to a custom log file. Which facility should be used for

an application such as this?

A. syslog

B. kern

C. local#

D. user

41. A user needs to work with printer-related items. Which of the following

commands adds the user (called username in the options) to the

appropriate group for this purpose?

A. usermod -aG printerusers username

B. usermod -aG lpadmin username

C. usermod -gA lpadm username

D. usermod -a lpadm username

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

42. Which option within a logrotate configuration file disables compression

of the log file?

A. compressoff

B. limitcompress

C. nocompression

D. nocompress

43. Which command should be used to enable printer sharing through

CUPS?

A. cupsctl --enable-sharing

B. cupsc --share

C. cupsctl --share-printers

D. cupsc --printer-sharing

44. Which command can be used to gather and display statistics about mail

processed on a server running sendmail?

A. mailq

B. mailstats

C. statmail

D. sendmailstats

45. You need to determine the size of the systemd journals on the system.

Which option to journalctl is used for this purpose?

A. --disk-use

B. --disk-usage

C. --disk-space

D. --disk-used

46. You are troubleshooting a problem with printing and believe the CUPS

service needs to be restarted. Which of the following commands can be

used to restart CUPS on a server running systemd?

A. systemctl restart cups.service

B. systemctl restart cups-service

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. systemctl reboot cups.target

D. systemctl restart cups.target

47. You are working with journalctl and need to see only messages that are

at a debug priority. Which of the following options enables this scenario?

A. -pri debug

B. -prior debug

C. -d debug

D. -p debug

48. Which option in a CUPS configuration file causes the daemon to listen

on all interfaces on port 631?

A. Port 631

B. Listen All:631

C. Listen 127.0.0.1:631

D. Port All:631

49. Which command is used to remove an email from the mail queue with

Postfix?

A. postsuper -d

B. postmaster

C. postfix -d

D. postdel

50. Which option to journalctl will clear logs older than five days?

A. --clear=5d

B. --vacuum-time=5d

C. --delete-older=5d

D. --clear-time=5d

51. When configuring email forwarding with Procmail, which of the

following files is used as a user-based configuration file for Procmail?

A. /home/procmail.conf

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. ~/.procmailrc

C. /etc/procmail.conf

D. ~/procmail.conf

52. Which of the following definitions in /etc/aliases will deliver mail

destined to root to two email addresses, admin@example.com and

webmaster@example.com?

A. [root] =admin@example.com, webmaster@example.com

B. root: admin webmaster

C. root: admin, webmaster

D. root:admin@example.com, webmaster@example.com

53. Which of the following commands views the contents of a message that

exists in the Postfix queue?

A. postshow

B. postless

C. postmore

D. postcat

54. Within which file will you find errors related to delivery of mail on a

Postfix server?

A. /var/log/mail

B. /var/log/postfix.log

C. /var/log/mail.err

D. /var/log/postfix.err

55. When testing SMTP communications between a client and a server, you

need to begin the conversation. Which of the following lines shows the

beginning of an SMTP conversation using Extended Hello syntax from

mail.example.com?

A. BEGIN mail.example.com

B. SMTP mail.example.com

C. HELO mail.example.com

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. EHLO mail.example.com

56. Which option to timedatectl shows the available time zones?

A. list-timezones

B. show-tz

C. --tzinfo

D. --timezones

57. You are viewing a directory listing of the /etc/localtime file and it looks

like the following:

lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 35 Oct 30 2018 /etc/localtime ->

/usr/share/zoneinfo/America/Chicago

From that directory listing, what can you tell about the file?

A. The file is a symlink to a timezone in /usr/share/zoneinfo.

B. The /usr/share/zoneinfo file is a symlink to /etc/localtime.

C. The /etc/localtime file is a hard link to /usr/share/zoneinfo.

D. The time zone cannot be set because the file must exist as its own

separate file.

58. You need to set the correct time zone on a server. How can you tell what

the current time zone is set to?

A. Run the date command.

B. Run the tzdata command.

C. Examine /proc/timezone.

D. Examine /etc/tzdata.

59. Which of the following is the configuration file used by the Chrony

package?

A. /etc/chrony.cfg

B. /etc/chrony/default.cfg

C. /etc/chrony.conf

D. /etc/chrony.d/chrony.cf

60. Which option to journalctl queries for only kernel messages?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. -ok

B. -okern

C. -k

D. -limitk

61. Which command must you run after making a change to email aliases on

a server running Postfix?

A. service postfix restart

B. newaliases

C. alias -n

D. postfix -e

62. You need to log output to the systemd journal from a script. Which of the

following commands facilitates this scenario?

A. systemd-log

B. systemd-logger

C. systemd-logm

D. systemd-cat

63. Which command can be used to remove print jobs from the queue?

A. lprm

B. lpdel

C. lpqman

D. lprmj

64. When running from a shell script, which command enables logging to

syslog?

A. logd

B. login

C. logit

D. logger

65. You need to find the mail queue path on a Postfix server. You’re using

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

postconf -d to view all parameters. Which parameter contains the mail

queue path on a Postfix server?

A. mqueue

B. queue_dir

C. mailq_path

D. mqueue_path

66. Which of the following options can be given to journalctl in order to

filter based on a service name?

A. _SYSTEMD-SERVICE

B. _SERVICENAME

C. _SYSTEMD_SERVICE

D. _SYSTEMD_UNIT

67. Which command can be used to add a job to a print queue?

A. lpadd

B. lkp

C. lp

D. lpprint

68. Which of the following files enables per-user email forwarding?

A. ~/.mailforward

B. ~/.forward

C. ~/.formail

D. ~/.forwardmail

69. Which argument to the mail command sets the subject for the email to

be sent?

A. -E

B. -s

C. -c

D. -f

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

70. Which option to the date command can be used to set the date and time?

A. date -f

B. date -t

C. date --change

D. date -s

71. Which option to journalctl will trim the journal data size so that it

consumes the amount specified?

A. --clear-size

B. --vacuum-size

C. --delete-size

D. --consume-max

72. Which option to journalctl filters based on time?

A. --since

B. --time

C. --time-t

D. --filter-time

73. When viewing the syslog configuration, you notice a minus sign (−)

preceding several log files. What is the significance of the − sign in the

configuration?

A. The use of − indicates that the log may be rotated any time.

B. The use of − indicates that the system can utilize other logging

facilities when appropriate.

C. The use of − omits the disk sync process for every entry into the log.

D. The use of − comments out the line.

74. Which option to lpr sends a print job to a given destination?

A. -P

B. -a

C. -p

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. -h

75. Which Postfix-related command is used to provide an overview of the

number of messages in the incoming and active queues arranged by age?

A. queuelist

B. postq

C. qshape

D. queueshow

76. Within the journald configuration file, which option is used to configure

the maximum space used by journal files?

A. SystemFileSizeLimit

B. SystemMaxFile

C. SystemMaxSize

D. SystemMaxUse

77. Within which directory hierarchy are queue-related messages stored for

Postfix?

A. /var/mqueue

B. /var/spool/mailq

C. /var/spool/postfix

D. /var/postfix

78. Which option to journalctl can be used to specify an alternate location

for journal data, such as might be the case when retrieving journal data

from a rescue system or a filesystem copy?

A. --alt

B. --journal-location

C. --journal-dir

D. --directory

79. Within which directory are system logs normally kept on a Linux

system?

A. /etc/logs/

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. /var/logs/

C. /var/log/

D. /tmp/log/

80. Which shortcut can be used as the destination in an Exim alias to prevent

Exim from delivering mail to a certain address, such as when you want to

essentially delete the mail rather than deliver it?

A. :del:

B. :block:

C. :blackhole:

D. :deletemail:

81. Which stanza within a CUPS printers.conf configuration file is used to

configure a default local printer with CUPS?

A. <LOCAL printerName>

B. <Printer printerName>

C. <DefaultPrinter printerName>

D. <PrintDefault printerName>

82. Which of the following commands can be used to remove all jobs queued

for printing?

A. lprm --all

B. lprm --del A

C. lprm -

D. lprm --remove ALL

83. When using the mail command, which option enables setting the From

header?

A. -f

B. -r

C. -o

D. -m

84. Which character sequence is used to precede the host or IP in order to

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

specify that TCP should be used for remote system logging in

/etc/rsyslog.conf?

A. @TCP

B. @@

C. @

D. :tcp@

85. Within the /etc/systemd/journald.conf file, which key/value pair will

enable the journal to be persistent?

A. Keep=All

B. Store=Persistence

C. Storage=Persistent

D. Keep=Persist

86. Which command can be used to monitor the status of chronyd?

A. chronyc

B. chronystat

C. chrony-stats

D. chronyd-stat

87. Within which directory will you find configuration files for various logs

that are to be rotated with logrotate?

A. /etc/logrotate

B. /etc/logs

C. /etc/logrotate.d

D. /var/spool/logrotate

88. Which of the following commands is used to view the pending messages

queue on a Postfix server?

A. postqueue -p

B. postconf -pending

C. postqueue -f

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. postsuper pending

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 9

Topic 109: Networking Fundamentals

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

109.1 Fundamentals of Internet protocols

Key knowledge areas:

Demonstrate an understanding of network masks and CIDR

notation.

Knowledge of differences between private and public “dotted

quad” IP addresses

Knowledge about common TCP and UDP ports and services (20,

21, 22, 23, 25, 53, 80, 110, 123, 139, 143, 161, 162, 389, 443, 465,

514, 636, 993, 995)

Knowledge about the differences and major features of UDP,

TCP, and ICMP

Knowledge of the major differences between IPv4 and IPv6

Knowledge of the basic features of IPv6

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/services

IPv4, IPv6

Subnetting

TCP, UDP, ICMP

109.2 Persistent network configuration

Key knowledge areas:

Understand basic TCP/IP host configuration.

Configure ethernet and Wi-Fi network configuration using

NetworkManager.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Awareness of systemd-networkd

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/hostname

/etc/hosts

/etc/nsswitch.conf

/etc/resolv.conf

nmcli

hostnamectl

ifup

ifdown

109.3 Basic network troubleshooting

Key knowledge areas:

Manually configure network interfaces, including viewing and

changing the configuration of network interfaces using

iproute2.

Manually configure routing, including viewing and changing

routing tables and setting the default route using iproute2.

Debug problems associated with the network configuration.

Awareness of legacy net-tools commands

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

hostname

ping

ping6

traceroute

traceroute6

tracepath

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

tracepath6

netcat

ifconfig

netstat

route

109.4 Configure client-side DNS.

Key knowledge areas:

Query remote DNS servers.

Configure local name resolution and use remote DNS servers.

Modify the order in which name resolution is done.

Debug errors related to name resolution.

Awareness of systemd-resolved.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/hosts

/etc/resolv.conf

/etc/nsswitch.conf

host

dig

getent

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. Which of the following commands shows the current default route

without performing Domain Name System (DNS) lookups on the IP

address(es) involved?

A. netstat -rn

B. netstat -n

C. netstat -r

D. netstat -f

2. You are having difficulty with an interface on the server and it is

currently down. Assuming that there is no hardware failure on the device

itself, which command and option can you use to display information

about the interface?

A. ifconfig -a

B. ifup

C. netstat -n

D. ifconfig

3. Which of the following is not used as a private address for internal, non-

Internet, use?

A. 172.16.4.2

B. 192.168.40.3

C. 10.74.5.244

D. 143.236.32.231

4. Which of the following commands adds a default gateway of 192.168.1.1

for interface eth0?

A. route add default gateway 192.168.1.1 eth0

B. eth0 --dg 192.168.1.1

C. route add default gw 192.168.1.1 eth0

D. route define eth0 192.168.1.1

5. Which option for the host command will query for the authoritative

name servers for a given domain?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. -t ns

B. -t all

C. -ns

D. -named

6. Which port(s) and protocol(s) should be opened in a firewall in order for

the primary and secondary name servers to communicate for a given

domain?

A. udp/53

B. Both tcp/53 and udp/53

C. tcp/53

D. udp/53 and tcp/503

7. Which option for the ping command enables you to choose the interface

from which the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets will

be generated?

A. -i

B. -I

C. -t

D. -a

8. You need to split a subnet to enable four subnets with up to 30 hosts

each. Which subnet mask, in Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR)

notation, facilitates this scenario?

A. /25

B. /24

C. /32

D. /27

9. Which of the following commands queries for the mail servers for the

domain example.com?

A. dig example.com mx

B. dig example.com

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. host -t smtp example.com

D. dig example.com smtp

10. Which of the following addresses represents the localhost in IPv6?

A. 0:1

B. ::1

C. 127:0:1

D. :127:0:0:1

11. Which option to the traceroute command will use TCP SYN packets for

the path trace?

A. -T

B. -t

C. -s

D. -i

12. Which of the following commands will attempt to bring online all

interfaces marked as auto within the networking configuration?

A. ifconfig -a

B. ifup auto

C. ifup -a

D. ifstat

13. In a scripting scenario, which command will return the domain name

configured for the server?

A. dnsname

B. fqdn

C. hostname

D. hostname -d

14. Which command can be used to listen for netlink messages on a

network?

A. ip monitor

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. netlink -a

C. ip netlink

D. route

15. If the traceroute6 command is not available, which option to the

traceroute command can be used for an IPv6 traceroute?

A. -ipv6

B. -net6

C. -v6

D. -6

16. Which of the following configuration lines in /etc/nsswitch.conf causes

a lookup for group information to first use local files and then use LDAP?

A. group: files ldap

B. lookup: group [local ldap]

C. group: [local ldap]

D. group: localfiles ldap

17. Which of the following dig commands sends the query for example.com

directly to the server at 192.168.2.5 rather than to a locally configured

resolver?

A. dig example.com @192.168.2.5

B. dig -t 192.168.2.5 example.com

C. dig -s 192.168.2.5 example.com

D. dig server=192.168.2.5 example.com

18. Which ports need to be allowed through the firewall for Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP) traffic?

A. Ports 23 and 25

B. Ports 110 and 143

C. Ports 80 and 443

D. Ports 161 and 162

19. Which of the following commands will enumerate the hosts database?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. getent hosts

B. gethosts

C. nslookup

D. host

20. Which of the following netmasks is used for a subnet described with a

/25 in CIDR notation?

A. 255.255.255.0

B. 255.255.0.0

C. 255.255.255.192

D. 255.255.255.128

21. Which of the following configuration lines will set the DNS server to

192.168.1.4 using /etc/resolv.conf?

A. dns 192.168.1.4

B. dns-server 192.168.1.4

C. nameserver 192.168.1.4

D. name-server 192.168.1.4

22. When examining open ports on the server, you see that TCP port 3000 is

listed with no corresponding protocol name, such as SMTP, IMAP over

SSL (IMAPS), and so on. In which file would you find a list of port-to-

protocol translations that could be customized to add this new port?

A. /etc/ports

B. /etc/p2p

C. /etc/ppp

D. /etc/services

23. Which of the following commands adds a route to the server for the

network 192.168.51.0/24 through its gateway of 192.168.51.1?

A. route add -net 192.168.51.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 gw

192.168.51.1

B. route add -net 192.168.51/24 gw 192.168.1.51

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. route -net 192.168.51.0/24 192.168.51.1

D. route add 192.168.51.1 -n 192.168.51.0//255.255.255.0

24. Which of the following netstat options displays the send and receive

queues for each socket?

A. -r

B. -M

C. -a

D. -v

25. Which of the following represents a correct configuration line for

/etc/hosts?

A. 192.168.1.4 cwa.braingia.org cwa

B. cwa.braingia.org cwa 192.168.1.4

C. cwa.braingia.org 192.168.1.8 alias cwa

D. alias cwa.braingia.org cwa 192.168.1.4

26. Which of the following commands configures the eth0 device with an IP

address of 192.168.1.1 in a /24 network?

A. ifconfig eth0 192.168.1.1/24

B. ifconfig eth0 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0

C. ifconfig eth0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0

D. ifconfig 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 eth0

27. Which of the following describes a primary difference between IPv4 and

IPv6?

A. IPv4 is for internal networks only, whereas IPv6 is for public

networks.

B. IPv4 is for public networks, whereas IPv6 is for internal networks.

C. IPv4 uses a 32-bit address, whereas IPv6 uses a 128-bit address.

D. With IPv6, no subnetting is necessary.

28. On which port does ICMP operate?

A. TCP/43

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. UDP/111

C. UDP/69

D. ICMP does not use ports.

29. Which of the following commands will change the default gateway to

192.168.1.1 using eth0?

A. ip route default gw 192.168.1.1

B. ip route change default via 192.168.1.1 dev eth0

C. ip route default gw update 192.168.1.1

D. ip route update default 192.168.1.1 eth0

30. Which of the following ports is used for Secure Shell communication?

A. TCP/23

B. TCP/25

C. TCP/22

D. TCP/2200

31. Which options for netcat will create a server listening on port 8080?

A. netcat -p 8080

B. nc -l -p 8080

C. nc -p 8080

D. nc -s 8080

32. Which of the following commands displays the Start of Authority

information for the domain example.com?

A. dig example.com soa

B. dig example.com authority

C. dig example.com -auth

D. dig -t auth example.com

33. Assume that you want to enable local client services to go to hosts on the

network without needing to fully qualify the name by adding the domain

for either example.com or example.org. Which option in

/etc/resolv.conf will provide this functionality?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. search

B. domain

C. local-domain

D. local-order

34. Which of the following commands sends an IPv6 ping to a unique local

address?

A. ping -6 127.0.0.1

B. ping6 fddi/128

C. ping6 fdd6:551:b09f::

D. ping -6 fdd6:551:b09f::

35. Which of the following commands prevents traffic from reaching the

host 192.168.1.3?

A. route add -host 192.168.1.3 reject

B. route -nullroute 192.168.1.3

C. route add -null 192.168.1.3

D. route add -block 192.168.1.3

36. Which of the following describes a primary difference between

traceroute and tracepath?

A. The traceroute command requires root privileges.

B. The tracepath command provides the MTU for each hop, whereas

traceroute does not.

C. The tracepath command cannot be used for tracing a path on an

external network.

D. The traceroute command is not compatible with IPv6.

37. Which of the following commands will emulate the ping command in

Microsoft Windows, where the ping is sent for four packets and then the

command exits?

A. ping -n 4

B. ping -t 4

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. ping -p 4

D. ping -c 4

38. Which command provides an interface into NetworkManager that works

from a terminal window?

A. nmcli

B. nmui

C. nm

D. nman

39. Which of the following commands configures eth1 with an additional

IPv6 address of fdd6:551:b09e::?

A. ifconfig eth1 inet6 add fdd6:551:b09e::/128

B. ifconfig add fdd6:551:b09e::

C. ifconfig fdd6:551:b09e:: eth1

D. ifconfig eth1 fdd6:551:b09e

40. On which port does LDAP over SSL operate?

A. Port 53

B. Port 389

C. Port 636

D. Port 443

41. You need to prevent local clients from going to a certain host,

www.example.com, and instead redirect them to localhost. Which of the

following is a method to override DNS lookups for the specified host?

A. Add a firewall entry for the IP address of www.example.com to

prevent traffic from passing through it.

B. Delete www.example.com from the route table using the route

command.

C. Add a null route to prevent access to the IP address for

www.example.com.

D. Add an entry for www.example.com in /etc/hosts to point to

127.0.0.1.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

42. Which of the following commands should be executed after running ip

route change?

A. ip route flush cache

B. ip route reload

C. ip route cache reload

D. ip route restart

43. Which option should be used to send a DNS query for a Sender Policy

Framework (SPF) record with dig?

A. -t txt

B. -t spf

C. -t mx

D. -t mailspf

44. Which of the following protocols uses a three-way handshake?

A. ICMP

B. TCP

C. UDP

D. IP

45. How many IP addresses are available in the 172.16.0.0 private range in

IPv4?

A. /32

B. 16,777,216

C. 65,536

D. 1,048,576

46. When troubleshooting a connectivity issue, you have found that you can

reach a server via the web but cannot ping it. Which of the following best

describes a possible cause for this scenario?

A. TCP traffic has been blocked at the firewall.

B. The DNS lookup is failing.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. ICMP traffic has been blocked.

D. There is a reject route in place.

47. When viewing the available routes using the route command, one route

contains UG flags and the others contain U flags. What do the letters UG

signify in the route table?

A. The G signifies that the route is good.

B. The G signifies that the route is unavailable.

C. The G signifies that this is a gateway.

D. The G signifies that the route is an aggregate.

48. Which of the following commands requests a zone transfer of

example.org from the server at 192.168.1.4?

A. dig example.org @192.168.1.4 axfr

B. dig example.org @192.168.1.4

C. dig example.org @192.168.1.4 xfer

D. dig example.org #192.168.1.4 xfer

49. Which of the following commands displays the number of packets

forwarded by the kernel?

A. ls

B. ipstat

C. ifconfig -a

D. netstat -s

50. When using the ip command, which protocol family is used as the

default if not otherwise specified?

A. tcpip

B. ip

C. inet

D. arp

51. Which of the following commands changes the Media Access Control

(MAC) address of eth0?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. ifmac eth0

B. ifconfig eth0 hw ether

C. ifconfig eth0 mac

D. ifconfig eth0 hw mac

52. You are using the route command to view routes. However, name

resolution is taking a long time and causing delay in the response from

the route command. Which option to route can be added to cause it to

not perform name resolution?

A. -d

B. -e

C. -f

D. -n

53. You have replaced a device on the network but used the IP from another

active device. Which command can be run to remove the MAC address

entry from your computer so that it performs the address resolution

again?

A. arp -d

B. netstat -rn

C. hostname

D. dig

54. Which of the following commands displays information such as link

status about the wireless device wlan0?

A. iw dev wlan0 link

B. wlan0 list

C. iw wlan0 -l

D. iw dev link

55. Which command is used for setting parameters such as the essid,

channel, and other related options for a wireless device?

A. ifconfig

B. iwconfig

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. wlancfg

D. iconf

56. Which of the following commands can be used to scan for available

wireless networks?

A. iwlist get

B. iwconfig scan

C. iwlist scan

D. iw-scan

57. You need to offer internally facing NTP services. On which protocol and

port does NTP listen?

A. TCP/20 and TCP/21

B. UDP/123

C. TCP/139

D. UDP/5150

58. You need to set the MTU to a specific value for a network interface.

Which option to ifconfig facilitates this?

A. -mtu

B. mtu

C. metric

D. addrmtu

59. Which option to the arp command creates a new entry for a given IP

address-to-MAC address pair?

A. -s

B. -c

C. -d

D. --add

60. Which of the following commands shows network sockets and their

allocated memory?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. ss -m

B. mpas

C. mem

D. free

61. When troubleshooting a potential hardware problem, you need to

determine which physical interface is being used for a certain address.

One way to accomplish this is with the ping command in order to

monitor the activity lights on the device. Which of the following options

to ping will flood the interface with ECHO_REQUEST packets?

A. -e

B. -a

C. -c

D. -f

62. Which of the following commands can be used to test network

connectivity at the TCP level instead of telnet?

A. netstat

B. nc

C. nettest

D. ping

63. Which option to tcpdump displays a list of available interfaces on which

tcpdump can operate?

A. -a

B. -d

C. -D

D. -i

64. Which command provides a method for sending ICMP requests for IPv6?

A. ping6

B. pingv6

C. tracert

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. 6ping

65. Which of the following commands displays information about addresses,

specifically only IPv6 addresses, currently in use on the computer?

A. ip addr

B. ip -6 addr

C. ip6add

D. ipv6addr

66. Which of the following commands will disable ARP on the interface

eth0?

A. ifconfig eth0 -arp

B. ip eth0 noarp

C. ifconfig eth0 noarp

D. if eth0 disable arp

67. Which option to the route command forces the kernel to use the

specified device for the route rather than attempting to determine the

correct device?

A. inet

B. addr

C. dev

D. device

68. Which option to the ss command shows the process IDs associated with

the socket?

A. -l

B. -a

C. -p

D. -f

69. Which option to traceroute causes the command to use ICMP for

requests?

A. -T

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. -A

C. -I

D. -i

70. Which programmatic function is used by the hostname command

internally?

A. getaddr

B. gethost

C. gethostname

D. getname

71. Which of the following commands will examine the system log for

information regarding DHCP activity?

A. grep -i dhcp /var/log/syslog

B. grep -v dhcp /var/log/syslog

C. grep -vi dhcp /var/log/kern.log

D. dmesg | grep dhcp

72. Which of the following characters are valid for hostnames in /etc/hosts?

A. Alphanumerics, minus, underscore, and dot

B. Alphanumerics, minus, and dot

C. Alphanumerics and dot

D. Alphanumerics

73. Which of the following configuration lines in /etc/resolv.conf enables

debugging?

A. debug

B. options debug

C. option debug

D. enable-debug

74. Which of the following commands views systemd journal entries for the

NetworkManager unit?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. systemd NetworkManager

B. systemd NetworkCtl

C. systemctl NetworkManager

D. journalctl -u NetworkManager

75. Which file is read at boot to set the local computer’s hostname?

A. /etc/hostname

B. /etc/hosts

C. /etc/localhost

D. /etc/networkhost

76. Which traceroute command is used exclusively for IPv6 route traces?

A. trace6

B. traceroute6

C. tracert6

D. 6trace

77. Which type can be used with the dig command to test a zone transfer?

A. xfr

B. transfer

C. zxfr

D. axfr

78. Which option to the host command sets the query type to ANY?

A. -a

B. -b

C. -c

D. -d

79. Within which file can per-user default settings be created for the dig

command?

A. /etc/dig.cfg

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. /etc/dig.conf

C. ~/.digrc

D. ~/.dig.conf

80. Which type of DNS record is used for specifying a POP3 server?

A. POP

B. PO

C. MX

D. There is no specific type for POP3 servers.

81. Which of the following iproute2 commands changes the address of

device eth0 to 192.168.1.1 with netmask 255.255.255.0?

A. ip addr add 192.168.1.1/24 dev eth0

B. ip addr eth0 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0

C. ip addr dev eth0 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0

D. ip addr 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0 eth0

82. Which command is used to show the settings for DNS resolution with

systemd-resolved?

A. systemctl resolvers

B. resolvectl status

C. systemctl --resolvers

D. resolvectl --view-status

83. Which of the following commands enables NetworkManager so that it

can be used to configure Ethernet and Wi-Fi network devices?

A. nmcli networking on

B. netman enable

C. NetworkManager --enable

D. nmti --enable networking

84. You are troubleshooting a DNS problem using the dig command and

receive a status: NXDOMAIN message. Which of the following best

describes what NXDOMAIN means?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. NXDOMAIN means that you have received a nonauthoritative answer

for the query.

B. NXDOMAIN means that the domain or host is not found.

C. NXDOMAIN indicates a successful query.

D. NXDOMAIN signifies a new domain record has been added.

85. Which systemd daemon can be used to manage network interfaces

through systemd?

A. networker

B. networked

C. networkd

D. netwrkd

86. Which command for hostnamectl can be used to set the hostname?

A. set-host

B. set-hostname

C. set-name

D. hostname

87. On which port does IMAP over SSL (IMAPS) listen?

A. 993

B. 995

C. 465

D. 514

88. When you’re looking to parse the output of the ip command, which

option can you set to remove newlines so that the output can be piped to

the grep command?

A. -n

B. -o

C. -l

D. -f

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 10

Topic 110: Security

THE FOLLOWING EXAM OBJECTIVES ARE COVERED IN THIS

CHAPTER:

110.1 Perform security administration tasks.

Key knowledge areas:

Audit a system to find files with suid sgid bit set.

Set or change user passwords and password aging information.

Be able to use nmap and netstat to discover open ports on a

system.

Set up limits on user logins, processes, and memory usage.

Determine which users have logged in to the system or are

currently logged in.

Basic sudo configuration and usage

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

find

passwd

fuser

lsof

nmap

chage

netstat

sudo

/etc/sudoers

usermod

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

ulimit

who, w, last

110.2 Setup host security.

Key knowledge areas:

Awareness of shadow passwords and how they work

Turn off network services not in use.

Understand the role of TCP wrappers.

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

/etc/nologin

/etc/passwd

/etc/shadow

/etc/xinetd.d/

/etc/xinetd.conf

systemd.socket

/etc/inittab

/etc/init.d/

/etc/hosts.allow

/etc/hosts.deny

110.3 Securing data with encryption

Key knowledge areas:

Perform basic OpenSSH 2 client configuration and usage.

Understand the role of OpenSSH 2 server host keys.

Perform basic GnuPG configuration, usage, and revocation.

Use GPG to encrypt, decrypt, sign, and verify files.

Understand SSH port tunnels (including X11 tunnels).

The following is a partial list of the used files, terms, and utilities:

ssh

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

ssh-keygen

ssh-agent

ssh-add

~/.ssh/id_rsa and id_rsa.pub

~/.ssh/id_dsa and id_dsa.pub

~/.ssh/id_ecdsa and id_ecdsa.pub

~/.ssh/id_ed25519 and id_ed25519.pub

/etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key and ssh_host_rsa_key.pub

/etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key and ssh_host_dsa_key.pub

/etc/ssh/ssh_host_ecdsa_key and ssh_host_ecdsa_key.pub

/etc/ssh/ssh_host_ed25519_key and

ssh_host_ed25519_key.pub

~/.ssh/authorized_keys

ssh_known_hosts

gpg

gpg-agent

~/.gnupg/

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. You need to temporarily prevent users from logging in to the system

using ssh or another means. Which of the following describes one

method for accomplishing this task?

A. touch /etc/nologin

B. Disable sshd.

C. Remove /etc/login.

D. Add a shadow file.

2. Which of the following commands searches the entire filesystem for files

with the setuid bit set?

A. find ./ -perm suid

B. find / -perm 4000

C. find / -type suid

D. find / -type f -perm setuid

3. Which of the following commands displays the currently open ports and

the process that is using the port?

A. netstat -a

B. lsof -i

C. ps auwx

D. netlist

4. You are attempting to unmount a filesystem using the umount command.

However, when you do so you receive a message indicating that the

filesystem is in use. Which of the following commands can be used

determine which process is keeping a filesystem open?

A. fuser

B. ls

C. find

D. ps

5. Which of the following commands displays account information such as

expiration date, last password change, and other related details?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. usermod -l

B. userinfo -a

C. chageuser -l

D. chage -l

6. Which of the following commands scans the IP address 192.168.1.154 for

open ports?

A. nmap 192.168.1.154

B. lsof 192.168.1.154

C. netstat 192.168.1.154

D. netmap 192.168.1.154

7. Which command is used to create a public/private key pair for use with

ssh?

A. ssh -k

B. ssh-keygen

C. ssh-genkey

D. ssh -key

8. Which of the following configuration options sets a hard limit of 25

processes for a user called suehring in /etc/security/limits.conf?

A. suehring hard proc 25

B. suehring hard nproc 25

C. suehring proc 25 hard-limit

D. proc 25 suehring hard

9. Within which file should you place public keys for servers from which

you will accept key-based ssh authentication?

A. ~/.ssh/authorized_keys

B. ~/.ssh/keys

C. ~/.ssh/keyauth

D. ~/.sshd/authkeys

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

10. The system on which you are working does not have the lsof command

installed, and you are not allowed to install software without going

through four levels of approval and scheduling the installation weeks in

advance. However, the netstat command is available. Which option to

netstat will show the process ID to which a given network port is

connected?

A. -a

B. -n

C. -p

D. -l

11. You need to look at information on logins beyond that which is captured

by the current log file for the last command. Which option to the last

command can be used to load information from an alternate file?

A. -a

B. -t

C. -e

D. -f

12. You need to examine who is currently logged in to the system. Which of

the following commands will display this information?

A. listuser

B. fuser

C. ls -u

D. w

13. You need to execute a command as a specific user. Which of the

following commands enables this to occur?

A. sudo -u

B. sudo -U

C. sudo -s

D. sudo -H

14. Which option in /etc/sudoers will cause the specified command to not

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

prompt for a password?

A. PASSWORD=NO

B. NOPASSWD

C. NOPASSWORD

D. NOPROMPT

15. Which of the following commands will display the CPU time, memory,

and other limits for the currently logged-in user?

A. reslimit

B. limitres -a

C. ulimit -a

D. proclimit -n

16. Which line in the /etc/hosts.deny file will prevent any host within the

192.168.1.0/24 network from accessing services that operate from xinetd?

A. BLOCK: 192.168.1.0/24

B. REJECT: 192.168.1.0

C. ALL: 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0

D. NONE: 192.168.1/255.255.255.0

17. When expiring a user account with usermod -e, which of the following

represents the correct date format?

A. YYYY-MM-DD

B. MM/DD/YYYY

C. DD/MM/YY

D. MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS

18. Which of the following directives in a configuration file found within

/etc/xinetd.d will prevent the service from starting?

A. enable no

B. start no

C. disable yes

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. boot no

19. You are using an RSA-based key pair for SSH. By default, what is the

name of the private key file in ~/.ssh?

A. id_rsa

B. id_rsa.priv

C. id_rsa.key

D. rsa_key.priv

20. Which option to the su command will execute a single command with a

noninteractive session?

A. -s

B. -u

C. -c

D. -e

21. Which file is used to enable the setting of limits for things like logins,

processes, memory, and the like for users?

A. /etc/security/limits.conf

B. /etc/userlimits.conf

C. /etc/security/userlimits.conf

D. /etc/security/procmem.conf

22. Which of the following best describes the method to use with ssh in

order to execute a single command on a remote server?

A. Use the -e option followed by the command.

B. Send the command after the other options as part of the command

line.

C. Use the --execute option followed by the command.

D. Use the -s option followed by the command.

23. When you’re using ssh-agent, which command and option lists the

currently loaded keys?

A. ssh-agent -l

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. ssh -l

C. ssh-list-keys

D. ssh-add -l

24. Which of the following commands should be used to edit the

/etc/sudoers file?

A. Any text editor such as vi or emacs

B. editsudo

C. visudo

D. visudoers

25. Which of the following commands can be used to stop a given service,

such as httpd.service, from starting on boot with a systemd-based

system?

A. systemctl disable httpdservice

B. systemctl stop httpd.service

C. systemd disable httpd.service

D. systemd enable httpd.service boot=no

26. Which of the following commands will set an account to expire based on

the number of days elapsed since January 1, 1970?

A. passwd -e

B. chage -E

C. usermod -l

D. chguser

27. You need to specify a list of known hosts for SSH for certain hosts within

your organization rather than each user needing to accept those keys

individually. Which option within a server-wide SSH client configuration

file enables this scenario?

A. KnownHosts

B. PerMachineKnownHosts

C. GlobalKnownHostsFile

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. ServerKnownHostsFile

28. Which option within /etc/security/limits.conf is used to control the

number of times that a given account can log in simultaneously?

A. nlogins

B. loginmax

C. maxlogins

D. loginlimit

29. Which file can be used to store a server-wide cache of hosts whose keys

are known for ssh?

A. /etc/sshd_known_hosts

B. /etc/ssh_known_hosts

C. ~/.ssh/known_hosts

D. /root/ssh_known_hosts

30. Within the following entry in /etc/shadow, to what does the number

15853 refer?

mail:*:15853:0:99999:7:::

A. The UID of the mail user

B. The number of files owned by mail

C. The date of the last password change (since 1/1/1970)

D. The number of days until the account expires

31. Which of the following commands sets up a local port-forwarding session

on local port 5150 to remote port 80 of www.example.com?

A. ssh -L 5150:www.example.com:80

B. ssh 5150:www.example.com

C. ssh -p 5150 www.example.com

D. ssh -e 5150 www.example.com:80

32. Which option must be enabled in /etc/sshd_config on the destination

server in order for X11 forwarding to work?

A. XForward yes

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. Xenable yes

C. X11Forwarding yes

D. Xconnection yes

33. Which of the following commands generates a GnuPG key pair?

A. gpg --gen-key

B. gpg --key

C. gpg --send-key

D. gpg --create-key

34. Signatures with gpg can be generated by using which option on the gpg

command line?

A. --sign

B. --signature

C. --si

D. --dsign

35. Which option to ssh is used to set the port for the remote host?

A. -p

B. -P

C. -l

D. @

36. Which option to nmap sets the scan to use TCP SYN packets for finding

open ports?

A. -sS

B. -sT

C. -sY

D. -type SYN

37. Which of the following logs is used by the last command for detailing

recent logins?

A. /var/log/last

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. /var/log/all.log

C. /var/log/wtmp

D. /var/log/logins

38. Which option to ssh enables the use of a key for authentication?

A. -i

B. -k

C. -f

D. --key

39. In a scripting scenario, you need to prevent sudo from prompting for

credentials or for any other reason. Which option to sudo is used to

indicate this?

A. -n

B. --noprompt

C. -i

D. -q

40. Which of the following commands generates an RSA key for use with

ssh?

A. ssh -key rsa

B. ssh --gen-key rsa

C. ssh-keygen -t rsa

D. ssh-keygen rsa

41. You need to disable a service found in /etc/inetd.conf. Which of the

following is used as a comment character in that file?

A. -

B. #

C. /

D. %

42. Which of the following commands can be used to lock an account?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. usermod -L

B. usermod -l

C. passwdlock

D. lockacct

43. Which file is used as the default storage for public keyrings for gpg?

A. publickeys.gpg

B. pubring.gpg

C. public.gpg

D. pubkeys.gpg

44. Which file in ~/.gnupg/, if present, indicates that files have been

migrated to gpg version 2.1 or later?

A. .gpg-v21

B. .gpg-updated

C. .gpg-v21-migrated

D. .gpg-files-v21

45. Which of the following commands searches a server for files with the

setgid bit enabled?

A. find / -perm 4000

B. find ./ -perm setgid

C. grep setgid *

D. find / -perm 2000

46. Which of the following commands creates links within /etc/rc.d/* for

starting and stopping services on a Debian system?

A. createsym

B. startstop-service

C. update-rc.d

D. createconfig

47. Which runlevel is typically used for single-user mode, as indicated in

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

/etc/inittab?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 5

D. 6

48. Which option to the su command is used to obtain the normal login

environment?

A. -u

B. -U

C. -

D. -login

49. Which of the following commands shows network services or sockets

that are currently listening along with sockets that are not listening?

A. netstat -a

B. netlink -a

C. sockets -f

D. opensock -l

50. Which of the following commands lists open files belonging to all

processes except those owned by the user bind?

A. lsof -i

B. lsof -u bind

C. lsof -u ^bind

D. lsof | grep bind

51. Which option to nmap will cause it to always perform name resolution?

A. -n

B. -R

C. -b

D. -a

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

52. Which wildcard can be used in /etc/hosts.allow to specify a match for a

host whose name does not match its IP address?

A. *

B. ALL

C. PARANOID

D. NAMEMATCH

53. Which of the following options within an OpenSSH server configuration

is used to determine whether the root user can log in directly with an

SSH client?

A. PermitRootLogin

B. AllowRoot

C. RootLogin

D. PermitDirectRootLogin

54. Which of the following commands executes a port scan using TCP

connect to the host 192.168.2.3?

A. portscan 192.168.2.3

B. nmap -sT 192.168.2.3

C. maphost 192.168.2.3

D. tcpscan -C 192.168.2.3

55. Which option to the ssh command is used for X11 application

forwarding?

A. -X11

B. -A

C. -X

D. -F

56. Which option to gpg should be used in order to specify the destination for

the encrypted file?

A. --dest

B. --output

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. --destination

D. --out

57. Which command is used to add keys to the SSH agent?

A. ssh-keyadd

B. ssh-add

C. ssh-ed

D. ssh-cat

58. Which option to the passwd command sets the maximum password age

until the password needs to be changed?

A. -a

B. -x

C. -l

D. -r

59. Which option to the ulimit command enables setting of a limit on

memory that can be locked?

A. -l

B. -x

C. -b

D. -t

60. Which of the following commands prints a list of existing users from the

password file?

A. passwd --list

B. cat /etc/passwd | cut -d':' -f1

C. grep "USERS" /etc/passwd

D. lookup --user

61. You are defining a service in /etc/xinetd.conf. Which option is used to

configure the times that access to the service is allowed?

A. time_allowed

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. access_times

C. timed_access

D. access_when

62. What file extension is used for interprocess communication service units

that are controlled by systemd?

A. .socket

B. .ipc

C. .comm

D. .intercom

63. You are generating a host key for the SSH server with ssh-keygen and

want to ensure that the key does not require a password when the SSH

server starts. Which command-line option accomplishes this task?

A. -p

B. -P

C. -N

D. -d

64. When working with the /etc/shadow password file, you see passwords

beginning with $1$. What algorithm does $1$ indicate has been used for

password storage?

A. MD5

B. Blowfish

C. RIN

D. PIK

65. Which option to gpg creates a detached signature?

A. --sig

B. --detach-sig

C. --det-sig

D. --sgn-det

66. Which of the following best describes the role of server host keys for

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

SSH?

A. The server host key is used to connect to remote servers.

B. The server host key is used for encrypting SSL communications.

C. The server host key is used for client connections and provides a

means by which the client can verify that the server has not changed.

D. The server host key provides secure DNS resolution.

67. When using a custom client configuration for SSH, which option

specifies the key that will be used to connect to the host?

A. KeyFile

B. IdentityFile

C. Key

D. HostKey

68. Which of the following commands is used as a daemon process to

manage private keys for GnuPG?

A. gpgpkd

B. gpg_pkd

C. gpg-agent

D. gpg-pkagent

69. You need to enable editing of certain files with root privileges but do not

want to grant sudo access to an editor such as vim due to the possibility

of a shell escaping. Which command can be used in place of vim to

provide privileged editing of files?

A. suvim

B. nano

C. sudon

D. sudoedit

70. Which option to the ssh command enables changing the login name for a

given host?

A. -l

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. -u

C. -a

D. -m

71. Which option to the usermod command changes a username?

A. -l

B. -u

C. -a

D. -m

72. After specifying the key server, which option to gpg is used to specify the

key to send to the key server?

A. key-name

B. keyname

C. send-keys

D. sendkey

73. Which of the following represents a group called admins within

/etc/sudoers?

A. @admins

B. admins

C. -admins

D. %admins

74. Which limits-related option is used to control the maximum file size that

a user can create?

A. filesize

B. maxfile

C. fsmax

D. fsize

75. You are using an SSH server over a poor network connection but would

like to maintain the connection in the event of keepalive messages being

lost. Which client option can be set to set the number of keepalive

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

messages that can be lost before the client will terminate the connection?

A. ServerTerminateCount

B. ServerAliveCountMax

C. ServerKeepAliveCount

D. ServerClientKeepAliveCount

76. If the /etc/nologin file exists and is in use preventing users from logging

in, which file can be used to provide a message to those users who are

refused a login?

A. /etc/login.mesg

B. /etc/login.disabled

C. /etc/nologin

D. /etc/nologin.message

77. Which option to ssh-add specifies the lifetime that a key is held in the

agent?

A. -t

B. -a

C. -l

D. -c

78. Which option for an SSH connection sets up a remote forwarding

scenario?

A. -R

B. -r

C. -e

D. -d

79. Which option to chage sets the number of days that a user will be warned

before they need to change their password?

A. -w

B. -W

C. -t

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. -a

80. Another administrator made a change on the system that resulted in the

/etc/shadow file becoming corrupted. Which of the following can be used

to recover quickly?

A. The /etc/shadow.bak file

B. The /etc/shadow- file

C. The latest backup in /var/backups/

D. Single-user mode

81. When examining the documentation for a service, you notice that it can

use libwrap. What functionality does libwrap enable?

A. Start/stop from remote

B. TCP wrappers

C. DNS resolution

D. Shadow passwords

82. Which option within /etc/sudoers enables the use of an alias for a group

of users?

A. User_Alias

B. User_Group

C. User_List

D. User_Spec

83. You are using nmap to scan a host for open ports. However, the server is

blocking ICMP echo requests. Which option to nmap can you set in order

to continue the scan?

A. -P0

B. -no-ping

C. -s0

D. -ping-0

84. Which option within a server-wide SSH client configuration specifies the

name and location of the known hosts file to use?

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. KnownHosts

B. UserKnownHosts

C. UserKnownHostsFile

D. UserKnownHostsFilePath

85. You need to generate a host key for SSH using ssh-keygen that has been

generated with DSA rather than RSA. Which option and argument to that

option will create a DSA key?

A. -k dsa

B. -a DSA

C. -t dsa

D. -h dsa

86. The total number of users logged in can be found with which argument

to the who command?

A. -t

B. -e

C. -q

D. -l

87. Which option to the passwd command unlocks an account?

A. -t

B. -u

C. -r

D. -l

88. Which option for user limits sets the maximum number of logins that a

user can have on the system?

A. maxsyslogins

B. maxuserlogins

C. maxlogins

D. kennyloggins

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

PART III

Practice Exams

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 11

Practice Exam 1

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. Which filesystem is used to store information about current running

processes?

A. /environment

B. /proc

C. /etc

D. /dev

2. What is the default directory for configuration information related to the

modprobe command?

A. /etc/modprobe.conf

B. /etc/modprobe

C. /etc/modprobe.d

D. /var/modprobe

3. Which of the following wall commands send the message "Please Log

Off" to users in the operator group?

A. wall -g operator "Please Log Off"

B. wall "Please Log Off"

C. wall -operator "Please Log Off"

D. echo "Please Log Off" | group operator

4. Which option to dmesg displays the time in local time?

A. -rel

B. -e

C. -f

D. -t

5. Which process ID is typically associated with the init process?

A. 0

B. 1

C. 5

D. 100

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

6. You have been troubleshooting a system issue that may be related to the

driver in use for a PCI device in the system. Which command and option

will display the PCI devices and the drivers being used for those devices?

A. lsusb -v

B. ls -pci

C. lspci -k

D. showpci

7. Which option to the telinit command will cause the operation to not

send any notice to logged-on users?

A. -q

B. -v

C. --no-wall

D. -l

8. Which file in the sysfs filesystem could you view in order to see the

MAC address of eth0?

A. /sys/class/net/eth0/address

B. /sys/devices/eth0

C. /sysfs/devices/eth0

D. /sys/net/eth0

9. When using systemctl to kill a process, what is the default signal sent to

a process?

A. SIGKILL

B. SIGTERM

C. SIGINT

D. SIGCALL

10. A newly added Serial ATA (SATA) disk is not showing up during the boot

process. Where can you check to begin troubleshooting this issue?

A. Using system logging

B. Using debugfs

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. Within the fdisk utility

D. Within the computer BIOS

11. Which command can be used to monitor communication taking place

with dbus?

A. dbus-mon

B. dbus -m

C. dbus-monitor

D. dbus-debug

12. Within a systemd environment, which service manages udev?

A. systemd-udevd.service

B. systemd-udev.service

C. udevd-service

D. systemd.udevd-service

13. What is the correct syntax to indicate that the system should shut down

at 8 p.m.?

A. shutdown 20:00

B. shutdown 8pm

C. shutdown +20:00

D. halt 20

14. Which option to the systemctl kill command will change the signal

sent to the process to be killed?

A. -k

B. -f

C. -s

D. -d

15. Which systemd command and option is equivalent to the chkconfig --

list command in a SysVinit environment?

A. systemctl list-unit-files

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. systemctl list-service

C. systemctl --list

D. systemctl list-unit-files --type=service

16. Which option to ldconfig is used to change the location of the cache to

be updated?

A. -C

B. -c

C. --f

D. -v

17. Which of the following commands will remove all files for a package in

Debian, including configuration files?

A. apt-get remove

B. apt-cache clean

C. dpkg -P

D. apt-get conf-remove

18. What is the prefix used to denote a Debian source repository in

/etc/apt/sources.list?

A. deb

B. source

C. deb-src

D. debsrc

19. Which options to rpm will upgrade a package while displaying progress

and other additional information about the operation?

A. -Iv

B. -Uvh

C. -U

D. -vh

20. Which option to a yum install command will cause yum to assume yes and

therefore not prompt for verification when performing actions deemed

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

critical?

A. -y

B. -f

C. -p

D. -m

21. When working with a yum-based system, you need to create a

configuration to ensure that certain packages are not upgraded or

installed. Which option can you set in /etc/yum .conf to facilitate this

behavior?

A. exclude

B. noupdate

C. assumeupdate

D. clearupdate

22. You are having difficulty with shared libraries on the system. Which of

the following commands will print the current directories and libraries in

the cache?

A. ldconfig -C

B. ldd -f

C. ldconfig -p

D. ldd -b

23. Which option within a .repo file in /etc/yum.repos.d/ is used to set the

URL for the repository?

A. url

B. repourl

C. httpurl

D. baseurl

24. Which command and option is used to display basic information about

each available package and its dependencies on a Debian system?

A. apt-get list

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. apt-cache dump

C. apt-get list-all

D. apt-cache list

25. When running the lsblk command, there is no separate partition listed

for /boot. From which partition is the system likely booted?

A. There is a /boot directory under the / partition.

B. The /boot partition is hidden.

C. The system has not yet built the /boot partition.

D. The /boot partition does not show up with lsblk.

26. Within which hierarchy is cached data stored for both yum- and apt-style

systems?

A. /etc

B. /var/cache

C. /usr/lib

D. /tmp

27. On a BIOS-based system, within which region of the disk is the boot

loader typically installed?

A. MBR

B. /boot

C. Sector 8192

D. Front

28. Which of the following best describes the contents of the / filesystem

within Linux?

A. The / filesystem is the root filesystem and contains temporary files.

B. The / filesystem is root’s home directory.

C. The / filesystem is used for storage of device and swap information.

D. The / filesystem is the root filesystem and is the logical root of the

hierarchy within Linux.

29. Which of the following commands will send the output of the grub-

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

mkconfig command to the correct location for booting?

A. grub-mkconfig --output=/boot/grub2/grub.cfg

B. grub-mkconfig --file=/boot/grub2.menu

C. grub-mkconfig --file=/boot/grub.lst

D. grub-mkconfig --output=/boot/menu.lst

30. Which of the following commands writes an image called from the

current directory called raspbian.img to the SD card mounted at

/dev/sdc?

A. dd if=raspbian.img of=/dev/sdc bs=1M

B. imgwrite raspbian.img > /dev/sdc

C. imgw raspbian.img | cat /dev/sdc

D. dd raspbian.img > /dev/sdc

31. When troubleshooting a problem, you look through .bash_history to

determine commands that you’ve recently executed. However, the file

does not contain information from your current session. Which

command can you use to view the commands that have been executed

during the current session?

A. cmdhist

B. cmds

C. pwd

D. history

32. Which option should be sent to grub-install if you want to install the

boot images within a directory other than /boot?

A. --boot

B. --image

C. --boot-directory

D. --b

33. Which command should be run in order to make changes take effect for a

GRUB2 configuration change?

A. update-grub

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. grub-update

C. grub-config

D. grub-ins

34. Which of the following commands will set the environment variable

JAVA_PATH equal to /home/user/java2 when using the Bash shell?

A. invoke JAVA_PATH=/home/user/java2

B. export JAVA_PATH=/home/user/java2

C. envvar JAVA_PATH=/home/user/java2

D. echo JAVA_PATH=/home/user/java2

35. Which option in the .bashrc sets the number of commands to keep in

the .bash_history file?

A. HISTLIMIT

B. HISTORYFILE

C. HISTFILESIZE

D. HISTNUM

36. Which of the following commands will cause nl to number all lines,

including blank lines, for a file called code.php?

A. nl code.php

B. nl -a code.php

C. nl -n code.php

D. nl -b a code.php

37. Which command can be used to create an octal representation of a given

plaintext file?

A. oct

B. cat

C. list

D. od

38. Which command and option can be used to format text with pagination

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

in a double-space format, including page numbers?

A. pr -d

B. pag -db

C. cat -pd

D. print -d

39. Of the following options for the tail command, which option outputs the

last lines beginning at the 30th line from the start of the file rather than

the end of the file?

A. -n +30

B. -n 30

C. -30

D. +30

40. Which option to the uniq command causes the matching to be done in a

case-insensitive manner?

A. -c

B. -f

C. -i

D. -n

41. Which of the following commands prints the username and real name of

all users in /etc/passwd in a tab-separated format?

A. cut -d: -f 1,6 /etc/passwd

B. sed 's/://' /etc/passwd

C. awk -F: '{print $1,$5}' OFS="\t" /etc/passwd

D. cat -o "\t" /etc/passwd

42. Which option to cp will preserve symlinks in a recursive copy?

A. -f

B. -d

C. -a

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. -b

43. Which of the following key combinations is a technique for moving to

the 23rd line of a file in Vi?

A. 23G

B. /23

C. i23

D. ZZ

44. Which option to the top command changes the update interval?

A. -d

B. -t

C. -n

D. -f

45. Which of the following commands will display the process ID, the real

user ID, the filesystem access user ID, and command for processes on

the system?

A. listproc -uf

B. ps -eo pid,euser,fuser,comm

C. ps -e pid,user,comm

D. ps -fa

46. Which command can be used to search the contents of all files below

your current location for files that contain the characters DB?

A. grep -r "DB" *

B. grep -ri "DB" *

C. cat * | less

D. cat *.txt | grep DB

47. Which of the following commands will locate all files that begin with the

name DB, starting from the current directory?

A. locate "DB*"

B. find ./ -name "DB*"

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. whereis "DB*"

D. find "DB*"

48. Which of the following files is the location used to gather information

about load average for use in the uptime command?

A. /proc/uptime

B. /proc/loadavg

C. /proc/load

D. /proc/utime

49. When running fsck on an EXT3 filesystem, which option to fsck causes

the operation to prompt when attempting a repair action?

A. -y

B. -f

C. -a

D. No option required

50. Which of the following files is updated dynamically with information

about currently mounted filesystems?

A. /etc/fstab

B. /etc/files

C. /boot/fstab

D. /etc/mtab

51. When running the df command, you need to change the scale so that the

report shows terabytes instead of bytes. Which option will accomplish

this task?

A. -ST

B. -BT

C. -j

D. -T

52. What command can be used to create an image of important metadata

for an ext3 filesystem?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. e2image

B. e3image

C. dumpe2fs

D. dumpe3fs

53. Which option to mke2fs is used to check for bad blocks during filesystem

creation?

A. -a

B. -b

C. -c

D. -d

54. Which of the following commands changes the ownership of the file

called Class.java to the user steve and the group developers?

A. chgrp steve:developers Class.java

B. chown steve.developers Class.java

C. chown developers.steve Class.java

D. chown Class.java steve.developers

55. When bootstrapping a virtual machine, which command can be used to

add the fingerprint of a server to the known_hosts file?

A. ssh-keyscan

B. ssh-keyadd

C. ssh-keylist

D. ssh-getkey

56. Which configuration option can be set within /etc/default/grub to

affect the behavior of the system after a failed boot?

A. GRUB_RECOVER

B. GRUB_NOFAIL

C. GRUB_RECORDFAIL_TIMEOUT

D. GRUB_RECOVER_TIMEOUT

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

57. Which options to du will print a summary of information in a human-

readable format?

A. -sh

B. -h

C. -s

D. -su

58. Which option to the find command causes it to follow symbolic links?

A. -S

B. -H

C. -P

D. -L

59. Which option to the tee command enables appending to the destination

files rather than overwriting?

A. -a

B. -m

C. -g

D. -d

60. When creating a backup for a system, which directory should be included

so that most configuration files will be backed up?

A. /var

B. /opt

C. /etc

D. /bin

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 12

Practice Exam 2

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

1. To which file should you add an entry in order for a host to be blocked

using TCP wrappers?

A. /etc/hosts.deny

B. /etc/tcp.wrappers

C. /etc/wrap.config

D. /etc/tcpwrap.conf

2. Which of the following commands creates an alias for the ps command

such that the options auwx are included when the user types psa?

A. alias "ps auwx" = "psa"

B. alias psa=ps uawx

C. alias psa="ps auwx"

D. psa="ps auwx"

3. Which of the following conditionals in a Bash script will test if the

variable DAY is equal to SUNDAY?

A. if ($DAY == "SUNDAY")

B. if ($DAY -eq "SUNDAY")

C. if [[ $DAY == "SUNDAY" ]]

D. if [ DAY = "SUNDAY" ]

4. Which of the following commands is necessary for making a variable

defined in your current shell available to child processes?

A. export

B. source

C. let

D. def

5. You are watching another administrator perform some work on a server.

As part of that work, the admin uses the following command:

. variables.sh

Which of the following is the equivalent of . variables.sh?

A. let variables.sh

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. set variables.sh

C. source variables.sh

D. var variables.sh

6. Which of the following commands adds ~/code/bin to the path?

A. PATH=~/code/bin:$PATH

B. PATH=/code/bin:$PATH

C. PATH=/home/code/bin:$PATH

D. PATH=PATH:~/code/bin

7. Which of the following shows a valid Bash function called sayHello?

A. function sayHello () { echo "hello"; }

B. function sayHello{}

C. function sayHello() { echo Hello }

D. function sayHello() { echo Hello } ;

8. Which of the following commands sends an email to root with the

subject of Update and the content of the /etc/hostname file?

A. mail root > /etc/hostname

B. mail -s Update root > /etc/hostname

C. mail -s Update root < /etc/hostname

D. mail root -s Update /etc/hostname

9. Files that should be copied to a user’s home directory when their account

is created should be placed in which of the following directories?

A. /etc/usertemplate

B. /etc/template

C. /etc/skel

D. /etc/userskel

10. Which of the following areas within an Ubuntu system contains

information and settings for accessibility?

A. Accessibility

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. Access and Help

C. Universal Use

D. Universal Access

11. Which command can be used to set the delay and repeat rate for a

keyboard?

A. keyboard

B. kbdrate

C. kbd

D. keyrate

12. Which variable is used to indicate the screen on which GUI applications

will be shown?

A. DISPLAY

B. SCREEN

C. LIST

D. XWIN

13. Users can be added or removed for access to the X server. Which

command facilitates this?

A. xauthorization

B. xhost

C. xwin

D. xconnect

14. Which option to useradd sets the number of days between password

expiration and when the account is disabled?

A. -n

B. -f

C. -e

D. -g

15. Which of the following commands displays the current mail aliases

known on the server?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. getent aliases

B. getalias

C. listalias

D. mail aliases

16. Which of the following configuration lines in /etc/hosts.deny creates a

deny-by-default policy where clients will need to be specifically allowed

in /etc/hosts.allow?

A. *.*

B. All: *

C. ALL: ALL

D. LOC: ALL

17. Which of the following describes the result of running the atq command

as root?

A. The current cron and at jobs for root will be listed.

B. The current at jobs for all users will be listed.

C. The current cron and at jobs for all users will be listed.

D. The last 10 entries in the at log will be shown.

18. Which command option can be used to remove all cron jobs for a given

user using the crontab command?

A. -d

B. -e

C. -r

D. -l

19. Which option to the crontab command enables you to work with a

different user’s cron jobs?

A. -u

B. -m

C. -d

D. -e

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

20. When deleting a user from the server, you need to maintain their home

directory rather than deleting it. Which option of the following

commands deletes the user <username> but preserves their home

directory?

A. userdel <username>

B. userdel -r <username>

C. userdel -h <username>

D. userdel -p <username>

21. After deleting a group, you need to search the filesystem for files owned

by the group using its group ID. Which option to the find command will

search using the group ID?

A. -name

B. -group

C. -groupid

D. -gid

22. Which of the following commands changes the group name from admins

to serveradmins?

A. groupmod -g admins serveradmins

B. groupmod -n serveradmins admins

C. groupchg -n serveradmins admins

D. groupchg admins -n serveradmins

23. Which command is used to parse log file entries on a systemd-based

system?

A. logger

B. journalentry

C. jrnctl

D. journalctl

24. Which option to the ntpdate command configures the version to use

such that an older Network Time Protocol (NTP) server could be

queried?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. -o

B. -v

C. -e

D. -r

25. Within which directory are systemd journals stored by default?

A. /var/log/systemd

B. /var/systemd/journal

C. /var/log/journald

D. /var/log/journal

26. Which option to the logrotate command specifies the mailer to use?

A. -o

B. -s

C. -m

D. -v

27. Which option to date changes the output to Coordinated Universal Time

(UTC) regardless of the current time zone?

A. -u

B. -t

C. -s

D. -v

28. Which of the following commands can be used to delete a print job on a

system that uses the lp print system?

A. lpdel

B. rmprint

C. rm -print

D. lprm

29. Which of the following subnet masks represents a /23?

A. 255.255.255.0

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. 255.255.0.0

C. 255.255.255.255

D. 255.255.254.0

30. An entry in /etc/nsswitch.conf indicates hosts: files dns. In which

order will /etc/hosts be queried for a hostname lookup?

A. The /etc/hosts file will be examined first.

B. The /etc/hosts file is not related to hostname lookup.

C. The /etc/hosts file will be queried second.

D. The /etc/hosts file will be queried last.

31. Which port needs to be allowed through the firewall for standard

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) traffic to be received by

the server?

A. TCP port 25

B. TCP port 443

C. TCP port 143

D. TCP port 389

32. Which option to ssh changes the username to use for logging in to the

server?

A. -v

B. -i

C. -l

D. -u

33. Which option to ping disables name resolution?

A. -d

B. -D

C. -f

D. -n

34. Which of the following commands shows various statistics for a network

interface such as packets and bytes received and transmitted along with

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

errors and other such conditions?

A. ifconfig

B. ifstat

C. if -s

D. ifcond

35. When using the host command, which option displays the Start of

Authority (SOA) record from each of the authoritative DNS name servers

for the given domain?

A. -N

B. -n

C. -C

D. -a

36. You need to specify an additional localhost address and hostname for a

server in order to support a specialized network configuration. Which

line in /etc/hosts sets the hostname with a unique IP address in the

correct range for localhost?

A. 127.0.1.1 host.example.com host

B. 192.168.0.1 host.example.com host

C. host.example.com 127.0.0.1

D. host.example.com 172.16.31.32

37. Which of the following options to ifup tells the command to ignore

errors and continue?

A. --continue

B. --C

C. --ignore-errors

D. -h

38. Which option to passwd can be used to unlock an account that was locked

with the passwd command?

A. -S

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B. -l

C. -u

D. -w

39. Which of the following is the correct syntax to connect using ssh to

host.example.com on port 2200?

A. ssh -l 2200 host.example.com

B. ssh host;example.com

C. ssh host.example.com:2200

D. ssh host:2200 -d example.com

40. Which option in /etc/sudoers sets the destination address for

administrative and security emails related to sudo?

A. mail

B. mailto

C. secmail

D. adminmail

41. Which of the following commands displays a listing of who is logged in to

the server along with the date and time that they logged in?

A. whois

B. who

C. loggedin

D. curusers

42. Which port should be allowed through a firewall for NTP

communication?

A. Port 139

B. Port 161

C. Port 123

D. Port 194

43. Which option to nmap causes it to scan using UDP?

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

A. -sT

B. -sS

C. -sP

D. -sU

44. Which of the following options to lsof searches an entire directory tree

for open instances of files or directories?

A. -d

B. +D

C. -f

D. -i

45. Which option to the ip command displays DNS names rather than

merely IP addresses?

A. -n

B. -f

C. -r

D. -a

46. Which of the following commands and options enables you to examine

timing related to listening sockets?

A. ss -o

B. netstat -rn

C. ping -f

D. ls -l

47. Which of the following IP address and subnet mask pairs represents a

private network in a /24 size?

A. 192.168.3.0/255.255.255.128

B. 172.16.19.128/255.255.0.0

C. 192.168.2.0/255.255.255.0

D. 10.168.1.0/0.0.0.255

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

48. When viewing the results of a traceroute, you see !H. To what does !H

refer?

A. Network unreachable

B. Host available

C. Host unreachable

D. High length

49. On which port does the ping command operate for Internet Control

Message Protocol (ICMP) echo requests?

A. 53

B. 1337

C. 33433

D. No port is used for ICMP.

50. When using netstat -a, which file is consulted for the port number to

name translation?

A. /etc/portnum

B. /etc/services

C. /etc/portnames

D. /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ports

51. Which of the following commands launches Orca with speech

capabilities?

A. orca --no-setup --disable main-window

B. orca --screen

C. orca --screen-reader

D. orca --no-setup -s

52. Which of the following locations stores the configuration for LightDM?

A. /etc/lightdm/

B. /etc/lightdm.conf

C. /etc/lightdm-conf

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

D. /etc/lightdm.d

53. Which of the following commands displays statistics and information

about windows in X windows?

A. xinfo

B. xstats

C. xwin

D. xwininfo

54. Which of the following commands can be used to set the time zone on a

Debian system?

A. tzconfig

B. /etc/timeconfig

C. timeconfig

D. timecfg

55. Which of the following commands displays the available character maps?

A. charmap

B. charmap -l

C. locale -m

D. mapinfo

56. Within which directory hierarchy will you find information regarding the

available time zones on the server?

A. /usr/zoneinfo

B. /usr/share/zoneinfo

C. /etc/zoneinfo

D. /etc/tz.conf.d

57. The driftfile, as specified in /etc/ntp.conf on a Red Hat system, is

stored in which location by default?

A. /var/lib/ntp/drift

B. /var/ntp/drift

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C. /usr/share/ntpdrift

D. /usr/share/lib/ntpdrift

58. Which character combination sets the body of the message to STDIN

when using the mail command?

A. <

B. >

C. <<<

D. |

59. Which of the following commands deletes a group from a CentOS Linux

system?

A. groupdm

B. grouprm

C. groupdel

D. delgroup

60. Which of the following syslog facilities captures messages from the lp

printing facility?

A. auth

B. messages

C. lpr

D. root

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Appendix

Answers to Review Questions

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 1: Topic 101: System Architecture

1. D. The udevadm command is used to work with the udev interface of the

kernel, and the monitor subcommand displays kernel uevents and other

udev events in real time.

2. B. Current IRQ assignments are contained in the file /proc/interrupts.

Therefore, viewing the contents of the file with a command such as cat

will work. There is no “view” command, making option A incorrect.

Likewise, there is no /dev/irq file, making options C and D incorrect.

3. D. Configuration files for udev are found in /etc/udev, which makes

option D correct. The other options do not exist.

4. A. The modprobe command loads the module and its dependencies, if

applicable. The lsmod command is used to list currently loaded modules,

making option B incorrect. The insmod command will load a given

module but not its dependencies. Option D, rmmod, is used to remove a

module from memory.

5. B. The lsusb command is used to obtain a basic list of USB devices on a

system. The other commands are not valid. In the case of option D, the ls

command is valid, but there is no --usb option.

6. B. The info command for udevadm enables querying for additional

information about a hotplug device managed with udev.

7. D. The dmesg command displays the contents of the kernel ring buffer.

On many Linux distributions, this log is also saved to /var/log/dmesg.

The other options shown for this question are not valid commands.

8. C. Runlevel 1, sometimes displayed as runlevel s or S, is single-user mode

in which many services are not started. Runlevels 5 and 6 are used for

other purposes, and runlevel SU is not a valid option.

9. D. Scripts are stored in /etc/init.d on a system using SysV init. You

may sometimes find these linked from /etc/rc.d/init.d as well. The

other options are not valid for this question.

10. A. The init command can be used to access different runlevels. Runlevel

6 is used for rebooting the system. Option B will shut down the system

entirely, not reboot it. Option C will place the system into single-user

mode. Option D is not a valid option.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

11. C. The telinit command can be used to refresh the system after changes

have been made to /etc/inittab. Notably, option B will reboot the

system but that was not an option in the question. Options A and D are

not valid commands.

12. D. The runlevel command displays the current runlevel for a system.

Option B is not a valid option to the init command, and adding sudo in

front of the init command makes no difference. Option A is not a valid

command.

13. C. Unit configuration files are stored in /lib/systemd/system. The other

directory options for this question are not relevant or do not exist by

default.

14. B. The systemctl command is used to work with services and targets. The

list-units command is used to list targets. The other commands are not

used for this purpose or do not exist with the required option.

15. C. The -nn option displays both numbers and device names, making

option C correct. The -n option (option B) displays only numbers. The

other two options do not exist.

16. D. The lsmod command is used to list currently loaded kernel modules,

making option D correct for this question. The insmod command (option

A) is used to load modules. Option C is a valid command but not a valid

option for that command, and option B does not exist.

17. C. The --show-depends option shows the modules that depend on the

specified module. The other options do not exist.

18. B. The wall command is used to send a message to all users, thereby

making option B correct. The cat command is used as a means to

concatenate or view files, and tee is used to send output to standard

output and a file. Finally, ssh is the secure shell client command and is

not used for the purpose specified.

19. B. Checking to ensure that the disk is detected in the basic input/output

system (BIOS) is a good first step in troubleshooting. Option A,

unplugging the disk, won’t help it to be detected. Restarting the web

server won’t help detect the disk, and the disk-detect command does not

exist.

20. D. The /sys/bus/usb/devices directory contains information about USB

devices. The other directories are not valid for this purpose.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

21. D. The file /var/log/dmesg will typically contain historical messages from

the current booting of the system. On some distributions of Linux, this

information is also in /var/log/boot.log.

22. C. Out of the options given, the systemctl status command and option

is the most appropriate. The telinit and sysctl commands are not used

for this purpose. Likewise, the --ls option is not valid for systemctl.

23. B. The isolate option is used to move the system into the target

specified, making option B the correct one. The other options do not

exist.

24. A. The initctl reload command causes Upstart to reread its

configuration files.

25. B. The --list option will show all services on a system along with their

status for each runlevel.

26. C. USB devices are generally considered to be hotplug devices. Hotplug

devices describe those devices that can be inserted and removed while

the system is “hot,” or powered on, whereas coldplug devices are those

that must be inserted and removed when the system is powered off.

27. B. The umount command is used to unmount drives within a running

system. The other commands do not exist.

28. D. Of the options presented, running dmesg is a common way to

determine the location to which the kernel has assigned the drive.

Rebooting the system is not a good option, though it would work. There

is no such thing as /var/log/usb.log, and the location of the drive may

change regardless of port, depending on how the drive may be detected in

the system.

29. B. From these options, only B will shut down the system immediately.

Option A will cancel a shutdown.

30. C. The ExecStart option indicates the command to be executed on

startup of a systemd service.

31. D. The systemctl get-default command will show the default target.

The other commands and options are not valid.

32. A. The enable option configures the service to start on boot. The start

option, D, is used to start a service immediately. The other options are

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

not valid for this command.

33. C. The /proc filesystem contains information about currently running

processes and additional information about the kernel and current boot

of the system.

34. C. The -t option to lsusb will print output in a tree-like format so that

you can see which devices are connected to which bus. The other

arguments to lsusb are not valid, and the usblist command is not real.

35. D. If a working device does not appear in lsmod, it typically means that

the kernel has a driver already loaded by virtue of being compiled into

the kernel itself rather than loaded through a module. The use of systemd

(option A) or initramfs (option B) has no effect.

36. C. The -w option causes the module to wait until it’s no longer needed

prior to unloading. The -f option forces immediate removal and should

be used with caution. The other options are not valid for rmmod.

37. B. The tune2fs command can be used for this purpose but should be used

with care because it can result in data corruption.

38. C. Rules related to udev are stored in /etc/udev/rules.d. The /etc/udev

hierarchy contains the udev.conf configuration file along with other

components related to the configuration of udev.

39. B. The -k option shows the kernel driver associated with a given PCI

device and can be helpful when planning a new kernel compile. The -t

option displays information in a tree-like structure, and -n uses numbers

instead of device names. There is no -a option.

40. B. The /etc/modprobe.d directory is used for storing configuration

information related to modules such as that used for blacklisting

purposes but also for other configuration information, such as udev and

module options.

41. B. The dracut command is used to create the initial RAM disk for newer

systems and has replaced the legacy mkinitrd command used for the

same purpose.

42. D. The file /proc/kallsyms provides a way to view the currently loaded

kernel symbols. This can be helpful for resolving module dependencies.

Note that on legacy systems, this file might be called /proc/ksyms.

43. A. The systool utility can be used to show currently loaded options for a

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

given module. The modinfo -r command is not valid, and though modinfo

shows information about a module, it does not include core size and

other settings. The lsmod command cannot be used for this purpose, and

there is no infmod command.

44. B. The /proc/sys/kernel hierarchy contains vital configuration

information about a kernel. These settings can be changed on a running

system.

45. B. The /etc/systemd/system directory is where it is recommended to

store unit files for systemd. The other locations are not valid.

46. C. The systemctl command will be used for this purpose with the

daemon-reload subcommand. The reboot option would work to reload the

systemd configuration but is not correct because it requires the entire

server to reboot, which is not what was asked in this question.

47. B. The /etc/inittab file contains the various runlevels and what to run

at the given runlevel. For example, runlevel 1 is single-user, runlevel 6 is

reboot, and so on. The other files listed do not exist.

48. B. The SYSLINUX boot loader is used for FAT filesystems to create

rescue disks and to assist with installation of Linux in general.

SYSLINUX also describes an overall project containing other specialty

boot loaders. The other options listed for this question are not valid boot

loaders, though.

49. C. initrd is used for an initial root filesystem for early drivers. initrd is

configured to load within the GRUB configuration file for a given

operating system.

50. B. The fsck command is used to diagnose and repair hard drive problems

in Linux. The defrag command is not available in Linux.

51. D. The telinit command can be used for this purpose, and passing 1 as

the argument will switch the system into single-user mode. The other

commands shown are not valid.

52. D. The -n option changes the boot order for the next boot only and boots

from the specified partition. The -b along with -B modifies and then

deletes the option. The -o option sets the boot order. The -c option

creates a boot number.

53. A. ISOLINUX provides a means by which CD-ROMS formatted as ISO

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

9660 can be booted. It’s very common to have live CDs or

rescue/recovery CDs that use ISOLINUX for boot. The other boot loaders

are not valid for this purpose or don’t exist.

54. A. The /usr/lib/systemd hierarchy contains files related to systemd

configuration. The user directory within the hierarchy is used for user

unit files, and the system files are stored in /usr/lib/systemd/system.

55. B. Due to the decidedly insecure decisions made with the design of

Microsoft’s UEFI, a shim is often needed to enable Linux to boot on a

system with UEFI. The shim.efi file can be used as an initial boot loader

for this purpose.

56. D. Scripts for starting and stopping services are located in /etc/init.d on

a SysV init-based system. The other directories listed within this

question are not valid.

57. C. The systemd-delta command is used to determine overridden

configuration files. Of the other commands, diff is valid but not for this

purpose. The systemctl command is also valid, but again, not for the

purpose described.

58. B. The chkconfig --list command displays all services that will be

executed on boot along with the setting for each service for each runlevel.

Of the other commands, the init command is valid but does not have a -

-bootlist option. The other commands are invalid.

59. B. The bcfg command within the UEFI shell is used to configure boot

loaders on a UEFI-based system. The command can accept various

parameters to configure how the boot loader and kernel will load on boot.

Of the other commands shown, grub-install is valid but not within the

UEFI shell.

60. D. The pxelinux.0 file must exist within /tftpboot on the TFTP server in

order for a system to use PXELINUX for booting. The other files are not

valid or necessary for PXELINUX.

61. D. The update-rc.d utility can be used to manage SysV init scripts on

Debian or Ubuntu and other distributions. When using update-rc.d, you

supply the script name and the utility will take care of creating symlinks

to the appropriate runlevels.

62. B. The e key, when pressed at the right time during boot, will send you

into the GRUB shell, where you can change parameters related to boot,

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

such as the kernel options and other related parameters.

63. D. The isolate subcommand followed by the desired target is used to

switch between runlevels with a systemd-based system. The other

subcommands shown are not valid for systemctl.

64. C. The runlevel defined as initdefault is the default runlevel for the

system. The other options shown do not exist.

65. B. The initramfs system is used instead of initrd to create the

filesystem-based loading process for key drivers that are needed for boot.

66. A. The systemctl command will be used for this purpose, and the set-

default subcommand is necessary to affect the desired behavior. The

target file is simply called multi-user.target.

67. C. The shim.efi boot loader loads another boot loader, which is

grubx64.efi by default. The other options are not valid filenames for the

purpose described.

68. D. The /etc/rc.d hierarchy contains symbolic links to files found within

/etc/init.d. These symlinks are then used for executing the scripts at

the appropriate runlevel. For example, on boot the system will execute

the scripts found in the runlevel directory for each runlevel executed at

boot time.

69. A. The default.target is the default target unit that is activated by

systemd on boot. The default target then starts other services based on

the dependencies.

70. B. LUNs that contain the characters fc are found through Fibre Channel.

Therein lies the difference between options B and C, where option C

contains the letters scsi, which would usually represent a local disk. The

other options are not valid.

71. B. NVMe-capable drives are named /dev/nvme*. No special drivers are

needed other than those found in the native kernel on a modern system.

The other options do not exist as paths by default.

72. D. The /proc/mdstat file contains information on RAID arrays, including

RAID personalities found on the system, the devices that comprise the

array, and other pertinent information. The other files shown are not

valid.

73. B. The /sys/class/fc_host directory contains other directories based on

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

the Fibre Channel connections available. Within those host directories

will be found the WWN in a file called port_name. The other directory

hierarchies are not valid.

74. C. The /dev/mapper directory contains information about multipath

devices such as logical volumes. The other directories are not valid.

75. C. The lspci command will be used for this purpose. NVMe devices are

listed with the name nVME or NVMe; therefore, adding -i to grep will

make the search case insensitive. You’d use this in order to ensure that

the devices are detected. The other commands are not valid, with the

exception of the lspci command, but you cannot grep for scsi in this

scenario.

76. D. Tape devices are found within /dev/st*, making st0 the first device.

77. C. The /etc/issue file is used to provide a message to users, such as a

the purpose described.

78. C. The contents of the file motd, an abbreviation for Message of the Day,

are displayed when a user logs in successfully. Among the other options,

the contents of /etc/issue are displayed prior to local login. The other

filenames are not valid for this purpose.

79. B. The /etc/issue.net file is used to provide a message for remote logins

such as telnet. The other files listed are not valid for the purpose

described.

80. D. The poweroff target of systemd, accessed using the systemctl

command, is used for halting the system and then attempting to remove

power on compatible systems. The halt target stops the system but does

not attempt to remove power, whereas reboot simply restarts the system.

There is no stop target.

81. A. The -r option is needed to specify reboot, and the format for counting

time from now is prefaced with a plus sign (+), making option A correct.

Of the other commands, specifying +15 without the -r option simply

shuts down the computer in 15 minutes, and specifying the time as

00:15, as in option D, will shut down the computer at 12:15 a.m.

82. A. The service command is used to work with services, such as starting

and stopping them. On newer systems, the systemctl command has

replaced the service command.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

83. A. The journalctl command with the -b option displays boot messages.

84. A. The -h option halts the system, including shutting down acpid-related

hardware.

85. C. The number 9 corresponds to SIGKILL and can be passed to the kill

command to issue that signal. The number 1 is SIGHUP. Others can be

found within the manual for the kill command.

86. C. The /etc/init.d directory contains the startup and shutdown scripts

for services on a Debian system that is not running systemd.

87. A. Among the options, examining the boot messages would be a first

logical step and would prevent having to reboot the system. Rebooting

may be a next step in order to examine the status of the peripheral within

the BIOS.

88. C. The -n option prevents the banner from displaying when using wall.

The other options shown are not used with the wall command.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 2: Topic 102: Linux Installation and

Package Management

1. C. SATA disks are addressed as /dev/sdX, just like a Small Computer

System Interface (SCSI ) disk. /dev/hdX is a traditional ATA disk. The

other options do not exist.

2. C. The keyword single, given on the Linux kernel command line, will

boot the system into single-user mode. The other options are not valid.

3. A. The Shift key, if pressed when control has first been handed to GRUB,

will cause the GRUB menu to be displayed.

4. B. The root=/dev/sda2 option will cause the given kernel to load

/dev/sda2 for its root partition. The rootpartition option is not valid,

and the format of the root={hd0,3} is not valid in this context.

5. C. You begin an editing session with an e when the boot option is

highlighted. You can then make changes and, when done, press b to boot

the system.

6. D. The root partition is mounted after device initialization. System

services, including multi-user mode, start after the root partition is

mounted. The other two options, A and C, take place prior to the kernel-

initializing device drivers. This process is essentially the same for virtual

machines as it is for physical machines.

7. D. The ESP is typically mounted at /boot/efi.

8. D. The partition containing /var should be the largest for a mail server

because mail spools are stored within this hierarchy. The /etc/ hierarchy

is usually small, as is /usr/bin. The /mail directory does not exist by

default.

9. C. The rootnoverify option is used to specify a non-Linux kernel, one

that GRUB should not attempt to load. The initrd option is used for

specifying the initial RAM disk, making option A incorrect. The

remaining options, B and D, are not valid options for GRUB.

10. A. The update-grub command sends its output to STDOUT. Therefore,

you must redirect using > and send that output to the correct file. The

other options are not valid for this purpose. Options C and D are not valid

commands, and option B contains invalid options as well as an invalid

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

location for the destination file.

11. B. MBR-based disks can be partitioned with up to four primary partitions,

one of which can be further partitioned or extended into logical

partitions.

12. D. The ldconfig command updates the current shared library cache and

list. ldconfig reads /etc/ld.so.conf and incorporates any changes found

within it. The other commands listed as options for this question do not

exist.

13. B. The upgrade option for apt-get will upgrade the system to the latest

version of software for packages already installed. The apt-update

command does not exist, nor does the -U option to dpkg. The apt-cache

command is used to work with the package cache.

14. C. The yum install command will install a given package. The update

option will update a package. The other options listed do not exist.

15. C. Root’s home directory is /root on a Linux system. While the /home

directory does exist, there is no root or su user within that hierarchy by

default. The / directory is the root of the filesystem but not the root’s

home directory.

16. A. rpm2cpio sends its output to STDOUT by default, and therefore that

output needs to be redirected to a file in most cases.

17. B. The /usr hierarchy contains many of the programs that run on a Linux

system. Other notable directories for programs are /bin and /sbin.

18. B. GRUB begins its count at 0 and in this scenario there are two

operating systems. Therefore, because Linux is first in the configuration

file its number would be 0, which is then sent to the default= option.

19. A. The /etc/default/grub file can be used for this purpose. You may also

edit /boot/grub/grub.cfg, but this was not an option given for this

question.

20. B. The deplist option displays the dependencies for the given package.

The list option displays information about a specific package while the

other two options are not valid.

21. A. The -ivh options will install a file using rpm, displaying both verbose

output and hash marks for progress. The other options presented do not

exist or do not accomplish the specified task.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

22. B. The export command is used to set environment variables in BASH.

The other commands are not valid for this purpose.

23. D. The yumdownloader utility will download an RPM package but not

install it. The yumdownloader utility is part of the yum-utils package. The

other options listed for this question do not exist.

24. A. The apt-cache command is used to work with the package cache and

the search option is used to search the cache for the supplied argument,

in this case zsh. The apt-get command is used to work with packages

themselves, and the apt search command does not exist.

25. C. The GRUB_DEFAULT option, when in the /etc/default/grub file, is used

to configure the operating system that will boot by default. The other

options do not exist in this context.

26. A. The ro option, which is the default for GRUB, will initially mount the

root partition as read-only and then remount as read-write.

27. D. Configuration files related to the repositories for yum are located in

/etc/yum.repos.d. Of the other options, /etc/yum.conf is a file and not a

directory, and the other directories do not exist.

28. A. The -V or --verify option will check the files in a given package

against versions (or checksums) in the package database. If no files have

been altered, then no output is produced. Note that output may be

produced for files that are changed during installation or for other

reasons. Note also the use of an uppercase V for this option as opposed to

the lowercase v for verbose.

29. C. The -o option can be used to specify a destination file to which output

will be sent instead of STDOUT. The other options listed in this question

do not exist.

30. A. The menu.lst and grub.conf files are used in GRUB Legacy, that is,

prior to GRUB 2. This therefore makes option B incorrect.

31. D. The ldd command will list the libraries on which the command’s

argument depends.

32. B. Swap space is used when there is insufficient RAM memory on a

system.

33. B. The /etc/lib directory is not typically associated with library files and

does not usually exist on a Linux system unless manually created. The

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

other options either contain system libraries or can be used for that

purpose.

34. C. The apt-get update command will cause the package cache to be

updated by retrieving the latest package list from the package sources.

There is no cache-update or update option to apt-cache. The upgrade

option is used to update the system’s packages and not the cache.

35. C. The sources.list file located in /etc/apt contains the list of

repositories for Debian packages. The other file locations do not exist by

default.

36. A. The /boot partition will typically be much less than 500MB but should

not be undersized. The used space within /boot will increase as more

kernels are added, such as during an upgrade process. Therefore, even

though the recommended size is up to 500MB, experience proves that a

larger partition is helpful, possibly 1GB to 2GB.

37. B. The pvcreate command initializes a physical partition for future use as

a logical volume with LVM.

38. D. The grub-install command is used to install GRUB onto a disk and

the second SATA disk would be /dev/sdb, making option D correct.

39. A. The dpkg-reconfigure program will cause an already installed package

to be reconfigured or changed. The -r option for dpkg removes a package,

making option B incorrect. There is no reconf option for dpkg or

reinstall option for apt-get.

40. C. The lvcreate command is used to create logical volumes with LVM.

The pvcreate command initializes physical volumes prior to creating

logical volumes. The commands in the other two options for this

question do not exist.

41. A. Physical volumes are initialized first, followed by volume group

creation, and then logical volume creation.

42. D. aptitude provides the terminal-based interface rather than the

standard command-line interface of the other tools listed in this

question.

43. D. The search option performs a search of various fields such as the

package name and description.

44. B. The rpm -qa kernel command will show the kernel version. You can

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

also use uname -r for the same purpose.

45. C. The GRUB_DEFAULT option in /etc/default/grub will set the operating

system to boot by default.

46. A. The exclude option can be used to exclude certain packages. The

argument accepts wildcards, and therefore excluding all kernel* updates

will create the desired behavior.

47. B. The grub-mkconfig command should be run after making a change to

the /etc/default/grub file so that a new configuration file can be created

with the changed option(s).

48. B. The -s option to dpkg searches for the given package and provides

information about its current status on the system. The apt-cache

command is not used for this purpose, and the -i option for dpkg installs

a package. The apt-info command does not exist.

49. C. The lvmdiskscan command looks for physical volumes that have been

initialized for use with LVM.

50. B. The --resolve option will download the dependencies of the package

being downloaded. The other options shown within this question are not

valid for the yumdownloader command.

51. A. The -i option to dpkg will install a previously downloaded package.

The other commands don’t exist, and the -U option for dpkg does not

exist.

52. D. GRUB Legacy begins counting at 0 and separates disk letter and

partition with a comma, making 0,0 the first partition on the first disk.

Options A and C are not the first disk on the system, and option B

contains a nonexistent partition.

53. A. ESP uses the legacy FAT filesystem type for its underlying format.

There is a specification for how the ESP partition must be created on top

of the FAT format for boot loaders and kernel images. Note that the

partition is typically FAT32 but can be FAT16 if only Linux systems will

reside on the drive.

54. A. The --install option is used followed by the partition to which

extlinux will be installed for boot.

55. C. The format for the mount command is [partition] [target], making

option C correct. The other options are not valid because the arguments

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

are in the wrong order.

56. B. The master boot record (MBR) is the first sector on a disk and

contains information about the structure of the disk. If the MBR

becomes corrupt, all data on the disk may be lost. The other options

shown for this question are not valid.

57. D. The --boot-directory option enables you to specify an alternative

location for GRUB images rather than the default /boot. The other

options shown for this question are not valid.

58. D. The /etc/mtab file lists the currently mounted filesystems. The

/etc/fstab file lists overall filesystems for the computer but does not

distinguish between mounted or unmounted filesystems. The other

options listed for this question do not exist.

59. B. The swapon command enables swap space, making it available for use

as virtual memory. The mkswap command formats the space. The other

two commands are not valid.

60. C. The pvdisplay command shows information about a given physical

volume. You can use pvdisplay to view the device on which the PV is

built along with the extent size of the PV. The other commands shown

are not valid.

61. B. The lvcreate command is used to create a logical volume from

previously created physical devices and volume groups. Using lvcreate is

the final of three steps in the process for using LVM prior to actually

using the logical volume.

62. A. The vgscan command looks for both physical volumes and volume

groups related to an LVM configuration. The vgscan command is run at

system startup but can also be run manually. The other commands are

not valid.

63. C. The pvscan command displays a list of physical volumes on a given

server. The PVs displayed are those that have been initialized with

pvcreate for use with LVM.

64. A. The -a or --activate option sets whether or not the logical volume

can be used. There is no -b or -c option, and the -d option is used for

debugging.

65. C. The script is using a relative path to look for srv/vhosts rather than

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

/srv/vhosts with an absolute path back to the root directory of the

system.

66. B. Application containers share kernel and other resources with the

underlying OS and use a container daemon to communicate between the

host OS and the application container. Virtual machines have their own

kernel and are self-contained machines running on top of a host OS or

host kernel. Linux containers also provide a containerized virtual

machine–like experience but are distinct from application containers.

67. D. The /etc/ld.so.conf directory is used in addition to /lib and

/usr/lib to configure library locations. The other paths and files shown

do not exist.

68. A. Among these options, compute resources, such as adding more CPUs,

would be the most likely option. Adding RAM might also be warranted,

but that was not one of the available options for this question. There is

no indication in the question that the network is slow, and there is no

indication that adding disk space or block storage (which are essentially

the same thing in this context) will help.

69. A. GRUB 2 uses grub.cfg whereas GRUB uses menu.lst and grub.conf,

making option A the correct choice.

70. B. The MAC address will be unique for each virtual machine deployed

using the image. Guest drivers would usually not be unique to an

individual virtual machine but might be unique on a per-template or per-

image basis. System directories are not unique per virtual machine, and

there is no such thing as pilot homing in this context.

71. B. The cloud-init program is available on Ubuntu and other

distributions and can be used to deploy images to popular cloud

providers.

72. C. The yum package manager configuration file is /etc/yum.conf. The

other files listed do not exist.

73. B. The -L option to dpkg lists the files included with a given package. The

-f option to dpkg shows a field from a package entry, and the other

options do not exist.

74. A. The public key is deployed to the authorized_keys file on each image,

and the private key is used from the host to connect to each virtual

machine. There is no reason to deploy the private key to the virtual

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

machine in order to make a connection to it.

75. A. The /boot/efi partition needs to exist for the EFI partition and is

typically sized 100MB to 250MB, though that size can vary.

76. A. The install option, or simply in, will install a package on a system

that uses zypper for package management. Among the other options

listed, the ref option refreshes the repository. The other options are not

valid with zypper.

77. D. A system running Fedora 22 will use the dnf package manager by

default. The yum package manager is used on CentOS and Red Hat, and

apt and dpkg are used on Debian.

78. A. The repoquery command with the -l option is used for this purpose.

The dpkg -L command is appropriate for this purpose on Debian

systems. The other commands do not exist.

79. C. Home directories for normal users are in /home and the home directory

for root is at /root, making option C correct.

80. A. The /etc/machine-id file contains the unique identifier for a given

machine.

81. A. The -n option tells ldconfig to process only the directories given on

the command line. The -i option ignores the auxiliary cache file. The -v

option is verbose, and -r changes the root directory from which to begin

processing.

82. C. The stats option shows total package names along with other

information about the package cache. The other options are not valid for

use with apt-cache.

83. D. The --efi-directory option is used to specify the location of the EFI

partition, typically /boot/efi.

84. A. The /etc/fstab file contains a list of partitions for the system. The

/etc/mtab file contains currently mounted partitions. The other files do

not exist.

85. B. The options qlp list the files in an rpm package. The other options are

not valid for the purpose described in the question.

86. B. Among the commands and options shown, the info option to yum is

used for this purpose. The dpkg and apt package managers are used on

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Debian systems and thus would not be appropriate for a CentOS system.

87. A. The presence of the string vmx in the flags section indicates that an

Intel processor is capable of virtualization. This extension is called svm on

an AMD architecture.

88. A. The lvm.conf file is a primary configuration file for LVM. Within

lvm.conf, typically found in /etc/ or /etc/lvm/, you can set things like

filters for devices to include or exclude from the vgscan process. The

other files shown are not valid.

89. C. The --show option displays information about the swap spaces on the

computer, including how much swap is currently being used. The -a

option activates all swap spaces. There is no --list option, and -h

displays help.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 3: Topic 103: GNU and UNIX Commands

1. D. The set command can be used for a variety of purposes to change how

the shell environment works. One such option is –C, which prevents

output redirection such as that done with > from overwriting a file if the

file already exists.

2. B. The env command will print the current environment variables from

Bash. The printenv command will perform the same operation. The

other commands listed in this question do not exist.

3. C. The man command displays documentation for the command given as

the argument. The other options listed for this question do not exist.

4. D. The uname command is used to print system information, and the -a

option prints all information available to uname.

5. A. The g option, also known as global or greedy, will apply the matched

operation to the entire line rather than just the first instance of the

match. The other options apply as they would for a Perl-Compatible

Regular Expression. Note also the tr command that provides some of the

same functionality as sed.

6. C. The -l option provides the number of lines given as input. For

example, wc -l /etc/passwd would print the number of lines in the

/etc/passwd file. The other options given in this question are not valid

for the wc command.

7. C. Both head and tail print 10 lines of output by default.

8. B. The -rf options to rm will recursively remove the contents of a

directory, including other directories. The -f option alone will not work

in this case because of the additional directories. The other options given

for rmdir do not exist.

9. D. The -type option causes find to limit its search to directories only,

whereas the -name option limits the names of returned elements. Note

the use of the wildcard due to the phrasing of the question. Also note the

use of ./ to denote beginning the search in the current directory.

10. A. The cat command will display the contents of file /etc/passwd and

then pipe that output to the awk command. The awk command then

parses its input, splitting along the specified separator for /etc/passwd,

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

which is a colon (:). The output is then printed and piped to the sort

command. The sort command in option B will not work because the cut

command requires an argument. Likewise, the echo command in option

C will only echo /etc/passwd to STDOUT.

11. C. The -l option for ls produces long or listed output and -t sorts by

time stamp. The -r option reverses the order, and -a is needed to include

hidden (dot) files, making option C correct.

12. A. The time stamp of the file will change when touch is run on a file that

already exists.

13. D. The -i option will cause both cp and mv to be interactive, that is,

prompt before overwriting. The -f option will force the command to run,

whereas -r is recursive.

14. C. The tee command will send output both to STDOUT and to the

specified file, making option C correct. Option A will redirect output to

the correct file but not to STDOUT simultaneously. The other options

will not work for this question.

15. A. The -p option will cause mkdir to create additional levels of directories

without error. Running mkdir without options will not work in this case.

The -r and -f options to mkdir do not exist.

16. B. The -R option will copy directories recursively. Note that if the -i

option is not enabled, the recursive copy will overwrite files in the

destination. The -v option adds verbosity but does not cause any

recursion, and the -Z option does not exist.

17. C. The file command can be used to determine which type of file is

being used. This can be particularly helpful for files without extensions

where you are unsure if you should view the contents of the file. Option

A, grep, is used to look within files but would not be helpful in this case.

The telnet and export commands are not used for this purpose.

18. C. The dd command is used to create disk images, among other things. In

this case, the input file is /dev/sda1 and the output file is output.img. It’s

also common to add the blocksize option by using the bs argument, such

as bs=1M.

19. B. The cut command uses Tab as its default delimiter. This can be

changed with the -d option.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

20. A. The -z option will unzip the file, -x will extract from the tar archive,

and -f is used to indicate the file on which to perform the

aforementioned operations. It’s typical to add -v for verbose output as

well.

21. D. The fg command will bring a command to the foreground if it has

been backgrounded with either & or with the bg command.

22. B. While the ps auwx command combined with grep will provide

information on the running Apache instances, it will provide much more

information than is required or useful for this problem. The pgrep

command provides only the process IDs and therefore meets the criteria

presented in the question.

23. D. The top command is used to continuously monitor things like CPU

and memory usage, and the -p option monitors a single process. By using

the runquotes with the pidof command, the process ID is provided as

input to the -p option.

24. D. The free command displays overall memory usage for both RAM and

swap and can be used to determine when additional memory might be

needed.

25. A. You need to write the changes to the file; therefore you’ll need :w. The

addition of q will also quit. Note that you could use ZZ to write and quit as

well. The dd command deletes a line, and x deletes a single character.

26. D. The -n option changes the number of lines of output for both head and

tail to the number specified. The other options listed in this question

are not valid for head, and the -f option follows a file with tail as the file

grows.

27. A. The uptime command shows basic information such as that described

along with the number of users logged into the system and the current

time. The bash command is a shell environment, and the ls command

will not display the required information.

28. D. The screen command starts a new terminal that can be disconnected

and reconnected as needed. Processes running from within the screen

session do not know that they are running in a screen session and

therefore meet the criteria needed to satisfy this question. The fg and bg

commands will not meet the criteria, and the kill command will stop a

process.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

29. C. The -9 option invokes SIGKILL, which will force the process to end.

The 15 signal is the default, and the -f and -stop options do not exist.

30. C. Within Bash, the number 1 represents STDOUT and 2 represents

STDERR. Redirecting both means combining them in the manner shown

in option C.

31. B. The nice command, when run without arguments, will output the

priority for the currently logged-in user, which is normally 0. The renice

command can be used to change the priority of running processes. The

other two commands shown as options for this question do not exist.

32. D. Within a regular expression, * represents 0 or more characters. In this

case, it doesn’t matter whether a person is using /bin/bash or

/usr/bin/zsh. Likewise, a . matches a single character, but in the case of

bash and zsh, we need to look at the first and then optionally a second

character. The ? character makes the second . optional. Finally, the $

anchors the pattern at the end of the string and is also the key for this

regular expression.

33. A. The different levels of the manual are accessed by preceding the

argument with the desired level. The other options, such as --list, do

not exist in this context.

34. C. The o command opens a new line below the current cursor location.

The a command begins an insert mode session at the character after the

cursor, not the line. The i command begins an insert mode session at the

current cursor location.

35. A. Sending -HUP as part of the kill command will restart a process. Of the

other options, a -9 will kill the process completely. The other two options

do not exist as valid means to kill a process.

36. B. The history command will display your command history, including

commands from the current session. You can specify how many lines of

history to display, as shown in the answer for this question. Note that

.bash_history will not show the current session’s history.

37. C. The jobs built-in command shows the list of jobs running in the

background. Its output includes a job number and the status of the job.

38. B. The find command, beginning with the path and then the -name

argument, will locate all of the files called .bash_history. The output

from the find command should be piped to xargs, which can then build

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

further commands from standard input. Note that this question and

solution assumes that all users use the Bash shell and are keeping

history.

39. C. The tail command provides the end portion of the file given as an

argument. Adding the -f option will cause the output to update as new

lines are added to the file being tailed.

40. D. The nl command will prepend line numbers onto the file given as its

argument. The output is then sent to STDOUT. Of the other options, wc -

l will print the number of lines in the file but not prepend those numbers

onto each line, as was asked for in this question.

41. A. The xz command can compress and decompress files in a variety of

formats, one of which is lzma.

42. A. The find command will be used for this purpose. Adding -type f will

limit the search to only files and the -mtime option will limit to

modification time in day format.

43. C. The mv command is used to move files, and *.txt will look for all files

with a .txt extension. Note the fully qualified destination with a /

preceding the name tmp.

44. D. The pwd command prints the current working directory. The cd

command changes directory.

45. A. The file needs to first be sorted to group common ZIP codes together.

After that, piping the output to uniq will display the unique ZIP codes,

and the -c option provides a count.

46. A. Preceding the command with a ! will search history and execute the

specified command. For example, !vi will start your last Vi session.

47. C. The killall command is used to terminate processes using their

name.

48. C. The ? key will search backward in a file within Vi. The / is used for

searching forward. The h key moves the cursor to the left one character,

and the x key will delete a character.

49. D. The export command makes an environment variable available to

subsequent child processes. The other commands shown are not valid.

50. B. The echo command sends output and $0 is the parameter that contains

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

the current script name. Of the other options, $PS1 is the shell prompt

and the other two options do not exist by default.

51. B. The gunzip command is typically used for decompressing files with a

.gz extension. The other options are not valid commands.

52. C. The -i option causes rm to use interactive mode, where the command

will prompt for confirmation prior to taking action. See the (1) rm man

page for additional information on the other options.

53. A. The find command can be used for this purpose. When used with the

size option, various size-related options can be used. The option +1G

searches for files greater than or equal to 1GB.

54. B. The -v or verbose option lists files as cpio is working with them. Of

the other options, -s is swap bytes and –l is used to link files. The -k

option is included for compatibility purposes.

55. B. The bzcat command sends output to STDOUT from a bzip2 archive.

56. C. The jobs command is actually a shell built-in command, meaning that

more information is available by using the man page for bash itself. The

other options either are not valid or will not show information about the

jobs command/built-in.

57. B. The nohup command can preface another command when starting so

that the process or command will not accept a SIGHUP.

58. D. The watch command runs a command repeatedly and displays the

output and errors from the command. The pgrep command does not

fulfill the needs of this scenario. The mon and procmon commands are not

real.

59. B. The tmux command creates two (or more) sessions within the same

physical terminal window and thus enables this scenario. The screen

command can be used to create an additional session, but the screen

command does not meet the criteria specified in this scenario, because

the scrollback buffer does not capture enough lines by default. The other

commands shown are not valid.

60. A. The pkill command can be used for the scenario described. The other

options are not valid commands.

61. A. The -f option matches against the full path. The -d option is used to

set the delimiter, the -o option matches the oldest process, and the -i

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

option sets the search to be case insensitive.

62. B. The which command is used to determine the command that will be

run based on the current environment settings such as the path. The find

and ls commands will not work for this purpose.

63. B. The unset shell built-in is used for the purpose described. Both the

reset and clear commands do not accomplish the task described, and

there is no undo command.

64. A. The type shell built-in displays information about a given executable.

For example, the command type alias shows that alias is a shell built-

in as well.

65. C. Double quotes help to ensure that variables are interpolated within a

shell script. Runquotes are not used for this purpose, and the other

options are not valid types of quotes.

66. C. The less pager fits the scenario described. The more pager does not

have as much flexibility as less. The other options shown are not valid.

67. C. The od command converts a file to octal format. The other options

shown all have invalid commands.

68. B. The -b option for sha256sum and sha512sum reads the file in binary

mode as opposed to text mode, which is the default.

69. B. The h, j, k, and l keys enable movement of the cursor in command

mode Vi.

70. C. The decompress and stdout options to xz are functionally equivalent to

the xzcat program. There is also a related program called zcat for

outputting files compressed with gzip to STDOUT.

71. A. The EDITOR environment variable controls the editor that is used.

Typical choices include nano, Emacs, Vi or enhanced Vi, known as Vim.

72. D. The seventh manual section for regex is found by specifying the level

after the command and prior to the manual page to examine.

73. B. The renice command changes the priority of a running process. The

nice command is not capable of altering running processes, and the other

commands shown are not valid.

74. B. The fgrep command is equivalent to running the grep command with

an -F option. The -f option specifies a file, and the -E option utilizes an

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

extended regular expression and is equivalent to the egrep command.

The -a option is important in its own right and causes grep to process a

binary file as if it were a text file.

75. A. All of the options shown use regular expressions. In the correct

answer, the strings Steve and steve will match due to the use of a

character class. Option B would match only Steve but, due to the

quantifier *, would also match strings like Siwejfiwjfheteve. Option C

uses anchoring and thus would only match Steve or steve at the

beginning of a line. Option D also uses an anchor to indicate end of line

and thus does not make sense in this context.

76. C. The top command shows running processes, typically sorted by CPU

usage and updates every few seconds. The ps command shows processes

but does not auto-update. The nice command sets priority, and there is

no procs command.

77. A. Files compressed with the gzip utility can typically be read by other

operating systems, though it may require additional software for certain

operating systems. Compression utilities like bzip2 and xz almost

certainly require additional software. The tar command in option D is

not a compression utility.

78. A. The question mark can be used as a wildcard for such a scenario. An

asterisk would also work for file globbing.

79. B. The split command can break up a file into multiple pieces. The cut

command would split an individual line but does not meet the criteria in

this scenario. There is no dice or rem command.

80. C. The scheduling priority of the process is shown in the PR column. The

process ID is displayed in the PID column. The top command shows CPU

utilization in the %CPU column and does not display information about

the processor cores.

81. A. The d key will be used for this and the number 7 used in order to cut or

remove eight lines. Other keys to work with text for cut, copy, and paste

in Vi include p, y, dd, and yy. The other options shown for this question

are not valid.

82. A. The unxz command decompress a file that has been compressed with

xz.

83. D. The md5sum command creates a 128-bit MD5 message digest. The

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

sha256sum command produces 256-bit values, whereas sha512sum

produces 512-bit values.

84. A. The paste command fits the scenario described and separates the lines

from each file by a tab. The other commands are not valid.

85. A. Using a fully qualified path meets the scenario in the most typical

manner. You could add the command path to the PATH environment

variable, but that is unnecessary given the scenario. Restarting the shell

or computer would not have any effect.

86. B. The SIGTERM signal is used by default by the pkill command. This can

be changed using the --signal option.

87. D. Running jobs are listed with the -r option. The -s option displays only

stopped jobs, whereas -l shows process IDs. There is no -a option to the

jobs built-in command.

88. C. The -c option outputs to STDOUT. See the bzip2(1) man page for

additional details.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 4: Topic 104: Devices, Linux Filesystems,

Filesystem Hierarchy Standard

1. A. The listing shows a symbolic linked file located in the current

directory, linked to .configs/fetchmail/.fetchmailrc. The file is owned

by the root user and root group and was created on July 8, 2014.

2. A. The mount command is used to mount drives in Linux. The source and

destination mount points are expected as arguments. Drive partitions

begin at the number 1, making the first partition number 1.

3. C. The noexec option will prevent programs from being executed that

reside on the partition. The noexec option is used frequently for

mounting the /tmp partition.

4. B. 0x82 is Linux swap, and 0x83 is Linux. NTFS is 0x07, and FAT is 0.0c.

5. B. The partition type 0x83 should be created for a normal Linux partition.

Type 82 is used for swap; 84 is an OS/2 partition. There is no L type.

6. A. The which command returns the full path to the given command and is

useful for determining both whether a given command is available and

the location from which the command will run.

7. A. The chgrp command can be used to change group ownership of a file.

The order is chgrp <groupname> <target>.

8. C. The file is almost certainly a hard link to the original script. Although

ls won’t show this information, the stat command will show that it is a

link and also show the inode to which the file is linked.

9. A. The -i option to df produces information on inodes across all

filesystems. The ls -i option will produce inode listings, but only for the

current directory. The -i option is invalid for du, and dm does not exist as

a command.

10. C. The -y option will attempt to repair automatically, essentially

answering y or yes instead of prompting. Of the other options, only -V is

valid and will produce verbose output.

11. B. The addition of journaling in ext3 increased filesystem reliability and

performance.

12. C. The -S option displays output in a format such as u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

The other options listed do not perform the desired operation.

13. B. The -s option to ln creates a symbolic link, or symlink.

14. C. The whereis command displays pertinent information about the

command given as its argument. For example, entering whereis apache2

on a Debian system will show the binary location, configuration file

location, and other relevant details.

15. A. The PRUNEPATHS option accepts a space-separated list of paths to

remove from the results. The other options listed do not exist.

16. D. The /srv hierarchy is used for data for server programs. The /etc

hierarchy is configuration information; /var is also data files but

variable, such as mail files. The /tmp directory is for temporary files.

17. C. The chmod command is used for this purpose, and the u+s option sets

the sticky bit for the user on the specified target.

18. B. The -a option mounts all filesystems in /etc/fstab that are currently

available. This option is typically used if the mount points are not

mounted at boot time or another mount point is added to the system

after it has been booted.

19. B. The mkswap command formats a swap partition. The fdisk command is

used to create the partition itself but not format it. The other two options

do not exist.

20. A. The tune2fs command displays a lot of information about filesystems,

and when used with the -l option, the output includes the number of

times that the filesystem has been mounted.

21. A. The -g option displays progress of the dump. The other options listed

do not exist.

22. A. The du command will report on disk usage in a recursive manner,

unlike the other commands shown here.

23. C. The /etc/fstab file is used to store information about the filesystems

to mount within the system.

24. D. The /media mount point is used for removable media. See https://wiki

.linuxfoundation.org/lsb/fhs-30 for more information on the FHS.

25. A. The /etc/mtab file contains currently mounted filesystems. Note that

/etc/fstab contains filesystem information but doesn’t report which

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

filesystems are currently mounted.

26. B. The -r option causes umount to attempt to remount in read-only mode.

The -v option is verbose mode, and the -f option forces the operation.

The -o option does not exist.

27. A. The 022 umask will translate into 644 permissions on a new

nonexecutable file.

28. C. The updatedb command will update the database used by the locate

command.

29. A. The type built-in returns the location that the shell will use in order to

run the given command. The find command cannot be used for this

purpose, and the other commands do not exist.

30. B. The -R option will perform the change ownership in a recursive

manner.

31. D. The proper order is the device (UUID or partition) or filesystem to

mount, followed by the mount point or directory to mount that device,

followed by its type and options, and then the dump and pass settings.

32. A. The blkid command will show partition UUIDs. You can also get this

information with the lsblk -no UUID <partition> command. The other

commands shown in this question do not accomplish the required task.

33. A. Priority order for systemd configuration files are those within the

/etc/ hierarchy, followed by files in the /run/ hierarchy, followed by files

in the /lib/ hierarchy.

34. A. The -y option causes fsck to assume yes instead of prompting when

repairing a filesystem. The -v option is verbosity. There is no -m or -x

option for fsck.

35. C. The -t option sets the filesystem type as ext2, ext3, or ext4. The mke2fs

command is typically symlinked from /sbin/mkfs.ext2, /sbin/mkfs.ext3,

and /sbin/mkfs.ext4. The -F option forces mke2fs to create a filesystem,

and the -a and -e options do not exist.

36. B. The file /etc/auto.master contains the configuration for autofs. The

other files listed as options are not valid for this scenario.

37. C. The mkisofs command creates an ISO filesystem, which can then be

written to a CD or DVD. The other commands listed are not valid.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

38. B. The -c option sets the maximum mount count. The -C option sets the

current number of mounts. The -b and -a options do not exist.

39. D. The -f option, also known as fake, is helpful for situations where you

need to debug the mount process or when you need to add an entry to

/etc/mtab for a previously mounted filesystem. The -l option shows

labels, and -v is verbose. There is no -q option.

40. C. The letters ro indicate that the filesystem has been mounted read-

only, meaning that it is not possible to perform a write to the filesystem.

The other possible option is rw, indicating that the filesystem has been

mounted read-write.

41. C. Bad blocks are shown with the -b option. The -f option forces

dumpe2fs to perform the requested operation, and the other command

options do not exist.

42. D. Btrfs is based on the copy-on-write principle and is generally

considered more advanced than ext4 and its predecessors. FAT is a legacy

filesystem primarily used for DOS and its follow-ons like Windows.

43. B. The xfs_info command, which is functionally equivalent to xfs_grow

-n, displays information about an XFS-formatted filesystem.

44. A. The blkid command shows information about partitions including

their type, their UUID, and other basic information. The other commands

shown do not exist.

45. C. The -t option, which can accept a comma-separated list of types,

specifies that only filesystems of the listed type are to be unmounted.

This is useful in conjunction with the -a option, which unmounts all

filesystems except /proc. The -v option is verbose, and -f forces the

operation to continue.

46. D. The sync command writes unwritten data to the disk immediately and

is useful to run just prior to attempting an unmount operation.

47. C. The -f option specifies that xfs_check should check the contents of

the named file for consistency. The -v option sets verbosity, and there is

no -d or -a option.

48. B. The -w option causes debugfs to open the filesystem in read-write

mode. There is also a -c option to open in catastrophic mode for

filesystems with significant damage. The -rw, -r, and -n options are not

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

valid.

49. D. The smartd daemon monitors SMART-compatible disks for notable

events and can be configured to send alerts when events occur. The other

commands listed are not valid for this scenario.

50. A. The -f option forces fsck to run on an otherwise clean filesystem for

ext3 filesystems. This can be helpful for times when you suspect there is

an error on the filesystem and need to verify the integrity of the

filesystem as part of the troubleshooting process. This can also be helpful

to prepare the filesystem for conversion, such as might be the case with a

tool like btrfs-convert.

51. A. The block size for import or restore must match the block size used on

export or dump. Block size is specified with the -b option, making option

A correct. The other options are not valid for xfsrestore.

52. B. A filesystem with the word defaults for its mount options will be

mounted read-write (rw), suid, with the ability to have executables

(exec). The filesystem will be auto-mounted (auto), but users will not be

able to mount it (nouser). Character and block special devices will be

interpreted (dev), and operations on the disk will be performed in an

asynchronous manner (async).

53. B. The btrfs subvolume create command creates a btrfs subvolume. The

other commands are not valid.

54. C. The -z option sets the maximum size for files to be included in the

dump. The -b option sets the block size but is not related to what is being

asked for in this scenario. The –s option sets the path for inclusion in the

dump, and -p sets the interval for progress indicators.

55. C. The -e option sets the behavior, such as continue, remount read-only,

or panic, when an error occurs at the filesystem level. The -f option

forces whatever operation you’re requesting to continue even if there are

errors. The -d and -k options are not valid.

56. D. The -n option causes mount to not write to /etc/mtab and is

particularly useful for the scenario described. The -a option mounts all

filesystems in /etc/fstab. There is no -b or -a option.

57. A. The swapoff command deactivates swap space, thereby making it

unavailable as virtual memory on the system. The other commands

shown as options are not valid.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

58. A. The Where= directive specifies the location for the final mounted

filesystem.

59. A. The mkfs.fat or mkfs.vfat commands are valid for creation of FAT

filesystems. There is no -f option to mkfs, and there is no mkfat

command.

60. D. The tune2fs command is used for working with ext2, ext3, and ext4

filesystems. The -j option adds a journal. The other commands are not

valid.

61. A. The snapshot subcommand of btrfs subvolume creates a snapshot.

The other commands shown are not valid.

62. A. The -L option forces the log to be cleared or zeroed out, which may

cause a loss of data. The -v option sets verbose output; -V prints the

version. The -d option performs a dangerous repair, which can be used

on a read-only filesystem.

63. C. The -o option enables the setting of one or more options for the mount

command, and ro is read-only. Note that the -r option will also mount as

read-only. The other options shown are not valid.

64. B. The -E option signals that an extended option follows, such as

stripe_width. The -f option forces an operation but should not be

necessary for this solution, and the -e option sets the behavior on error.

There is no -extend option.

65. A. The gdisk utility is the equivalent of fdisk for working with GPT

partitions. Later versions of fdisk can also be used to manage GPT

partitions.

66. A. The maximum size for a partition on an MBR disk is 2 terabytes. GPT

has largely replaced MBR on newer Linux systems.

67. C. The -m option with 0 will format the partition with no reserved blocks

for superuser or system use. The -r option sets the filesystem revision.

68. B. The default time for filesystem reorganization is two hours, or 7200

seconds.

69. C. The file permissions are 640, meaning that the group owner can read

the file. Therefore, changing group ownership should have the fewest

side effects. Granting root access is not preferred, especially noting that

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

the problem statement indicated that granting sudo wasn’t preferred.

While using chown on the file to change the owner would also work, it’s

likely to have additional side effects that could prevent the owner of the

file from reading and writing, and there isn’t enough information in the

problem for that. Finally, running chmod 777 is almost never the correct

solution to any problem on Linux.

70. B. The -a option shows all devices, even those that are empty. The -r

option is for raw devices, and the other options do not exist.

71. D. USB devices and others removable media can typically be found within

the /media/ mount point.

72. C. The mkfs-related commands are typically used for formatting

filesystems on Linux. In this case, mkfs.exfat is the correct option for

formatting exFAT filesystems.

73. C. The xfs_db command is used for debugging XFS-formatted

filesystems.

74. C. The -b option is used to specify an alternate superblock and helps in

the scenario described, where the superblock has been damaged. The -B

option specifies the block size. There is no –s or -o option for e2fsck.

75. A. The -h option is the flag for human-readable formatting and shows

numerical output in larger size increments rather than bytes. The other

options are not valid for df.

76. B. The /etc/profile file is one of a few locations in which default

options can be set for users of Bash. The other file locations shown do

not exist.

77. A. A symbolic link will not work. The users would be editing the same file

and, without saving as a different filename, would not be able to keep

their own edits.

78. B. The find command will be used for this purpose, and the -uid option

will need to be used because the user has already been deleted. If the

user had not been deleted, then the -user option would still work.

79. A. The updatedb command is used to update the locate database. The

other commands are not valid.

80. B. The -f option shows the UUIDs of the filesystems mounted on the

system. The -a option shows all devices, the -o option enables

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

specification of output columns, and the -u option does not exist.

81. C. The -c option checks for bad blocks before formatting. The other

options are not valid with mkswap.

82. D. The sticky bit has been set on the file as denoted by an uppercase S.

83. C. Using octal form, 4 is user, 2 is group, and 1 is sticky bit. Therefore,

2755 would have setgid for the file.

84. C. The -name option is used for this purpose, and / indicates the root of

the system. A * wildcard is used to indicate all filenames ending in .sql,

as described in the scenario.

85. B. The UUID=<UUID> syntax is correct for the /etc/fstab file.

86. C. The --inodes option shows inode usage with du. The -h option is

human-readable, and -d sets the maximum depth. There is no -i option

for du.

87. A. The -size option is used with find for this purpose, and the +1G

argument will look for files greater than 1 gigabyte. Note that if the + is

omitted, only files of the exact size are found.

88. B. A symbolic link is the preferred method because it does not require

additional maintenance that a script would or that copying would in

order to keep the libraries current. Moving the libraries may have

unintended consequences if another program is dependent on the

libraries in that location.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 5: Topic 105: Shells and Shell Scripting

1. B. The PS1 variable usually has its default set in /etc/profile and is used

as the shell prompt. Users can customize the prompt to include

hostname, working directory, and other elements.

2. C. The source command is used to execute commands from a file. A

typical use case is to create functions or variables that are then available

for use within the current session. The other commands listed do not

exist.

3. B. While it’s true that every user has a .bash_logout in their home

directory, that file can still be edited by the user. Therefore, to ensure

that the required command is executed at logout, the

/etc/bash.bash_logout file must be used.

4. B. The env -u command will unset an environment variable for the

current session. The unset command can also be used for this purpose.

5. C. The -v option, which is the default, tells unset that the name given is a

shell variable rather than a function. The other options shown do not

exist.

6. A. The alias command is used for this purpose and its format is

name=value, making option A correct. The ln command cannot be used

for this purpose because it will not accept command-line arguments for

the target in such a format, as shown in the options.

7. B. User-based configuration files are located in the order .bash_profile,

.bash_login, and .profile. Only the first file found is executed and the

others are ignored.

8. C. The $1 variable is automatically available within Bash scripts and

represents the first command-line argument. The other variables listed in

this question do not exist by default.

9. D. The fi construct is used to indicate the end of an if conditional within

a Bash script. In many languages, if conditionals are scoped by braces

such as { }, but in shell scripting, fi is used to denote the end of the

condition.

10. B. The seq command is used to print a sequence of numbers in a variety

of formats. The answer for this question provides a starting point (0),

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

and increment (1), and the final number (5), resulting in six numbers

being displayed as output.

11. B. The echo command is used to display its argument, regardless of

whether the command is used inside a shell script or from the command

line itself. The env command is used to display environment variables

and therefore does not meet the need specified in the question. The

var_dump command is used within PHP, and ls is used to display

contents of directories.

12. A. The suid bit enables the program to run as the user who owns the file

regardless of who executes the program. Using SUID is typically not

recommended for security reasons.

13. D. The exec command executes the command given as its argument and

will then exit the shell. The source command does not exit the shell.

14. C. The double-ampersand sequence executes commands only if the

previous command exited cleanly.

15. C. The read command awaits user input and places that input into the

specified variable. The exec command is used to execute commands, and

the other options are not valid for the purpose described.

16. A. Parentheses are used to denote a function, such as myFunction(). The

parentheses are optional but are then followed by curly braces containing

the commands to be executed when the function is called.

17. C. The || sequence indicates an alternate command to run if the initial

preceding command does not exit cleanly. The && sequence executes only

when the preceding command exits cleanly, so it’s just the opposite of

what the question was asking.

18. C. The elif keyword is used to create an alternative execution path

within a shell script. The other constructs, such as else if and elsif, are

used in other languages.

19. C. The unalias command is used to remove a previously defined alias.

The rm command will remove regular files but not aliases. The other

commands do not exist.

20. D. At a minimum, you need to be able to read the file being sourced;

therefore, chmod 400 will correctly set the permissions. Any chmod that

gives additional permissions is not necessary.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

21. C. The for loop construct in this case will require the variable name LIST

to be preceded with a dollar sign ($),making option C correct. The other

options will not work for the purpose described.

22. C. The -lt operator is used to test for “less than” conditions within a

script. The other operators are not valid for use in a shell script.

23. B. The -e test checks to ensure that a file exists and is typically used in

the context of a conditional within a shell script. The other options may

work within shell scripts but are not tests for file existence.

24. C. The /etc/skel directory contains files to be copied to the user’s home

directory. The other directories listed for this question do not exist by

default.

25. C. The --norc option causes bash to execute without reading the

/etc/bash.bashrc file or the local ~/.bashrc file. The other options listed

do not exist as options for bash.

26. A. Array creation in a shell script involves parentheses when used in this

manner. You can also use square brackets to define individual elements,

as in ARRAY[0] = "val1".

27. C. The -p option to declare displays fully qualified shell statements such

that the statements could then be used as input for another command,

either through piping or redirection to a script.

28. A. The .bash_profile file, if it exists in your home directory, will be

executed on login. Note that placing the function in /etc/profile would

technically work but then the function would be available to all users,

which is not what the question asked for.

29. B. The readonly command displays the list of read-only variables that

have been declared in the current session. The other commands listed for

this question do not exist.

30. C. Square brackets are used to denote the beginning and end of the test

portion of a while loop in a shell script. Other languages generally use

parentheses for this purpose.

31. B. The test built-in will return true and can be used to test for the value

existence of a variable not being null. Note that the behavior of the test

built-in differs depending on the number of arguments.

32. C. The HOME environment variable, set automatically to the user’s home

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

directory, is consulted when the command cd ~ is entered. The other

paths beginning with HOME do not exist by default, and the MAILPATH

environment variable shown contains a list of locations where mail is

checked when using the shell interactively.

33. B. The TMOUT variable can be set in a given user’s shell and that user will

be logged out after the value given (in seconds) of inactivity. The other

environment variables listed here do not exist.

34. B. Just as with an if statement where the statement is ended with fi, so

too is a case statement ended with the word case spelled backward. The

curly brace shown as option D is used to close case statements in many

languages, but not for shell scripts.

35. A. The provided answer performs command substitution and places the

value from the resulting command into a variable. Note the use of +%s

formatting on the date, which then formats the output as seconds since

the epoch, as specified in the question. Option C will provide the date

within the DATE variable but will not format it as specified.

36. B. Wrapping a variable in curly braces, such as ${FILEPATH}, will ensure

that the variable is interpolated or expanded correctly even when used in

a place where it might not normally be expanded, such as within a quoted

string.

37. B. In shell scripts, the commands to execute begin at the do keyword and

end at the done keyword. Other languages generally use either curly

braces or tabs.

38. D. The -r test determines whether a given file exists and can be read by

the current user. The -e test only checks to see if the file exists.

39. A. The -r option to declare will create or mark the variable as read-only.

The -p option prints output in a format that can be reused. The -x option

declares the variable for export.

40. D. The *) sequence is used to denote a default set of statements that will

be executed if no other case matches within the set.

41. A. Backquotes can be used for command substitution within a Bash

script. The other options shown are not valid for command substitution.

42. B. The character sequence done denotes the end of a while loop in Bash.

43. B. Greater than or equal to is tested with >=. Of the other operators

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

shown, != tests for inequality.

44. C. The execute bit is not set on the script, resulting in the permission

denied error, making option C correct. The file extension does not matter,

so option A is incorrect. Likewise, option B is not correct because the

script isn’t even executing. Lowercase or uppercase letters do not matter,

making option D incorrect.

45. D. The -f option exports names as functions to child processes. The other

options shown do not exist with the export command.

46. D. The unset command removes a variable from being set. The other

options shown do not exist.

47. A. The /etc/bash.bashrc file is a systemwide configuration file for the

Bash environment. Another systemwide file used for similar purposes is

/etc/profile.

48. D. The +x option enables debugging output and is frequently used when

debugging shell scripts. The -x option is used to disable debugging. The -

d and +d options do not exist.

49. D. The .bashrc file in a given user’s home directory is executed for

interactive logins. The other files shown do not exist.

50. A. The function keyword declares a block of code to be a function in

Bash. It’s worth noting that the function keyword can be omitted in most

cases. The other options are not valid.

51. B. The syntax shown in option B is the correct syntax to add a path to the

current environment. Option A does not include the existing path (and

will, in fact, overwrite the existing path). Option C contains spaces, and

option D uses a semicolon as a delimiter.

52. D. The $0 variable is automatically defined and contains the name of the

script itself. The other options shown do not exist by default.

53. A. The -s argument enables setting of a delimiter. When used, the

numbers will be printed in a sequence rather than one per line. The -m

and -d options do not exist.

54. D. The -O option is used to determine if the user currently running the

test is the owner of the file being tested. The -k option checks to see if

the sticky bit has been set. There is no -m file test.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

55. A. A successful return from a command executed within a Bash script is

0. A 1 or higher typically indicates an error condition. There is no C

condition.

56. A. The file is not copied to directories for existing users, making option A

correct. There is nothing in the question to indicate that the file is too big

or that it already exists. File extensions don’t matter in Linux, so option

D cannot be correct.

57. C. The find command begins the search in the current directory, which is

problematic in a scripted scenario like the one presented. The find

command can find directories, and those directories can begin with a dot

character.

58. B. The -i option ignores the environment. The other options are not valid

for use with env.

59. A. The -x option enables debugging when passed on the interpreter line

of a Bash script. The other options are not valid for this purpose.

60. C. Doing math in Bash requires a special syntax. The bc command can

also be used for such operations and is frequently used for math within

Bash scripts.

61. A. The read command will be used, and option A shows the correct

syntax. Option C is incorrect because it does not prompt the user. There

is no prompt command, making options B and D incorrect.

62. D. The -n option removes a variable from being exported. The other

options do not exist.

63. A. The exit code from the previous command is captured automatically in

the $? variable, thus ruling out any option that did not have this value. A

test for the value is done with -eq in a Bash script, thus making option A

correct.

64. D. The source command is frequently used for the purpose described.

The function command can be used to create functions but would not be

used for the purpose described. The include and require commands are

not valid.

65. B. Adding the execute bit for the user can be done in a non-octal format,

as shown in option B. The only other valid chmod option is 644, which

does not grant execute permission.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

66. B. The problem statement specified files, making option B the best

answer. Option A will also find directories.

67. C. The -f option removes a function. The other options do not exist for

the unset command.

68. A. The env command, when used as #!/usr/bin/env bash, will determine

the location of the Bash interpreter automatically. This makes the

resulting script more portable for systems where Bash may not be located

in /bin/.

69. B. The front slash, or forward slash, is used for division. Of the other

options, an asterisk is used for multiplication and the other options are

not valid.

70. B. The mailx command can be used to send mail from the command line.

The other options shown are not valid commands.

71. D. The -s operator tests if a file is not zero size. The -d operator looks for

directories, whereas -e merely checks if the file exists.

72. A. An alias exists only for the length of the current session, making

option A correct. If the alias or command was invalid, you would have

seen it immediately when you created or used the alias.

73. D. The correct syntax is shown in option D for the scenario described.

74. B. The user is most likely not using Bash but is rather using another shell

like Tcsh. The user could be logging into a different system, but hopefully

by having them log out and log in again that would have been noticed, as

would their manual removal of the environment variables.

75. A. The LOGNAME environment variable contains the currently logged-in

user. The other variables do not exist by default.

76. A. The -h test determines if the file is a symbolic link. The -p option tests

if the file is a pipe, and -S returns true if the file is a socket. The -t test

determines if the file is a terminal.

77. C. The -f option marks a function as read-only. The -p option prints a list

of read-only identifiers. The -a option assumes that the name is an array,

and there is no -r option to the readonly command.

78. B. Option B is the best answer because it will find files where the user

permission includes the execute bit. It’s worth noting that options A and

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

C will find the execute bit but only with the exact permissions specified.

79. A. The /usr/local/bin directory is the location specified for local

binaries according to the FHS. It’s also a typical place for scripts as well.

The /usr/bin and /usr/sbin directories are for system binaries, and

/home/scripts does not exist by default.

80. D. Ctrl+c is used to terminate a script and is usually used for terminating

programs as well.

81. B. The -0 option follows each environment variable with a null byte

rather than a newline. The other options shown are not valid for use with

env.

82. D. In all likelihood, the cp command has been aliased with the -i option.

Running unalias cp will correct the issue. It is possible that the cp

command has been recompiled to always ask for confirmation, but this is

not the most likely cause.

83. C. An exit code of 1 usually means error, but in the case of grep it means

that the search pattern was not found.

84. B. The -d test checks if a file is a directory. The -e option checks for

existence, and the -a option is no longer used. The -w test checks to see if

a file is writable by the current user.

85. B. The command shown prepends /usr/local/bin on to the existing

path. Option A uses $PATH, which is the incorrect identifier for the left

side of the assignment. Option C appends /usr/local/bin rather than

prepends, and option D uses a semicolon as a delimiter.

86. C. The until loop construct will execute at least once before the

condition is evaluated. The while and for loops both evaluate the

condition first. The case statement is not a loop construct.

87. B. The single dot, ., can be used as a means to source environment

variables. The other characters and character sequences do not work for

the purpose described.

88. A. The -p option displays all exported variables. The other options shown

do not exist.

89. D. The word do indicates the beginning of a while loop in a Bash script.

The other options shown are not valid for the purpose described.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 6: Topic 106: User Interfaces and Desktops

1. A. The greeter is configured through /etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf using

the greeter-session option. The other options provided here are not

valid.

2. B. The Screen section of xorg.conf is used to logically bind a given

graphics card and monitor, each of which would be defined in its own

respective section in the configuration file. The other options shown for

this question do not exist.

3. A. Frequency options are Hz, k, kHz, M, or MHz, making uHz an

unavailable option.

4. C. The systemctl set-default command will be used for this purpose,

and the target of multi-user is used to boot to the command line. You

will also need to remove the word splash from /etc/default/grub and

run update-grub as well.

5. A. The DISPLAY variable can be used to remotely send the windows of an

X session to another computer when using protocols like SSH. There is

no XTERMINAL or XDISP environment variable, and XTERM is typically a

terminal window and not an environment variable.

6. D. The Welcome option sets the message to be displayed to users within

the display manager when they log in. For remote users, the

RemoteWelcome message can be used for the same purpose.

7. C. The Shift key can be used to enable and disable sticky keys within

GNOME and other operating systems for accessibility purposes.

8. A. The Disable keyword is used to ensure that a given module is not

loaded. Note that a Load statement for the same module takes precedence

over the Disable statement, but Disable can be used to unload modules

that are loaded by default.

9. A. The Orca project provides assistive screen reading capabilities within

GNOME. Of the other options given, the screen program is valid but is

not used for this purpose.

10. C. The xrandr command can be used to change resolution, and changing

the resolution to something like 800×600 would make icons and other

items appear larger.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

11. D. The allow-guest option changes the behavior of guest login for

LightDM, and disallowing guest login would generally make the

computer somewhat more secure. However, if someone has physical

access to the device, they might be able to get access in other ways.

12. C. The XFree86 -configure command tells the XFree86 server to query

for hardware and create a configuration for the recognized hardware.

Note that you may still need to edit the resulting configuration file

because of unrecognized hardware or to account for specific

configuration items.

13. B. The XkbModel configuration option is used to set the type of keyboard

being used, such as pc105 for a 105-key keyboard. The XkbLayout option

defines the layout of the keyboard such as US for United States–style

keyboards.

14. B. The VertRefresh option is used for this purpose and accepts a range of

values in the manner shown. The other options given for this question

are not valid for the purpose described.

15. D. The file ~/.xsession can be used for commands that run X clients. The

other files are not valid for the purpose described.

16. C. The linear acceleration profile is enabled by setting

AccelerationProfile to 6 within xorg.conf. The 0 setting is known as

classic, whereas -1 provides constant acceleration (no profile) and 7 is

known as limited, which performs the same as linear but with a

maximum amount of speed and acceleration.

17. A. The /usr/share/fonts hierarchy is used for storage of fonts. Another

path that might contain font information is /usr/share/X11/fonts, but

that was not among the choices given for this question.

18. C. Kernel versions beginning with 2.6.26 include native support for

Braille displays in Linux.

19. A. The DontZoom option prevents the specified key combinations from

changing the video mode. Of the other options, the DontZap option

changes the behavior of the Ctrl+Alt+Backspace key combination. The

other options don’t have any effect and are not valid in xorg.conf.

20. C. The xauth program looks for the configuration file in the user’s home

directory in the file .Xauthority. The other files do not exist by default.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

21. C. The Xaccess file is used to control access when using XDMCP. The

other files are not valid for this purpose.

22. D. The kmag program magnifies items on a desktop and is used as an

assistive technology. In general, kmag can be used with other window

managers as well.

23. A. The SIGTERM signal causes the X server to exit cleanly. SIGKILL would

not be a clean exit. The other signals shown as options are not valid

signals.

24. B. The Appearance section of GNOME Control Center is used to set many

aspects of how the desktop appears and behaves, including the choice of

a high-contrast theme.

25. B. Mouse gestures are commonly associated with assistive technologies

and help to facilitate uses of programs by moving the mouse in a certain

way. Mouse gestures could be used for login and to capture screenshots,

but those are not adequately or generally descriptive of their use.

26. D. The Alt+Super+S keyboard shortcut activates the screen reader in

GNOME 3.9 or later. The Super+S shortcut enters Overview, and the

other shortcuts provided do not have a special meaning by default. Note

that the Super key is also called the Windows key or the Command key.

27. D. The startx command kicks off the display manager after login to a

local terminal. The other commands shown do not exist or will not work

for the purpose described.

28. B. The BlankTime option, which is set to 10 minutes by default, causes the

monitor to go blank but not actually go into standby or other power-

saving modes.

29. C. The xwininfo command displays information about a given window

within an X session. The other commands listed for this question are not

valid.

30. A. The Mouse button displays keys to move the mouse. The Compose

button shows a compose keyboard, and the other options are not valid.

31. C. The xhost command is used to control access to the X server. A host is

added with the + sign.

32. B. The ForwardX11 option must be enabled on the client in order for X

connections or windows generated from the X server to be sent over an

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

SSH connection.

33. D. The FontPath directive provides another location in which the server

can find fonts. The other options do not exist within the context of an

xorg.conf configuration file.

34. D. With an on-screen keyboard, users can utilize a pointer such as a

mouse to select keys on the keyboard.

35. C. The XAUTHORITY environment variable can be used to specify the

location of the xauth authority file.

36. B. The Alt+Ctrl+F1 key combination is used to get to a terminal prompt

and is helpful in situations where the X server won’t start properly.

37. B. The autologin-user option is used to define a user who will be

automatically logged in to the system. The other options given in this

question do not exist.

38. C. The AccessX utility is used on legacy or older systems to set many of

the accessibility options. The functionality provided by AccessX can

typically be found in one of the utilities provided by the native X window

manager, dependent on the window manager in use.

39. A. The export shell command sets an environment variable. In this case,

the DISPLAY environment variable needs to be set. The env command

shown will not set the variable.

40. A. The Menus option displays the menu options for a given application so

that those options can be manipulated with the keyboard. The Activate

option helps to work with the desktop and other applications. The other

options shown for this question are not valid.

41. B. The /etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf.d directory contains individual

*.conf configuration files for various settings and is typically parsed

along with the /etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf file.

42. B. The COLUMNS environment variable specifies the width in characters of

a terminal device. The other environment variables are not valid.

43. C. The VideoRam option, which can be expressed in bytes, configures the

amount of RAM available to the video card.

44. B. The Depth option sets the color depth for a given monitor display. A

typical value might be 24 for this option.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

45. B. The Identifier option provides a unique description of each of the

server layouts in an X configuration. The other options shown for this

question do not exist.

46. A. The mkfontscale command will create a fonts.scale file, which

describes the outline fonts on the system and is used for configuration of

fonts that are manually added to the system.

47. A. Display Power Management Signaling (DPMS) enables additional

power-saving modes, such as a full sleep mode, that enable further

energy efficiency for the display.

48. B. The emacspeak program provides another visual assistive technology

as an alternative to Orca. The other technologies listed here are not

related to visualization or assistive technologies.

49. B. Weston is a reference implementation of the Wayland protocol.

50. C. The SuspendTime sets the time, in minutes, for the monitor to go into

standby mode. The other options shown are not valid.

51. C. The files in /etc/X11/xorg.conf.d/ are included when X is starting.

52. B. XDMCP, which is typically disabled by default, uses no compression or

transport security. XDMCP is therefore not usually preferred for remote

access. Of the other options, SSH offers encryption of the session, and

XR and RD are not valid protocols.

53. D. The Xfce desktop environment uses xfwm4 as its window manager.

The other options are not desktop environments.

54. B. The disable-ticketing option turns off simple authentication for

clients with Spice.

55. B. Simon is the speech recognition software that is part of the KDE

project.

56. D. The only valid panel listed in the options for this question is called

Universal Access, making option D correct.

57. A. The setxkbmap command can be used to enable Xkboptions when X is

already running. The other commands shown do not exist.

58. B. The xrdp program is an open source implementation of an RDP server.

The other programs shown are not valid.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

59. A. Changing the VISUAL environment variable to an editor that can run

over an SSH session will fix the issue. In this case, /bin/vim was used.

60. B. The -passwd option is used to set the password on the server for

x11vnc.

61. D. The xauth utility is used for working with the X authority file. The

other options shown are not valid.

62. C. Bounce keys cause the interface to not react when keys are

accidentally pressed in succession or held down.

63. B. The TMPDIR environment variable is used if the normal home directory

location, ~/.xsession-errors, cannot be opened. The other environment

variables are not valid.

64. D. The xdpyinfo command displays various elements about the current

display(s) along with information about X itself.

65. B. The Weston configuration file is called weston.ini and is located in

~/.config. The other files are not valid.

66. A. The x11vnc program, an implementation of VNC, offers built-in

SSL/TLS capabilities. The other programs shown are not valid.

67. B. The brltty program enables a text-mode braille display. The other

programs are not valid.

68. B. The xzoom program is used for screen magnification. The other

programs shown are not valid.

69. D. The GRUB_INIT_TUNE variable can be used within the GRUB

configuration in order to beep when GRUB is ready for input.

70. B. The xhost command will be used for this purpose, and the minus sign

removes a host from being able to connect.

71. B. The Xsession script is executed as the user logging in, making option B

correct. The Xstartup script is executed as root prior to the execution of

Xsession. The other files are not valid as part of the xdm login process.

72. A. The -nolisten tcp option disables listening for TCP connections for

an X server. The other options are not valid.

73. B. SIGHUP is used for the purpose described, typically when a user logs

out. SIGKILL does not restart the server or prepare for a new connection.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

The other signal names given as options are not valid signals.

74. C. The greeter-show-manual-login option, when set to true, will require

the user to enter a username for login rather than select the username

from a list.

75. B. The -n option disables hostname lookups. The other options shown

are not valid.

76. C. In runlevel 3, accessed through the telinit command, the X server is

not typically executed. Runlevel 6 will shut down the system. Runlevel 1

switches to single-user mode, and runlevel 5 is a multi-user mode in

which X is usually running.

77. C. According to the X server documentation at

https://www.x.org/releases/X11R7.7/doc/man/man1/Xserver.1.xhtml,

the default location is within the /usr/lib path, but it’s worth noting that

Linux distributions may change this location to be within the /var/log/

hierarchy.

78. B. The ~/.xinitrc file can be used for per-user initialization. The other

files are not used by default for this purpose.

79. C. The -nolisten local option can be added to prevent the X server from

listening on abstract sockets.

80. D. The -broadcast option for XDMCP enables sending of BroadcastQuery

packets. The other options shown are not valid options with XDMCP.

81. C. The gdmsetup program is used to configure various options for the

users. The other options are not used for this purpose or do not exist.

82. C. Any host within the example.com domain can connect.

83. C. The family inet6 enables the specified host to connect with IPv6. The

other methods shown will not work.

84. B. The ~/.xsession-errors file is the default log file for Xsession and X

clients. The other files are not valid for this purpose.

85. A. The gok command, short for GNOME On-screen Keyboard, is the

program to start the on-screen keyboard. The Caribou program will be

the successor to GOK.

86. B. The -f option enables file specification for the X authority file. The -v

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

option enables verbose output. The other options are not valid.

87. B. Slow keys is the name used to describe this assistive technology.

88. C. RDP listens on port 3389 by default. Port 389 is LDAP, and 3306 is

usually MySQL.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 7: Topic 107: Administrative Tasks

1. A. The best option among these choices is to change the group to www-

data and change the permissions such that the group can write into the

directory. Option B should never be used because it enables world-

writing to the directory. The other options will not allow the web server

group to write into the directory.

2. B. The format for cron is [minute hour day-of-month month-of-year day-

of-week], thereby making option B the correct option for this question.

3. C. The /etc/localtime file, which can be an actual file or a symbolic link,

is used to indicate the local time zone. The other files listed as options do

not exist.

4. D. The LDAP Data Interchange Format (LDIF) is an open format, defined

in Request for Comments (RFC) 2849, that enables import and export of

LDAP entries. The file formats TXT and CSV are valid but not for the

purpose described; there is no specific file format known as LDAP.

5. B. The chage command will be used for this purpose, specifically with the

-E option. When provided with a date, chage will expire the account on

that date. When provided with -1, the expiration will be removed.

6. D. Within the /usr/share/zoneinfo hierarchy, you will find information

on the various regions and time zones available. The files within this

hierarchy can be symlinked to /etc/localtime. The file /etc/timezone is

also sometimes used by Linux systems and, notably, by Java in certain

situations.

7. B. The at command is used to run a series of commands that you enter.

Unlike with cron, you can schedule commands from the command line to

be executed in the same order entered rather than having to create a

specific script for the commands. The syntax shown in option B sets the

time to be one hour from now.

8. B. The userdel command is used for this purpose, and the -r option

(lowercase) deletes both the home directory and mail spool files. The -R

(uppercase) option tells the userdel command to use a chroot directory.

9. B. The /etc/shadow file contains usernames, UIDs, and encrypted

passwords and is not readable by any non-root user on the system due to

the sensitive nature of the encrypted passwords. The /etc/passwd file

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

contains usernames and UIDs but not encrypted passwords. The other

two files listed for this question do not exist.

10. C. Use anacron when you need to schedule a job on a computer that

might be off when the job is scheduled. anacron will take care of running

the job at its next available time.

11. B. The +%s option will format the date as seconds since January 1, 1970.

This option is used frequently in scripting and elsewhere for obtaining a

unique time stamp that can be parsed easily as an integer. The other

options will not work.

12. C. The --list option shows the available character sets on the system.

The other options given for this question do not exist.

13. C. The LC_TIME environment variable is used to control the display and

behavior of the date and time and can be changed to a different locale in

order to achieve the desired display and behavior of date and time

formatting. The other options shown for this question do not exist.

14. D. Beginning with OpenLDAP version 2.3, slapd-config is used for

configuration of OpenLDAP, as documented at

http://www.openldap.org/doc/admin24/slapdconf2 .html. The other

commands are not valid.

15. A. The @daily shortcut schedules a job to run at midnight every day. The

other options shown do not exist.

16. B. UTF-8 provides multibyte character encoding and is generally accepted

as the standard for encoding moving forward. ISO-8859 is single byte

encoded. The other options are not valid.

17. A. The groupmod command will be used for this purpose, and the -n

option is used to change the group name. The other commands listed do

not exist.

18. D. The /etc/group file contains information on groups on a Linux

system. The other files are not valid for the purpose described.

19. C. The slapcat command dumps the slapd database in LDIF format to

STDOUT. The output can then be redirected into a file. The other

commands are not valid.

20. C. The /etc/cron.d/ directory can contain scripts that have scheduling

information within them along with jobs to run. The other locations

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

given as options are not valid.

21. B. The getent command is used to display entries based on the

/etc/nsswitch.conf file. One use case for getent is when integrating

with Microsoft Active Directory or another LDAP service to check if the

connection can be made to the LDAP server. The usermod command is

valid but is not used for this purpose, and the other commands shown for

this question are not valid.

22. B. The /etc/login.defs file contains various configuration items such as

the minimum and maximum user and group IDs to be used on the

system.

23. C. The LC_MEASUREMENT environment variable is used to indicate the

measurement units that should be used.

24. D. The TZ environment variable is used for this purpose and the general

format is as shown, making option D the correct answer.

25. A. The /etc/cron.daily directory contains files such as scripts that are

executed daily. There are corresponding cron.hourly, cron.weekly, and

cron.monthly directories that run on their respective schedules, as

indicated by the name of the directory.

26. C. Setting LANG=C is an alias for Portable Operating System Interface

(POSIX) compatibility and will cause programs to bypass locale

translations. The other options shown for LANG are not valid.

27. B. The -m option causes the user’s home directory to be created. By

default, if this option isn’t specified and CREATE_HOME has not been set,

the home directory won’t be created. The –h option displays help text,

and the other options shown are not valid.

28. A. The usermod -L command locks an account by placing a ! in the

encrypted password. If the user has another means to log in, such as with

an SSH key, using usermod -L will not prevent their login.

29. C. The LC_ALL variable can be used to set environment variables to the

current locale and will override others. This can be used when there is a

need for a temporary change. The other variables listed here are not used

for this purpose and are not created by default.

30. A. The format when adding a username places the username between the

schedule and the command to run, making option A correct. The other

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

options shown for this question are invalid. In the case of option B, there

is no schedule. In the case of options C and D, the schedule is incorrectly

formatted.

31. C. The passwd command will be used for this purpose. The -a option

displays all users but requires the use of -S to indicate status. The -S

option alone will not produce a report for all users, and the --all option

is an alias for -a.

32. D. The chage command is used for this purpose. The -d option sets the

days since the last password change and is measured in days since

January 1, 1970. The -W option is the days of warning for changing a

password, and the -l option displays a list of the various settings related

to the account.

33. B. The /etc/anacrontab file contains information about the jobs such as

the job name and delay, among other information. The other files listed

do not contain anacron-related information about jobs.

34. D. The ldapadd command is used to add entries to the OpenLDAP

database.

35. B. The /etc/cron.deny file contains a list of users who cannot create cron

scheduled tasks. The other files do not exist by default.

36. B. The system uses shadow passwords if an asterisk shows up in the

password field of the /etc/passwd entries. There is no indication that the

system has been compromised, making option C incorrect, and there is

no password scheme called “forward password aging,” making option A

incorrect as well.

37. D. There is no direct relationship between the UIDs and GIDs on a

system. UIDs represent users, whereas GIDs represent group IDs. On

some systems, the UID and GID number will match for regular users, but

this is not a requirement and is more of a coincidence.

38. C. The slapindex command generates indexes based on slapd databases.

The other commands are not valid.

39. A. The usermod command is used for this purpose. The -d option changes

the home directory, whereas -m moves the contents. The other

commands shown for this question are not valid.

40. D. The -G option is a list of supplemental groups to which the user will be

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

added. A lowercase -g option provides the primary GID. The -l option

causes the user to not be added to the lastlog and faillog databases.

There is no -x option.

41. A. The crontab command can be used for this purpose, and the -l option

is used to list the crontab entries. The -u option is needed to specify a

user other than the current user.

42. A. The -r option creates a system user that will typically entail no

expiration, no home directory, and a UID below 1000. The -s option

defines the shell and is not typically used for this purpose. The -a and -S

options do not exist.

43. B. The /etc/gshadow file contains secure information such as an

encrypted password for groups, where applicable. The /etc/group file

contains general information on groups. The other two files listed as

options do not exist.

44. D. The slapd_db_recover command can be used to help recover an

OpenLDAP database that has become corrupted or otherwise invalid. The

remaining options for this question are not valid commands.

45. B. The groupdel command cannot delete groups unless there are no users

who have the given group as their primary GID. There is no -f or -r

option.

46. A. The id command shows the username, UID, primary group, and GID,

along with supplemental groups. The passwd and chage commands are

not used for this purpose. There is no getid command.

47. D. The -c option changes the comment field in /etc/passwd. The

comment field is typically associated with the real name of the account.

The -R option indicates a chroot directory, whereas -d indicates a change

of home directory. There is no -n option.

48. D. The find command will be used for this purpose. The correct syntax is

shown in option D. The group command will merely look in the specified

files for the number 1501, and the -u option to grep includes byte offsets,

which is not applicable for this question.

49. A. The standard port for unencrypted LDAP is 389, and that is the port on

which slapd listens for connections. Port 3389 is RDP, whereas 3306 is

MySQL. Finally, 110 is POP3.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

50. A. The ln command is used for this purpose, and the -s option creates a

symbolic link, and -f forces or overwrites the destination. The other

options or order of commands are not valid.

51. C. The LC_MONETARY variable is used by certain programs to determine the

localization for currency.

52. C. The --on-calendar option adds a timed event with systemd-run. The

other options shown are not valid for use with systemd-run.

53. B. The /etc/cron.allow file is a list of users who have permission to

create and remove their own cron jobs. The /etc/crontab file is used to

store cron jobs, and the other files do not exist.

54. B. Debug level 64 provides configuration processing debug information.

Debug level 1 traces function calls, whereas level 8 shows connection

management. Debug level 0 is no debug.

55. C. The atrm command removes jobs given their IDs. The ID can be

obtained with the atq command. The at -l command shown will list jobs

but not delete them. The rmat command is not valid.

56. B. The dpkg-reconfigure command is used to cause the configuration

questions to be asked again. The tzdata package is the name of the

package on Debian-based systems. The two apt- commands shown are

not valid.

57. D. There are multiple ways to specify loglevels and debugging for slapd,

including by keyword, by integer, or as shown in the question, by hex. All

of the values shown are valid for loglevel. No debugging is 0, trace is 1,

stats logging is 256 or 512 depending on type, and packets sent and

received is integer 16, or hex 0x10.

58. A. The /etc/skel directory contains files that are automatically copied to

a user’s home directory when that user is created. The other directories

listed for this question do not exist by default.

59. B. The atq command shows a list of jobs that have been scheduled with

the at command. The other commands don’t exist with the exception of

option D, which shows the at command but with an invalid option, --

jobs.

60. C. The port for LDAPS or LDAP over SSL is 636. Port 389 is standard,

non-SSL, LDAP. Port 443 is used for HTTPS, and 3128 is used for Squid

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

proxies.

61. A. The at command runs a command at a specified time. While cron can

be used to run a command, it will run the command repeatedly according

to the schedule set for the command. The other commands are not valid.

62. D. The /etc/at.allow file is used to specify users who can create at jobs.

The other files are not valid.

63. B. Systemd timer files have the extension .timer and are used for

scheduling service unit files or events. The other file extensions are not

used for systemd timer units.

64. A. The /var/spool/cron/crontabs directory contains a file for each user

who currently has one or more cron jobs or entries. Note that the other

files listed here are not valid for this purpose.

65. D. The -j option enables specification of a line from which the import

will be started. It is useful in the scenario described where the import

needs to be restarted due to error. The -f option specifies an alternate

location for the slapd configuration file. The -q option is quick mode,

with less checking, and -l specifies the input file.

66. B. The -a option shows all locales currently available on a system. The

other options do not produce the output specified in this scenario.

67. A. The --adjust-system-clock option sets the system clock when used

with set-local-rtc. The other options are not valid.

68. A. The -i option displays information that can help determine the

character set such as ISO-8859, ASCII, or Unicode for the given file. The

-m option specifies a list of magic files, -l shows a list of patterns, and -a

is not a valid option with the file command.

69. B. The LC_PAPER variable is used to set the paper size for printing. The

other variables are not available by default.

70. C. The /etc/crontab file is a plain-text file that is treated as a systemwide

cron file. As such, the file is generally not associated with any single user

and it’s not necessary to run a special command after editing this file.

71. D. The tzselect command will, by default, display a step-by-step menu

to select a time zone. The eventual output will include a region/time zone

line, such as America/Chicago, as output.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

72. A. The OnBootSec option is used for this scenario and option A has the

correct syntax. The other options shown do not exist.

73. B. GECOS is the legacy name for information stored in /etc/passwd such as

full name and other contact information.

74. A. The -g option sets the group ID for the newly created group. The -h

option is help, and neither -k nor -a exists as an option for groupadd.

75. C. The list-timers option shows the currently active timers with

systemd. The other options are not valid.

76. B. The weekly shortcut means that systemd will execute the event once a

week. The other shortcuts given as options are not valid.

77. A. The -r option removes the current crontab. The -i option can be

added so that the user is prompted prior to removal.

78. B. The SKEL variable controls the location of the skeleton home directory,

which is normally /etc/skel/ by default. The other options shown are

not used for the purpose described.

79. C. The passwd option is used to list the password database on a system.

The other options do not exist.

80. A. The directory /var/spool/cron/atjobs contains the jobs. The other

directories shown do not exist.

81. C. The GID_MIN variable contains the minimum GID to use on the system.

The other variables are not used for the purpose described.

82. D. The MAIL_DIR variable contains the directory where a user’s mail spool

is located. The other options shown are not valid variables for this

purpose.

83. C. The /etc/passwd file contains various information about users on a

system such as username and real name, along with user ID (UID) and

84. C. The @reboot shortcut indicates that the cron job will be executed when

the system starts up.

85. A. The -r option specifies that the group being added will be a system

group.

86. A. The directory /var/lib/ldap stores database files related to the

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

OpenLDAP deployment on a given server. The other directories shown

are not valid for this purpose.

87. A. Only active units are shown by default, so the --all option displays all

units.

88. B. The /etc/at.deny file contains a list of users who cannot create at

jobs.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 8: Topic 108: Essential System Services

1. C. The journalctl command is used to work with the systemd journal.

On systemd-based systems, journalctl is a central command for

debugging and troubleshooting.

2. C. The kern facility receives messages from the kernel for logging

purposes. Of the other options, syslog is used for logging messages about

syslog itself. The other two options shown are not valid syslog facilities.

3. D. ntp.org provides a free service for time synchronization. When you

use pool.ntp.org as the target, you will typically receive an NTP server

that is geographically close to your location, or at least as close as

possible. Setting your address to 127.0.0.1 or 192.168.1.100 will use a local

server but only if that server has an NTP service.

4. A. The service used for logging on a computer managed by systemd is

called systemd-journald. You use the journalctl command to view

logged entries rather than the standard Linux toolset.

5. B. The create option is used for this purpose and accepts arguments such

as those shown to set the permissions and ownership. The other options

shown are not valid within a logrotate configuration.

6. D. Configuration files for CUPS are found in /etc/cups. However, it is

also common to manage CUPS through its web interface. The other

directories listed are not valid.

7. A. The Allow directive is used for this purpose and the addresses

192.168.1.1 through .127 signify a /25 in Classless Inter-Domain Routing

(CIDR) notation, making option A correct. Note that option B, with a /24

netmask, would allow the addresses too but would also allow

192.168.1.128 through .255, which is larger than should be allowed.

8. B. The ntpdate command provides a command-line interface that

immediately changes or sets the time according to the NTP server given

as its argument. The ntpd option provided in option A will run the NTP

daemon and would not be appropriate for a script. The other two

commands are not valid. It is worth noting that ntpdate has been

deprecated in favor of ntpd, but you will likely find ntpdate available on

many systems.

9. B. Typically, the Connection refused message from an NTP-related

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

command means that the daemon is not running. There is no indication

that the ntpq command is querying a different server; therefore, whether

the network is up or down is irrelevant. The permission-based options

are not valid based on the error message indicated.

10. D. The hwclock command is used to both query and set the hardware

clock, such as the one maintained by the system firmware or basic

input/output system (BIOS). The ntpdate command is used to set the

local system time but is not related to the hardware clock. The other

commands are not valid.

11. C. The /usr/share/zoneinfo directory and its child directories contain

information on time zones on a Linux system. The other files and

directories do not exist by default.

12. D. The info severity level provides information messages for a given

facility. Of the options given, emerg is used for emergency messages and

not normally used by applications, whereas debug is the highest or most

verbose level of logging available through syslog.

13. B. The driftfile configuration option sets the location of the driftfile

for ntpd. The drift file helps to maintain time accuracy. The location

shown is the default for Red Hat Enterprise Linux.

14. A. The mail option is used to send the log to the specified email address

on completion of the logrotate process. The others shown do not exist as

options in /etc/logrotate .conf.

15. C. The journalctl command is used for this purpose, and the --disk-

usage option displays the disk space used by journal log files, which are

typically stored in /var/log/journal.

16. D. The mailq command is used on Postfix servers in order to view a

summary of the current mail queue. Details of the queue include the ID

of the mail being sent along with one or more of the email addresses

involved in the transaction. The mailq command may also work with

newer versions of sendmail.

17. C. The ntpq command provides an interactive, menu-like interface into

the NTP server. You can use ntpq to check statistics on peers, for

example. The ntpdate command shown as option B is used as a

command-line means to set the time. The ntpd command shown as

option A would execute the NTP daemon itself.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

18. D. The format is user: destination for the aliases file, making

option D correct. The other options are not valid syntax for the aliases

file.

19. B. The -f option indicates the file to which messages will be logged. The -

d option is used for debugging, whereas -v prints the version of klogd.

There is no -l option for klogd.

20. A. The chrony package is used for the scenario described and helps with

systems that are frequently offline or disconnected from the network.

The other packages listed as options are not valid for the purpose

described.

21. A. The lpr command places a file (or standard input) into the print queue

for lpd to work with. The lpq command prints the current queue. There

is no lpx command.

22. C. The -bp option to the sendmail command prints information about the

current queue. There is no -queue or -f option that is relevant for this

question. The -bi option is used to work with the aliases database.

23. A. The -w option sets the hardware clock to the current system time. The

-s option does the opposite, setting the system time to the hardware

clock. There is no -a or -m function for hwclock.

24. D. TCP port 631 is used as the administrative interface into CUPS.

Visiting an active CUPS server on that port will show the administration

website for working with print queues and other configuration items

related to CUPS.

25. A. The -q option causes sendmail to attempt to deliver messages from the

queue. Add the -v option to display verbose output.

26. B. The requirements of multiple email addresses prevent the use of

.forward; therefore, it will need to be accomplished in /etc/aliases. The

format for multiple email addresses is to separate them with a comma,

making option B correct.

27. A. The --systohc command will set the hardware clock according to the

current system time. The use of --utc is required in order to ensure that

the time is set to UTC. If --utc is omitted, the time will default to

whatever was used last time the command was run, which could be UTC

but might also be localtime instead. Therefore, the best option is A.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

28. D. The postsuper -d command deletes messages from the queue. The

ALL keyword causes all messages to be deleted from the queue. Care

should be taken when performing this action because it is irreversible.

There is no -remove option to postqueue, and the -f option for Postfix is

not relevant. The rm -rf command shown is not specific enough, and it is

generally not recommended to manually remove files from a mail queue.

29. A. The URL shown will display the jobs area of the local CUPS server

with a query string name of which_jobs and a value of completed. The

other URLs shown are not valid.

30. C. Just as the tail -f command will continuously update the display as

new content is added, so too does the -f option display new entries for

journalctl. The -t option shows messages for the given syslog identifier.

There is no -tail or -l option.

31. B. The $UDPServerRun option is used for the purpose described. The port

on which the server should listen is then provided as the value for this

option. The other options shown are not valid configuration items for

rsyslogd.

32. A. The postqueue -f command is used to flush the queue. The command

will process all of the emails that are awaiting delivery. The other

commands are not valid for this purpose.

33. C. The -g option specifies the maximum offset or skew that can be

adjusted for when synchronizing time. When set to 0, there is no offset

check.

34. A. The SystemMaxFileSize option controls the size of the journal log file

to ensure that a log does not cause problems related to disk usage. The

SystemMaxUse option controls overall size of journal files, and the default

for SystemMaxFileSize is one-eighth of the SystemMaxUse setting to allow

for rotation of files.

35. C. The lpstat command is used for this purpose. The lpstat command

displays information about printers, print jobs, and related information.

The -W option specifies which jobs to display, complete, or not complete.

The lpq command shown as an option is used to view the queue, and the

other options are not valid.

36. D. The postrotate option within a configuration for log rotation can be

used for this purpose. After postrotate, a line typically follows with the

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

script or commands to execute. The other options shown for this

question are not valid.

37. B. SMTP operates on TCP port 25, and if other servers are contacting

your SMTP server, then you’ll need to listen on this port and allow traffic

to it as well. Port 23 is used for telnet, port 110 is POP3, and port 143 is

Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP), none of which are necessary

for SMTP traffic.

38. A. The makemap command is used to create the hashed database in the

correct format for sendmail to use. The other commands are not valid for

sendmail.

39. A. The configuration file for syslog-ng is stored in /etc/syslog-ng and is

named syslog-ng.conf. There is not typically an /etc/syslog directory,

even on systems without syslog-ng.

40. C. The application could theoretically use any of the logging facilities,

depending on the type of application being developed. However, the

requirement to log to a custom log file means that the logs will have a

different name and possibly location than the standard logs. Therefore,

logging to any of the standard or system-level facilities is not appropriate

for this scenario, making one of the local (local0 through local7) facilities

appropriate.

41. B. The usermod command with the -aG option is used to append a group

onto the user’s list of groups. In this case, the user needs to be a member

of the lpadmin group.

42. D. The nocompress option is used to prevent the log file from being

compressed or zipped as part of the rotation process. This might be

needed on systems where compression negatively affects performance or

where additional processing is necessary.

43. C. The cupsctl command should be used with the --share-printers

option to enable printing for remote clients within the same subnet. You

would then also flag each printer for sharing with the lpadmin command,

setting the printer-is-shared option to true.

44. B. The mailstats command is used for the purpose described. Of the

other options, the mailq command will display the current mail queue

but not statistics on mail that has been processed. The other two options

are not valid commands.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

45. B. The --disk-usage option shows the amount of space consumed by

active and archived journals. The other options shown are not valid.

46. A. The systemctl command is used for controlling services. In this case,

restart should be sent to the CUPS service as denoted by the name

cups.service.

47. D. The -p option is used to filter based on priority and the loglevel given

in the scenario is debug, making option D correct. The other options are

not valid for the purpose described.

48. A. The Port configuration option is used for this purpose and is used as

an alternative to the Listen directive. With the Listen directive, you will

specify address:port. However, option C, while valid syntactically, will

listen only on the localhost IP of 127.0.0.1 and not all interfaces.

49. A. The postsuper command is used for management of various items

with Postfix, including deletion of individual messages from the mail

queue. The other commands will not work for the purpose described.

50. B. The --vacuum-time option will be used for this scenario. Time can be

specified in seconds, minutes, hours, days, months, weeks, and years.

51. B. The file .procmailrc, found in a user’s home directory, is used by

Procmail for processing messages on a per-user basis. The other files are

not used by Procmail in a default configuration.

52. D. The format is local-address: destination-address. Each destination

address is separated by a comma. The difference between options C and

D is that the question specifically asked for addresses @example.com and

since the question didn’t specify whether this server was the server for

@example.com, the destination addresses needed to be fully qualified.

53. D. The postcat command shows the contents of a message from the

Postfix queue. The other commands shown are not valid.

54. C. The /var/log/mail.err file contains errors related to mail delivery.

However, on some systems, mail-related errors may go to a different log,

such as /var/log/mail.log or /var/log/mail.info or similar.

55. D. The EHLO command indicates Extended Hello syntax and is followed by

the host from which communication has been initiated. Of the other

options, the HELO option is valid but is not the Extended Hello syntax

specified in the question.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

56. A. The list-timezones option to timedatectl shows the names of time

zones and is useful for obtaining the correct time zone name. The other

options are not valid with timedatectl.

57. A. The /etc/localtime file is a symlink to

/usr/share/zoneinfo/America/Chicago, making option A correct. Some

systems also link /etc/timezone for the same purpose.

58. A. The date command shows the current time zone. The other options

shown will not work.

59. C. The /etc/chrony.conf file is the configuration file used by the Chrony

package. The other files do not exist by default.

60. C. The -k option shows kernel messages only when used with

journalctl. The other options shown do not query the journal.

61. B. The newaliases command re-creates the aliases database on servers

running Postfix, sendmail, and qmail. There is no need to restart the mail

server after running newaliases. The alias command shown in option C

will create an alias for the command shell but is not related to Postfix.

62. D. The systemd-cat command logs to the systemd journal. When given a

parameter such as a command, both STDOUT and STDERR are logged. The

other commands shown as options are not valid.

63. A. The lprm command is used to help manage printer queues by

removing jobs. The other commands shown are not valid.

64. D. The logger command is used to send messages to syslog and can be

executed in a shell script context in order to take advantage of the

robustness of syslog without having to write separate log management

into the script.

65. C. The mailq_path parameter contains the path to the mail queue for

Postfix. You can use this to diagnose problems with the queue

directories. The other parameters shown are not valid in Postfix.

66. D. The _SYSTEMD_UNIT filter can be used to show messages related to a

single service. Multiple _SYSTEMD_UNIT arguments can be given to show

messages for multiple services. The other options shown for this

question are not valid.

67. C. The lp command, usually used with the -d option to specify the queue

name, is used to add a job to the specified print queue. The other

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

commands shown as options are not valid.

68. B. When the .forward file is found within a user’s home directory,

forwarding of email will typically occur when mail is destined for that

user.

69. B. The -s option sets the subject for the email to be sent. The -E option

informs mail to not send messages that have an empty body. The -c

option enables setting of carbon-copy (CC) addresses. The -f option

specifies an alternate mailbox and would not be used for this scenario.

70. D. The -s option sets the date and time as specified within the command.

If there is another means to automatically set the date, it may override

the change. For example, if ntpd is running, that process may alter the

date even after it has been set with date -s.

71. B. The --vacuum-size option to journalctl will trim the journal data files

so that they consume the specified size. It is worth noting that the size

may not be exactly that specified because journalctl deletes only

archived files.

72. A. The --since option filters journal messages based on the time elapsed

since that specified. There is also a corresponding --until option that

enables further time filtering.

73. C. The use of - indicates that syslog does not need to sync to disk for

every log entry. This can greatly improve performance for busy systems

but may cause log entries to be lost if the sync process has not been run

prior to a system crash or other issue.

74. A. The -P option sends a print job to the specified destination. Of the

other options shown, -h disables banner printing, and the remaining

options do not exist for lpr.

75. C. The qshape command displays information regarding the number and

age of the messages in the Postfix incoming and active queues. Other

queues can also be viewed using the command as well. The other

commands shown as options for this question are not valid.

76. D. The SystemMaxUse configuration option configures how much space

journal files can take on the system. The other options shown are not

valid, but it is worth noting that there are several options for controlling

journal sizes and these options should be examined as part of

preparation.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

77. C. The /var/spool/postfix directory contains directories and files related

to the mail queue for Postfix. The other directories listed are not valid for

this scenario.

78. D. The --directory or -D option can be used to specify an alternate

location for the journal data and would support the scenario described.

The other options are not valid with journalctl for the scenario

described.

79. C. The /var/log/ directory is the normal location for system logs, and

daemons will typically use this hierarchy for logs as well. For example,

some Linux distributions use /var/log/journal/ for systemd journals.

The other directories shown as options do not exist by default.

80. C. The :blackhole: option can be used as a destination to prevent Exim

from delivering the mail for that particular user or email account. The

other options shown for this question are not valid.

81. C. The <DefaultPrinter printerName> stanza, where printerName is the

name of the printer, configures a printer for CUPS.

82. C. The lprm command can be used for this purpose and, when given a

single dash, will delete all jobs from the queue if run as root. The other

options given for lprm are not valid.

83. B. The -r option enables setting the From header of the email to be sent

rather than the currently logged-in user. The -f option specifies a

different mailbox and is not useful for this scenario. The -o and -m

options do not exist.

84. B. The @@ symbol specifies that TCP should be used rather than the

default @ that normally precedes a host using UDP for remote logging.

85. C. The Storage=Persistent key/value pair within the [Journal] stanza of

the configuration file enables persistent storage for the journal. The

other key/value pairs are not valid.

86. A. The chronyc command can be used for monitoring the status of time

updates. The other options shown are not valid commands.

87. C. Individual configuration files for various log file rotation policies are

found in /etc/logrotate.d. This directory is included in the primary

configuration file /etc/logrotate.conf.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

88. A. The postqueue -p command and option view the pending queue. The

postqueue -f command causes the queue to be flushed. The other

commands shown are valid, but their options are not.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 9: Topic 109: Persistent Network

Configuration

1. A. The netstat command can be used for this purpose, and the -r option

displays the current routes. The addition of -n prevents DNS lookups,

which can help with performance.

2. A. The ifconfig command will be used for this purpose and requires the

addition of the -a option because the adapter is currently down. The ifup

command can be used to bring up an interface but does not display

information by default. The netstat command displays information

about the network but not with the -n option.

3. D. Private IP addresses are found within the 10.0.0.0/8, 172.16.0.0/12,

and 192.168.0.0/16 ranges, making an address in the 143 range a public

IP.

4. C. The route command is used for this purpose, and adding a route is

done with the add option. The default gateway is added using the default

gw keywords followed by the IP of the gateway and the adapter.

5. A. The host command enables changing of the query type with the -t

option. Using ns as the type will query for the name servers for a given

domain. There is no all type, and the other options are also invalid.

6. B. Traditionally, udp/53 is used for DNS queries, but with a primary and

secondary server it is assumed that zone transfers may occur. DNS zone

transfers typically take place over tcp/53.

7. B. The -I option enables the choice of interface. A lowercase -i option

sets the interval, whereas -a indicates an audible ping. Finally, -t enables

a time-to-live (TTL)-based ping only.

8. D. A /27, with a netmask of 255.255.255.224, splits a subnet into four

segments of 32 addresses, thus enabling 30 usable addresses.

9. A. The host or dig commands can be used for this purpose by setting the

type to mx. The mx type will query for the mail exchanger for the given

domain. There is no smtp type.

10. B. The localhost address for IPv6 can be written as ::1. Addresses shown

like 127 represent the IPv4 localhost range but are not written properly

for IPv4 or IPv6.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

11. A. The -T option causes traceroute to use TCP packets. This option,

which requires root privileges, can be helpful for situations where a

firewall may be blocking traceroute traffic. The -i option chooses the

interface, whereas -s chooses the source address. A lowercase -t option

sets the Type of Service (ToS) flag.

12. C. The ifup command is used to bring up network interfaces, and the -a

option brings up those interfaces marked as auto. Likewise, ifdown can

be used to turn off network interfaces. The ifconfig -a command

displays information on all interfaces, and there is no ifstat command.

13. D. The hostname command is used to return the hostname and domain.

When given the -d option, just the domain name is returned to STDOUT,

thereby making it appropriate for use in a script.

14. A. The ip command with the monitor option/subcommand will display

netlink messages as they arrive. There is no netlink subcommand for ip,

and the route command will not work for this purpose.

15. D. The -6 option, as in traceroute -6, executes an IPv6 traceroute. The

other options shown for this question are not valid. It would be rare for

the traceroute6 command to not be available and still have the

traceroute -6 command available.

16. A. The syntax is database: databasename with additional database names

separated by spaces, as shown in the correct option for this question.

17. A. The @ symbol is used to indicate a server to which the query will be

sent directly. This can be quite useful for troubleshooting resolution

problems by sending the query directly to an authoritative name server

for the domain. Of the other options, -t sets the type and the others are

not valid.

18. D. SNMP traffic takes place on ports 161 and 162. Though the traffic is

usually on UDP, the TCP ports are also reserved for SNMP. Ports 110 and

143 are used for POP3 and IMAP, respectively, whereas 23 and 25 are

telnet and SMTP. Finally, ports 80 and 443 are HTTP and HTTPS.

19. A. The getent command is used for working with NSS databases, and

getent hosts will display the available hosts using the databases

configured in /etc/nsswitch.conf.

20. D. A /25 in CIDR notation represents half of a /24 in address space,

therefore making 255.255.255.128 the masked bits. The 255.255.255.0

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

option is /24, whereas 255.255.255.192 is a /26. Finally, 255.255.0.0 is a

/16.

21. C. The configuration option is called nameserver, and the value for the

option is the IP address of the desired name server. There are several

options that affect how name resolution is performed, such as the

number of attempts and timeout. Also, the order in which name servers

appear affects in which order the name servers are queried. See

resolv.conf(5)for more information.

22. D. The /etc/services file contains standard port-to-protocol information

based on the well-known and assigned ports from the Internet Assigned

Numbers Authority (IANA). If you’d like to provide a custom name for

the service, you can do so by editing this file. There is no /etc/ports or

/etc/p2p file by default, and /etc/ppp is usually a directory for the Point-

to-Point protocol daemon and related services.

23. A. The route command can be used for this purpose, and the syntax

includes the network range, denoted with the -net option, followed by

the word netmask and the masked bits, followed by the lettersgw and the

IP of the gateway. The other options shown are invalid for a variety of

reasons, including missing keywords and options and order.

24. C. The -a option displays statistics for each socket, both listening and

non-listening. Included in this information is the send and receive

queues. This information can be used to gauge performance and

potential bottlenecks.

25. A. The correct format is the IP address followed by canonical hostname

followed by any aliases for the host. You can use entries in /etc/hosts to

override DNS lookups, which can be useful to prevent those names from

resolving or to provide a different resolution.

26. C. The ifconfig command for configuring interfaces begins with the

device followed by the IP address, which is then followed by the netmask

keyword and the netmask you want to add. Because this is a /24, the

netmask is 255.255.255.0.

27. C. IPv4 addresses are 32 bits in length and IPv6 addresses are 128-bits.

Both IPv4 and IPv6 can be used on internal and external networks alike,

and subnetting is indeed necessary with IPv6.

28. D. ICMP is a layer 3 protocol, meaning that it does not use ports for

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

communication. TCP/43 is used for whois whereas port 111 is used for

sunrpc. UDP/69 is used for the TFTP protocol.

29. B. The ip route command can be used for this purpose, and its syntax

uses a change command and the via keyword. The same operation could

be completed with the route command but would require deleting the

existing gateway first and then re-adding a new default gateway.

30. C. Secure Shell (SSH) operates on TCP port 22 by default. TCP/23 is used

for telnet, TCP/25 is used for SMTP, and TCP/2200 is not associated with

a well-known service.

31. B. The nc command is used to start netcat and the -l option causes it to

listen. The -p option is used to specify the port on which netcat will

listen. The -s option specifies the local source address and is not used for

this scenario.

32. A. The soa type is used to query for Start of Authority records for a

domain. Note that in many cases, dig will attempt to look up the domain

within a given command and may not appear to have had an error. For

example, when running option D (dig -t auth example.com) you will

receive information about example.com and there will be a line in the

output that dig has ignored the invalid type of auth.

33. A. The search option is used for this purpose and can be provided with

multiple domain names, each separated by a space or tab. The domain

option is valid within /etc/resolv.conf but does not allow for multiple

domain names. On newer systems, systemd-resolved has taken over for

the /etc/resolv.conf file.

34. C. The ping6 command is used to ping IPv6 addresses. Unique local

addresses are the IPv6 equivalent of RFC 1918 private addresses in IPv4.

In IPv6, fc00::/7 is the unique local address space. Note that there is no

-6 option to the normal ping command.

35. A. The route command can be used for this purpose, and in the scenario

described, a reject destination is used for the route. The other options

shown are incorrect because they use invalid options to the route

command.

36. B. The tracepath command provides the maximum transmission unit

(MTU) of the hops where possible. Both traceroute and tracepath can

be used internally or externally, and both provide IPv6 capabilities,

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

though traceroute6 and tracepath6 provide IPv6 capabilities as well.

Certain options with the traceroute command can require root

privileges, but not enough information was given in the question for that

to have been the correct option.

37. D. The -c option provides the count of the number of pings to send. The -

n option specifies numeric output only, whereas -p specifies the pattern

to use for the packet content. Finally, the -t option sets the TTL.

38. A. The nmcli command provides a command-line interface suitable for

working with NetworkManager through a terminal or SSH connection.

The nmtui command provides a curses-based interface that also works

through a terminal or SSH connection.

39. A. The syntax for ifconfig uses the device—in this case followed by the

protocol inet6—and then the keyword add to indicate that an additional

IP address is being added, followed finally by the address itself.

40. C. LDAP over SSL, or LDAPS, operates on port 636. Port 53 is used for

DNS, port 389 is used for normal, non-SSL LDAP, and port 443 is used

for HTTP over SSL.

41. D. The best option for this question is to add an entry for the host in

/etc/hosts. Doing so will always cause DNS queries to resolve to

127.0.0.1. The other options are not as robust because they rely on

www.example.com always having the same IP address, or the solutions

require additional maintenance to constantly add new IP addresses if

www.example.com’s IP address changes.

42. A. The ip route flush cache command should be executed after

changing the routes. The other commands shown for this question are

not valid.

43. A. SPF records are stored in the txt record type in DNS, making -t txt

the correct option for this. Of the other options, only -t mx is valid and

returns the mail exchangers for the given domain.

44. B. TCP is a connection-oriented protocol that uses a three-way

handshake to establish a connection. ICMP does not use ports for

communication, and UDP is connectionless. IP is the core Internet

Protocol and does not use a handshake.

45. D. There are 1,048,576 IP addresses in the 172.16.0.0 private range. There

are 16,777,216 in the 10.0.0.0 range and 65,536 in the 192.168.0.0 range.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

46. C. The only viable possibility of those listed is that ICMP traffic is

blocked. TCP traffic is obviously passing because of the ability to get

there using HTTP, and DNS must also be working.

47. C. The G signifies a gateway within the route table.

48. A. The axfr type is a zone transfer, and the @ symbol signifies the server

to which the query will be sent. There is no xfer type, and option B is just

a normal query for the domain sent to the specified server.

49. D. The netstat -s command displays aggregate statistical information

for networking, including the total packets received and the number of

packets forwarded. The ifconfig command does not show packets

forwarded. The ls command is not used for networking, and the ipstat

command does not exist.

50. C. The ip command defaults to the inet family if not otherwise specified

with the -f option. The command will attempt to guess the correct family

and fall back to inet. The other families listed as options for this

command are not valid for use with the ip command.

51. B. The ifconfig command will be used for this purpose, followed by the

interface. The hw keyword is used for the hardware address, which is then

followed by the hardware class, in this case ether. That is followed by the

new MAC address (not depicted in the options). The other commands are

not valid.

52. D. The -n option causes route to use numeric values only, performing no

name resolution. This option is useful for the scenario described. The -e

option causes the output to be in netstat format. There is no -d or -f

option for the route command.

53. A. Because we’re working with MAC addresses, the arp command will be

used. The -d option removes or deletes an Address Resolution Protocol

(ARP) entry, which would be appropriate here so that the MAC address

resolution occurs again. The netstat command will not be used for this

purpose. The hostname and dig commands work with name resolution

but not for MAC addresses or the ARP table.

54. A. The iw command will be used for this purpose. When using iw with a

specific device, the dev keyword appears next, followed by the device

name and then the command you want to execute on that device. In this

case, the link command is used.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

55. B. The iwconfig command, which is similar to the ifconfig command,

works with an individual wireless interface to set and display parameters.

Of the other commands, the ifconfig command is valid but not used for

wireless. The other commands are not valid.

56. C. The iwlist command will be used for this purpose, and the scan

subcommand is used to look for local access points and wireless

networks. Superuser privileges are required for a full scan. The iwconfig

command does not have a scan subcommand. Likewise, there is no

subcommand called get for the iwlist command, and there is no iw-scan

command.

57. B. NTP listens on UDP port 123 by default. Ports 20 and 21 are used for

FTP services, port 139 is used by NetBIOS, and port 5150 is not usually

used.

58. B. The mtu can be used to set the value for the maximum transmission

unit (MTU) for a given interface. The metric option sets the interface

metric. The other options are not valid.

59. A. The -s option creates an ARP table entry. The -d option removes an

entry. The -c and --add options do not exist.

60. A. The ss command provides many of the same functions as netstat but

can show some extended information, such as memory allocation for a

given socket. The free command shows memory usage but not by socket,

and the other two commands do not exist.

61. D. The -f option is a flood ping. This will effectively cause the interface

to send and receive large amounts of traffic, usually making it easier to

find on a switch. The -a option is an audible ping, emitting a sound on

ping. The -c option sends a certain count of pings, and there is no -e

option.

62. B. The netcat command provides a method for opening and

communicating on both sides, server and client, for a TCP connection.

The netcat command avoids some of the issues with telnet capturing

characters specific to the Telnet protocol. The netstat command does not

test connectivity, and ping does not do so at the TCP level. There is no

nettest command.

63. C. The -D option lists the interfaces on a given computer. The -d option

dumps compiled matching code, and -i selects an interface. There is no -

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

a option.

64. A. The ping6 command performs the same as the IPv4 ping command but

does so for IPv6. The other commands are not valid on Linux.

65. B. The ip command can be used for this purpose. When using it with the

addr object and the -6 option, only information about IPv6 addresses will

be shown. The first option, simply ip addr, will show all addresses,

including IPv4. The other commands are not valid.

66. A. The ifconfig command will be used for this purpose, and ARP can be

disabled by preceding the word arp with a minus sign, as shown. If no

minus sign is present, then ARP will be enabled. The other commands

will not work for this scenario.

67. C. The dev option specifies the device to use for the route being specified.

This is a typical use case for many routes to reduce the chance of the

kernel guessing incorrectly. The other options shown for this question

are not valid.

68. C. The -p option shows the process IDs associated with a given socket

within the ss output. The -a option is all sockets, whereas -l is listening

sockets. The -f option is used to specify the protocol family.

69. C. The -I option tells traceroute to use ICMP for requests. The -T option

is TCP SYN. The -A option performs AS path lookups, and the -i option

configures traceroute to use the specified interface.

70. C. Internally, the hostname command uses gethostname. This can be

useful to know when troubleshooting address resolution issues such as

conflicting results for host naming. The other functions are not valid.

71. A. The grep command used with the -i option makes the grep case

insensitive. When used with the -v option, grep will exclude the

argument, thus doing the opposite of what’s needed here. The kernel ring

buffer will probably not contain information about DHCP, making dmesg

an incorrect option.

72. B. Only alphanumerics, minus/dash, and dot are valid for hosts in

/etc/hosts.

73. B. Options within /etc/resolv.conf are preceded with the options

keyword followed by one or more options, such as debug.

74. D. The journalctl command will be used for this purpose. Adding the -u

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

option specifies the unit for which journal entries are desired.

75. A. The /etc/hostname file typically contains only the hostname of the

local computer rather than the hostname and domain name. This is then

read at boot time to set the hostname for the computer. The /etc/hosts

file contains information on various hosts for name resolution purposes.

The other files do not exist.

76. B. The traceroute6 command is used for tracing IPv6 routes. The other

commands do not exist.

77. D. The axfr type can be used with dig to request a zone transfer. The

client from which you request the zone transfer will need to be

authorized to initiate a transfer.

78. A. Setting -a as an option to the host command sets the query type to

ANY. The -c option sets the class, and -d turns on debugging. There is no -

b option.

79. C. The .digrc file, when created in a user’s home directory, can be used to

set defaults for use of the dig command. There is no dig configuration

file found in /etc.

80. D. POP3 servers do not have a specific type in DNS. MX type indicates

mail exchanger, or SMTP server.

81. A. The ip addr add command is used to add IP addresses to interfaces

using the syntax shown in option A. The other options do not have the

correct syntax.

82. B. The resolvectl command is used for assistance with resolution issues

for systemd-resolved and, when given the status command, will return

the DNS settings. The other options shown do not exist. The resolvectl

command is somewhat new, and if it’s not yet available on a given

systemd-based distribution, then systemd-resolve --status can be used.

83. A. The nmcli command is the only valid NetworkManager command

shown as an option, and when given the networking on command,

NetworkManager will control the network interfaces. It is worth noting

that if you disable NetworkManager control with networking off then all

of the previously managed interfaces are disabled.

84. B. NXDOMAIN is the status for a nonexistent domain or host, basically that

the host for which the query was sent does not exist. A normal status

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

when there has not been an error is NOERROR.

85. C. The systemd-networkd daemon can be used to manage networking

through systemd. The other options shown are not valid.

86. B. The set-hostname command within hostnamectl sets the hostname of

the device. The other commands shown are not valid for use with

hostnamectl.

87. A. IMAPS uses port 993 by default, as defined by IANA. Port 995 is

POP3S, port 465 is SMTPS, and port 514 is used by syslog.

88. B. The -o option removes newlines from the output, making the output

more suitable for the grep command. The -l option specifies the number

of loops for the ip addr flush command, the -f option specifies the

protocol family, and there is no -n option.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 10: Topic 110: Security

1. A. If /etc/nologin exists, users will be prevented from logging in to the

system. The root user can still log in, assuming that root logins are

enabled within the ssh configuration.

2. B. The find command will be used for this purpose, and the permission

can be described as 4000 to indicate the presence of the setuid bit. The -

type option can be used to change the type of object to be returned but is

not relevant for the scenario described.

3. B. The lsof command can be used for this purpose and, with the -i

option, will display the network ports along with their process. The

netstat command, when run with the -a option, will display network

ports but not the process. The ps command is used for processes but not

network ports. Finally, there is no netlist command.

4. A. The fuser command can be used to determine which process is using a

given file. The ls command will show files and find can be used to find

files but not specifically for this purpose. The ps command does show

processes but not necessarily ones tied to a particular file.

5. D. The chage command is used for working with account aging

information such as expiration date, password change, days between

password changes, and so on. The -l command lists information for the

given account. The usermod command is used to make changes to an

account, and the other two commands are not valid.

6. A. The nmap command is used to scan for open ports. By default, the nmap

command will scan for open TCP ports to the address or addresses

specified. The other commands shown do not scan for open ports to

external (off-host) IP addresses.

7. B. The ssh-keygen command is used to create a key pair for use with ssh

instead of a password. Of the other options, the ssh command does exist

but the -k option is used to disable Generic Security Service Application

Program Interface (GSSAPI) credential forwarding and not for the

purpose described.

8. B. The format is username (or other specifier) followed by hard or soft,

depending on the limit type, then the keyword followed by the value for

that given keyword.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

9. A. The authorized_keys file, stored in the .ssh directory in your home

directory, contains public keys that are authorized to log in to the server

using their corresponding private key.

10. C. The -p option shows the process ID to which a given port is connected

and is useful for displaying information about which process is listening

on a given port. The -a option shows listening and nonlistening sockets

whereas -n disables name lookups. The -l option shows listening sockets

only.

11. D. Loading alternate files is accomplished using the -f option. Doing so

facilitates exactly the scenario described, being able to examine logins

from old log files. The -a option controls the location of the display for

the host, whereas -t controls the display to output the logins as of the

specified date and time. There is no -e option.

12. D. The w command shows currently logged-in users along with

information such as uptime and load average. The fuser command is

used to show open files, and the -u option to ls controls the display for

file listings. There is no listuser command.

13. A. The -u option is correct for this purpose. An uppercase -U option sets

the user context for listing privileges. The -s option sets the shell, and

the -H option sets the home directory.

14. B. The NOPASSWD option causes sudo to not prompt for a password for a

given sudo command. This is useful for scripted scenarios where a

password prompt would cause problems.

15. C. The ulimit command shows such limits, and the -a option shows all

limits for the currently logged-in user. The other commands are not

valid.

16. C. The syntax to block access to every service uses the ALL keyword

followed by the address or network to which the policy will apply.

17. A. The correct format is YYYY-MM-DD for the usermod command.

18. C. The disable option is used for the purpose described, and can be set to

yes or no. The other options are not valid for this scenario.

19. A. The file is named id_rsa by default, and the public key is named

id_rsa.pub. For DSA keys, the names are id_dsa and id_dsa.pub. Other

key names such as id_ecdsa, id_ecdsa.pub, id_ed25519, and

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

id_ed25519.pub are also used depending on the algorithm. For client

keys, these are typically stored in ~/.ssh/ by default.

20. C. The -c option executes a single command but does so without an

interactive session. The -s option specifies the shell to be used. There is

no -u or -e option for the su command.

21. A. The /etc/security/limits.conf file (on some Linux distributions this

file could be /etc/limits.conf) enables the setting of limits for user

logins, processes, memory usage, and other resources. The other files

shown do not exist by default.

22. B. There is no special option necessary in order to execute a single

command on a remote host with ssh, although you might sometimes

place the command in quotes if spaces are included. The -s option

requests a subsystem and is not related to this scenario. The -e option

specifies an escape character.

23. D. The ssh-add command is used to list currently loaded keys and is used

in conjunction with ssh-agent. There is no -l option to ssh-agent, and

the -l option to ssh specifies the login name to use. There is no ssh-

list-keys command.

24. C. While any text editor can be used, it is highly recommended that you

use the visudo command to edit /etc/sudoers. Using visudo enables

syntax checking, which will help to prevent issues with an invalid

configuration, causing problems for those who rely on sudo.

25. A. The systemctl command will be used for this purpose, and the

subcommand is disable. There is a stop subcommand, but it will only

stop the given service rather than prevent it from starting on boot. The

other options are invalid for various reasons, including that they use

systemd as the command name rather than systemctl.

26. B. The chage command can be used for this purpose, and the -E option

accepts days since 1/1/1970. There is no -e option to passwd, and -l for

usermod will not perform the action described. There is no chguser

command.

27. C. The GlobalKnownHostsFile configuration option enables the

specification of a server-wide known hosts file, thus preventing users

from needing to accept host keys for the hosts specified therein.

28. C. The maxlogins parameter is used to control the number of

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

simultaneous logins for a given account.

29. B. The ssh_known_hosts file, typically kept in /etc/, is used for the

purpose described. Note that on some systems, this file and other SSH-

related configurations may be found in /etc/ssh/. The options that

indicated ~ or within /root are incorrect because the question specified a

server-wide list.

30. C. The date of the last password change, as measured in days since

January 1, 1970, is contained in the third field of a shadow entry. The

expiration date would be the 8th field, as separated by colons.

31. A. The format for local forwarding uses the -L option followed by the

local port and then the remote host:port combination. This is typically

followed by the user@host credential and destination information for the

SSH connection itself.

32. C. The option is called X11Forwarding and it must be set to yes in order

for the destination server to forward X-based windows to the local client

computer. The other options shown are not valid.

33. A. The --gen-key subcommand is used for the purpose described. The

other options shown do not exist.

34. A. The --sign option is used to sign files and documents with gpg. The

other options shown are not valid for signatures.

35. A. The -p option sets the port for login and is useful for scenarios where

you cannot use the host:port syntax. There is no -P or @ option with ssh,

and the -l option specifies the login name.

36. A. The -s option sets the type of scan and, when followed by an

uppercase S, sets the option to SYN. The T option is a Connect() scan.

There is no Y or -type option for nmap.

37. C. The wtmp file, stored in /var/log, is used to store recent login

information and must be read with the last command due to its format.

The other logs listed for this question are not default logs found on a

Linux system.

38. A. The -i option for ssh is followed by the private key to use for

authentication. Doing so implies that the public key is in the

authorized_keys file on the remote host. The -k option disables sending

of GSSAPI credentials, whereas -f is used to request backgrounding of

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

ssh. There is no --key option.

39. A. The -n option facilitates the scenario described and will exit non-zero

rather than prompting. The -i option sets the login name and is not valid

for this scenario. The -q and the --noprompt options do not exist.

40. C. The ssh-keygen command will be used for this purpose, and the -t

option specifies the type of key to generate. There are no key-related

generation options for the ssh command.

41. B. Lines can be commented out of /etc/inetd.conf with a pound sign or

hash mark (#). After making changes to /etc/inetd.conf, the service

should be restarted.

42. A. The -L option to usermod can be used to lock an account. The lowercase

version, -l, is used to change a username. The other commands do not

exist.

43. B. The pubring.gpg file, found in ~/.gnupg/, contains the public keyring.

44. C. The .gpg-v21-migrated file, when present, indicates that gpg version

2.1 or later is in use and that the files have been migrated for that version

or a later one.

45. D. The find command will be used for this purpose, and the -perm option

is needed, specifically as the 2000 permission to indicate setgid. Note

the use of / to indicate that the entire server will be searched. The grep

command shown cannot be used for this purpose because it looks for the

presence of the string 'setgid' within files located in the current

directory only.

46. C. The update-rc.d command creates symbolic links from a service file in

/etc/init.d/ to the appropriate locations in /etc/rc.d/* for each

runlevel. The other commands shown are not valid.

47. A. Single-user mode is typically runlevel 1. In runlevel 1, no network

services are started. Runlevel 2 has networking but typically not services.

Runlevel 5 is full multiuser with networking, and runlevel 6 is reboot.

48. C. The - option is the typical option passed to su for login. There is no -u

or -U option, and the -login option does not exist. There is a --login

option with two dashes, but that is not what’s shown.

49. A. The netstat command is used for this purpose, and the -a option

displays all sockets, listening and nonlistening. Note that it’s frequently

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

helpful to add the -n option, or combine them as in netstat –an, in order

to prevent name lookup. Doing so can significantly improve the

performance of the command.

50. C. This solution will require a way to filter out the bind user; therefore,

options that grep for bind or specify bind as the user are incorrect.

However, the lsof command allows for negation with the caret (^)

character. Therefore, listing all files except bind requires the syntax

shown.

51. B. The -R option requires an attempt at name resolution be performed.

The -n option does the opposite; it disables name resolution. There is no

-b or -a option.

52. C. The PARANOID wildcard specifies that the hostname and IP must match.

The ALL keyword is also a valid wildcard in TCPWrappers for use in both

/etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny.

53. A. The PermitRootLogin directive, set to yes or no, determines whether

the root user can log in directly. The other options shown are not valid.

54. B. The nmap command will be used for this purpose, and the -sT option

performs a TCP connect to the specified host or network. The other

commands are not valid.

55. C. The -X option enables X11 application forwarding through an SSH

connection. The -A option is used for authentication agent forwarding,

and -F indicates a per-user configuration file. There is no -X11 option.

56. B. The --output option is used with --encrypt to send the output to a

specified file. The other options shown are not valid for gpg.

57. B. The ssh-add command adds keys to ssh-agent. The other commands

shown are not valid.

58. B. The -x option sets the maximum password age until the password

needs to be changed again. The -l option locks the account, and the other

options do not exist.

59. A. The -l option sets the maximum amount of memory that can be

locked. The -t option sets the maximum CPU time, and the -x and -b

options do not exist.

60. B. The command shown to display the password file and pipe the output

into cut will display the usernames from the password file, /etc/passwd.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

The /etc/shadow file would also produce the same output.

61. B. The access_times configuration item sets the times in which access is

allowed. The other configuration options shown are not valid.

62. A. The .socket file extension is used for interprocess communication,

network sockets, and first-in, first-out (FIFO) queues controlled by

systemd. For more information, see systemd.socket.

63. C. The -N option provides the “new” passphrase, and when generating a

key, it can be used to generate an empty password. The -p and -P options

both work with passwords but would do so on an existing key. The -d

option does not exist for ssh-keygen.

64. A. The MD5 algorithm has been used if the password in /etc/shadow

begins with $1$. Of the other options, shadowed passwords beginning

with $2a$ or $2y$ would indicate the Blowfish algorithm. There is no RIN

or PIK algorithm for shadow passwords.

65. B. The --detach-sig option creates a detached signature file so that the

original file remains unchanged. Both the original file and detached

signature file are needed in order to verify the signature. The other

options do not exist.

66. C. The server host key provides a means by which clients can verify that

the server host key has not changed.

67. B. The IdentityFile option specifies the key that will be used to connect

to the host. The other options do not exist for client configurations in

SSH.

68. C. The gpg-agent command is a daemon process to manage private keys.

The gpg program and other GnuPG-related utilities use gpg-agent. The

other options shown for this question are not valid.

69. D. The sudoedit editor, part of the sudo package, can be used for the

purpose described. Of the other commands, only nano is a real command,

but it would also present the same possibility of shell escapes as vim

would in this scenario. While there may be ways to prevent a shell

escaping with both vim and nano, sudoedit is typically the preferred

option.

70. A. The -l option changes the login name for a connection with ssh.

Among the other options, only -a and -m exist and are not used for the

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

purpose described.

71. A. The -l option for usermod changes the username. It is worth noting

that the user’s home directory and mail spool file do not change and

would need to manually be changed following the usermod command. The

other options are not used for the purpose described.

72. C. The send-keys option followed by the name of the key sends the key to

the key server specified by the key server option. This is a typical scenario

for sending a locally generated public key to a public server for others to

use. The other options do not exist.

73. D. The % is used to denote a group within /etc/sudoers and provides an

excellent way to facilitate an administrative privileged group.

74. D. The fsize option is used within the limits.conf file to control the

maximum size of a file that can be created by a user for whom the limit

applies.

75. B. The ServerAliveCountMax option is used to set the number of

keepalive messages that can be sent by the client but not responded to

before the client will terminate the connection.

76. C. The /etc/nologin file prevents login when present and can also

contain a message that is displayed to users when attempting to login.

77. A. The -t option specifies the lifetime for the key and is usually given in

seconds but can also be given in minutes, hours, days, and weeks with

qualifiers. The other options shown do not fulfill the scenario described.

78. A. The -R option sets up a remote forward so that remote users can also

connect to the tunnel being set up. The other options are not valid for the

remote forwarding scenario.

79. B. The -W option sets the number of days to warn a user before their

password expires. The other options do not exist for chage.

80. B. The /etc/shadow- file contains the state of the shadow file before the

last change and would likely be the first place to begin recovery. The next

would likely be a backup, though /var/backups/ does not hold backups

unless manually created.

81. B. Integration with the libwrap library is an indicator that a given service

or daemon will be able to utilize TCP wrappers for access control.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

82. A. The User_Alias option enables specification of a group of users for use

elsewhere within the sudoers file.

83. A. Setting -P0 will allow no ping requests to precede the scan and is

useful for the scenario described. There is an -s option, but it is not used

for this purpose. The other options are not valid.

84. C. The UserKnownHostsFile configuration option enables specification of

the location and filename for the known hosts file for users.

85. C. The -t argument sets the type of key to generate, and dsa creates a key

with the dsa algorithm. Other types includes rsa and ecdsa. The files are

normally placed in /etc/ssh and assigned names such as

ssh_host_[algorithm]_key and ssh_host_[algorithm]_key.pub, where

[algorithm] is one of rsa, dsa, ecdsa, or ed25519.

86. C. The -q option prints the users who are logged in along with a count of

those users. The -l option prints the login processes, the -t option prints

the last system time change, and the -e option does not exist.

87. B. The -u option unlocks an account while setting the password. The -l

option locks the account, and the -t and -r options do not exist for the

passwd command.

88. C. The maxlogins option is used to control the number of times that a

user can log in. The only other limit-related option shown is

maxsyslogins, which sets the maximum number of logins for the entire

system.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 11: Practice Exam 1

1. B. The /proc filesystem stores information about running processes on

the system. The /etc filesystem is used for configuration information,

and /dev is used for device information. The /environment filesystem

does not exist on a default Linux system.

2. C. The /etc/modprobe.d directory contains information related to the

modprobe configuration. This can be overridden with the -C option on the

command line.

3. A. The -g option to wall sends the input to the specified group. Answer B

will send the output to all users, whereas answers C and D will not work.

4. B. The -e option to dmesg displays the time in a localtime and the delta in

a format that is typically easier to work with. The -rel option does not

exist. The -f option specifies the logging facility, and -t does not display

time at all.

5. B. The init process is typically associated with the initial process ID of 1

to indicate that it is the process from which others are spawned. Killing

PID 1 will typically and immediately halt the system.

6. C. The lspci command shows the PCI devices in the system, and the -k

option shows the kernel driver being used by the given device. The lsusb

command will not accomplish the task requested and the ls command

with -pci will not display the correct information. There is no showpci

command.

7. C. The --no-wall option will cause telinit to not send a wall command

to logged-in users about the state change. The other options listed in this

question do not exist.

8. A. The class/net hierarchy within /sys contains information on the

network configuration for the computer. It is a symlink to the devices

hierarchy, where the device will be listed by its address rather than the

logical eth0 name.

9. B. The SIGTERM signal is the default signal sent with the systemctl kill

command.

10. D. A logical location to begin troubleshooting is within the system BIOS

to ensure that the drive is being detected by the computer.

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

11. C. The dbus-monitor program, which requires an X display, can be used

to monitor dbus. The other programs and options listed for this question

do not exist.

12. A. The udevd service is called systemd-udevd.service within a systemd

environment.

13. A. The system can be scheduled to shut down at a certain time, and that

time should be entered in 24-hour format, as shown in the answer.

14. C. The -s option changes the signal to be sent from its default of SIGTERM.

The new signal must be one of the main signal types, such as SIGINT or

SIGSTOP.

15. D. The list-unit-files command will show the files available, whereas

--type=service will limit those files to the services, in the same way that

chkconfig --list returns a list of services.

16. A. The -C option sets the location of the cache to be updated instead of

the default /etc/ld.so.cache. The lowercase option, -c, changes the

format of the cache, whereas -v sets verbose mode. The --f option does

not exist.

17. C. The -P option to dpkg will purge a package from the system, including

the configuration files associated with the package. The apt-cache clean

command cleans the package cache but not an individual package, and

the apt-get remove command removes a package but not the associated

configuration files.

18. C. The deb-src prefix is used to indicate that a given repository contains

source packages. The deb prefix in option A would indicate normal

packages. The other options are not valid.

19. B. The -U option is used to upgrade a package. Adding -v for verbose and

-h for hash marks will print additional information and progress, as

requested by the problem.

20. A. The -y or --assumeyes option will do what it says: Assume that you

will answer “yes” and therefore not prompt. The other options do not

exist.

21. A. The exclude option within /etc/yum.conf is a space-separated list of

packages that accepts wildcards and is a list of packages that cannot be

installed or upgraded. The other options listed in this question do not

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

exist.

22. C. The ldconfig command is used to work with the library cache, and the

-p option prints the directories and libraries in the cache. The -C option

tells ldconfig to use a different cache. The ldd command prints the

library dependencies for a given command, but the options given don’t

exist for ldd.

23. D. The baseurl option is used to set the URL and must be fully qualified,

meaning that it must include the protocol, such as http:// or file://.

24. B. The apt-cache dump command will display a listing of the available

packages and their respective dependencies. The other commands and

options listed in this question do not exist.

25. A. The /boot directory almost certainly exists but has not been

partitioned into its own space. The /boot partition would not be hidden

from lsblk if it was indeed a separate partition.

26. B. The /var/cache hierarchy contains cached data for both package

management tools—in the case of yum, in /var/cache/yum, and in the case

of a Debian-based system, in /var/cache/apt.

27. A. The master boot record (MBR) is the typical location for the boot

loader to be stored on a BIOS-based system.

28. D. The / filesystem is the root filesystem. If separate partitions have not

been created, the / filesystem will be the beginning of the hierarchy and

will contain all other directories in the same partition.

29. A. The --output option configures the location for output of the

command instead of STDOUT.

30. A. The dd command is used for this purpose, and for this case it takes an

input file with the if option and an output destination with the of

option. The bs option signals that the block size for writing should be 1

megabyte.

31. D. The history command displays history from the current session and

can be used for the purpose described. The .bash_history file is written

on session close, by default.

32. C. The --boot-directory option will install the boot images into the

directory specified. This might be helpful for nonstandard installs or at

times when you need to mount the boot partition separately. The other

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

options listed in this question do not exist.

33. A. The update-grub command should be executed in order to make

changes take effect in the menu and when changes have been made to

the GRUB configuration. The other commands listed in this question do

not exist.

34. B. The export command is used for this purpose and accepts a

name=value pair, as shown in the answer. The other commands are not

valid with the exception of the echo command, which will simply echo

the argument to the console.

35. C. The HISTFILESIZE option configures the number of commands to keep

in the history file. The other variables are not valid within Bash.

36. D. The -b option configures the body numbering format for nl, which by

default will not number blank lines. The a format option will number all

lines, including blanks. The -a option is not valid for the nl command,

and the -n option configures the numbering format and would require an

additional argument in order to be valid.

37. D. The od command is used to create octal output. The cat command will

show the file as it exists on disk. The other two commands are not valid.

38. A. The pr command formats text for printing, including the date and page

numbers at the top of each page. Adding the -d option causes the output

to be double-spaced. The cat command will display output but not

paginated in such a way. The other two commands are not valid.

39. A. The -n option is used to change the number of lines. Adding the +N

after the -n option begins the tail process at the Nth line within the file.

40. C. The -i option causes the unique test to be done while ignoring the

case of the element to be matched.

41. C. The awk command shown can be used for this purpose. The -F option

sets the field separator, and the OFS option sets the output field separator.

42. C. The -a option is equivalent to the -d and -R options, which preserve

links and copy recursively, respectively. The -b option creates a backup,

and -f forces the copy.

43. A. When in command mode, typing a number followed by an uppercase G

will immediately move the cursor to that line number. The /23 option

will search for the number 23 in the file. The i23 option will insert the

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

number 23, and finally ZZ will exit Vi.

44. A. The -d option changes the update interval and can be helpful on a busy

system where top may be affecting performance. The -n option sets the

number of iterations to run. There is no -t or -f option for top.

45. B. The ps -e command is used to display all processes, and the -o option

configures the columns to display.

46. A. The grep command will be used for this purpose. Note the difference

between grep -r and grep -ri. The question did not ask for case

insensitivity, and therefore the use of -i in option B makes it incorrect.

47. B. The find command will be used for this purpose. Setting the directory

from which to begin the find is required, along with the expression,

which in this case, are files beginning with DB.

48. B. Load average information is gathered from /proc/loadavg, whereas

uptime information is stored on /proc/uptime.

49. D. Interactive repair is the default, so no option is required. The -f option

forces the operation, and -y and -a are both variations of noninteractive

repair.

50. D. The /etc/mtab file is updated dynamically as filesystems are mounted

and unmounted. The /etc/fstab file is not dynamically updated.

51. B. The -B option changes the format, and T sets the scale to terabytes.

The -T option alone prints the filesystem type. The other options do not

exist.

52. A. The e2image program can be used to create an image of metadata that

can help with drive recovery. The resulting image file can be used with

programs like dumpe2fs and debugfs.

53. C. The -c option checks for bad blocks. The -b option sets the block size.

There is no -a or -d option.

54. B. The chown command is used for this purpose and can be used to set

both the user and group for ownership.

55. A. The ssh-keyscan command can be used for the purpose described and

can help with virtual machine deployment by obtaining the SSH host key

and adding it to the known_hosts file.

56. C. The GRUB_RECORDFAIL_TIMEOUT option is used to configure the behavior

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

of the system in the event of a failed boot. Setting the value to -1 will

display the GRUB menu and not continue booting. Setting the value to 0

will cause the menu to not display. Setting to a value greater than or

equal to 1 will cause the menu to display for that many seconds.

57. A. The -s option displays a summary, and -h displays it in a human-

readable format.

58. D. The -L option tells find to follow symlinks. The -H and -P options are

both variations to tell find not to follow symlinks, and the -S option does

not exist.

59. A. The -a option appends to the file rather than overwriting when using

tee. The other options do not fulfill the needs of the problem statement.

60. C. The /etc directory and its subdirectories typically contain

configuration files that would be necessary in order to re-create the

system in a restoration scenario. The /var directory usually contains

variable information, whereas /opt may be used for several other

purposes. The /bin directory contains binaries that can usually be

reinstalled.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Chapter 12: Practice Exam 2

1. A. The /etc/hosts.deny file is part of TCP wrappers along with

/etc/hosts.allow. Both provide a basic mechanism for configuration of

access from remote hosts to network services.

2. C. The alias command uses the alias name followed by an equal sign

followed by the command to be aliased. In this case, because the

command to be aliased contains spaces, it needs to be contained in

quotation marks.

3. C. Shell scripting syntax uses the format shown, with square brackets

around the condition to the tested and double-equal signs for a string

test. Variables are preceded by a dollar sign as shown.

4. A. The export command is necessary so that any variables that are

manually defined in your current session become available to child

processes. The source command executes the file and can be used for the

purpose described but requires an additional argument. The let and def

commands are not valid.

5. C. The source command is the functional equivalent of a single dot (.).

The set command exists but is not used for this purpose. The other

commands are not valid.

6. A. The syntax for setting the PATH separates the new path with a colon, as

shown in the correct option. A primary difference between the correct

and incorrect options for this question was in how the actual specified

path was shown.

7. A. The correct syntax is as shown. Note that a semicolon is required when

the commands are included on one line, as displayed in the answer.

8. C. The mail command with -s for the subject is necessary, followed by

the email address for the mail. Then, input is redirected to the mail

command using /etc/hostname.

9. C. The /etc/skel directory contains files that are a skeleton of a user’s

home directory when their account is created. The other directories listed

do not exist by default.

10. D. The Universal Access section, which can be found by typing

Universal Access from within an Ubuntu GUI interface, enables

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

configuration of accessibility options.

11. B. The kbdrate command is used for the purpose described and can help

with accessibility. The other commands shown are not valid.

12. A. The DISPLAY variable controls the destination and screen for displaying

GUI applications. Setting this variable facilitates forwarding of X

applications over ssh.

13. B. The xhost command is used to control who can make connections for

both users and hosts to a given X server. The other commands are not

valid.

14. B. The -f option sets the days between expiration and disabled for an

account. The -g option is used to set the group ID, whereas -e is used to

set the overall expiration date.

15. A. The getent command can be used for the purpose described and will

display the aliases on the server by examining the aliases database. The

other commands are not valid and, in the case of the mail command

shown, will simply attempt to send mail to an address known as aliases.

16. C. The ALL: ALL syntax will cause all hosts to be denied. This means that

you must explicitly authorize hosts and networks using

/etc/hosts.allow.

17. B. The current at jobs for all users are shown when atq is executed as

superuser.

18. C. The -r option to the crontab command removes all cron entries for a

given user. The -l option lists cron jobs, whereas the -e option edits the

crontab. There is no -d option.

19. A. The -u option specifies the user. The -l option lists the cron jobs and -

e edits them. There is no -d or -m option.

20. A. The userdel command, given no other options, does not delete the

home directory. When given the -r option, the command will delete the

home directory and mail spool file. There is no -h or -p option for the

userdel command.

21. D. The -gid option is used to specify group ownership for the find

command. The -group option does exist, but since the question specified

that the group had already been deleted, the gid must be used instead.

There is a -name option, but it searches by name and not group ID.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

22. B. The groupmod command will be used for this purpose, and the -n

option followed by the new group name is used to change the name.

There is no groupchg command.

23. D. The journalctl command is used to view and parse log file entries on

systemd-based systems that maintain logs in a special format. The logger

command can be used to create log entries, and the other commands

shown do not exist.

24. A. The -o option followed by either 1 or 2 enables ntpdate compatibility

with older NTP servers. The default, when no -o option is specified, is

version 3. The -v option tells ntpdate to be verbose, whereas the -e

option sets the authentication timeout.

25. D. The /var/log/journal directory is used to store journal log files for

systemd-based systems. The other directories do not exist by default.

26. C. The -m option sets the mail program to use when mailing logs. It is set

to /usr/bin/mail -s by default. There is no -o option, and -v is verbose.

The -s option to the logrotate command sets the state file to use.

27. A. The -u option configures the output to UTC regardless of the time

zone. The -s option sets the time, and there is no -v or -t option.

28. D. The lprm command is used to remove print jobs on a system that uses

the lp system for printing. There is no lpdel or rmprint command. There

is an rm command, but it’s not used for working with print queues.

29. D. The 255.255.254.0 subnet mask is equivalent to /23. The

255.255.255.0 subnet mask is /24. The subnet mask 255.255.255.255 is

/32, and 255.255.0.0 is /16.

30. A. The /etc/hosts file will be examined first, and then a Domain Name

System (DNS) query will be sent based on the configuration shown.

31. D. Standard LDAP traffic is TCP port 389 on the server. TCP port 25 is

SMTP, 443 is HTTPS, and 143 is IMAP.

32. C. The -l option to ssh changes the username sent for authentication.

This can be useful for scripting scenarios where the @ notation cannot be

used. The -v option is verbose mode, and -i is the identity file to use.

There is no -u option.

33. D. The -n option disables name resolution for addresses involved in the

ping request/reply. The -D option returns a time stamp, whereas -d sets

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

the SO_DEBUG option. Finally, -f is a flood ping.

34. A. The ifconfig command shows various statistics about the interfaces

on a Linux system, including whether the interface is up or down, its

packets and bytes, queue length, and other information. The other

commands listed do not exist.

35. C. The -C option shows the SOA for each of the DNS name servers listed

as authoritative for the domain. The -a option sends an ANY query,

whereas -N sets the number of dots for the domain to be considered

absolute. There is no -n option.

36. A. The entire 127.0.0.0/8 range is available for local host addresses.

Therefore, an answer would need to be in this range. The proper format

for /etc/hosts is IP address followed by name, followed by optional

aliases, which makes option A correct.

37. C. The --ignore-errors option tells ifup to continue even if there are

otherwise fatal errors. The -h option outputs help. There is no -C or --

continue option.

38. C. The -u option unlocks an account that was locked using the -l option.

The -w option sets the warn days, and -S prints the status.

39. C. When connecting to an alternate port, you can use the -p option to set

the port or use a colon to separate the host from the port.

40. B. The mailto configuration option sets the destination for emails related

to sudo. The other options listed are not valid for sudo.

41. B. The who command displays who is currently logged in and the date and

time they logged in. The whois command displays information about

domains. The other commands are not valid.

42. C. Port 123 is used for NTP communication by default. Port 161 is SNMP,

139 is NetBIOS, and 194 is IRC.

43. D. A UDP scan can be initiated with -sU. A scan of -sT is a normal TCP

scan, and -sS is a SYN scan. There is no -sP option.

44. B. The +D option is used to search an entire directory tree for files that are

open by processes. The -d option does essentially the same thing but

does not go into subdirectories. The -f option is typically used in

combination with other options to control path name interpretation. The

-i option lists files or processes with open ports.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

45. C. The -r option causes the ip command to attempt to resolve IP

addresses. The -f option specifies the protocol family. There is no -n or -a

option to the ip command.

46. A. The ss command will be used, and when given the -o option, timer

information is displayed. The netstat -rn command shows route

information but not sockets or timing, and ping -f is a flood ping and

not related. The ls -l command displays files in a long listing format.

47. C. All of the addresses shown are in private ranges. The only one with the

correct netmask is 255.255.255.0, which is equivalent to 24 masked bits.

48. C. The !H sequence indicates host unreachable. Network unreachable is

!N.

49. D. There is no port for ICMP. The protocol itself does not use ports.

50. B. The /etc/services file contains the port number to name translation

for a given server. The file contains well-known ports and can be

customized on a per-server basis.

51. A. The command shown launches speech output for Orca. The other

commands contain options that are invalid and thus will not work.

52. A. The configuration files can be found in the /etc/lightdm hierarchy or

in /usr/share/lightdm. The other directory locations do not exist by

default.

53. D. The xwininfo command is used to gather information about windows.

The other commands shown are not valid.

54. A. The tzconfig command can be used on a Debian system to set the

time zone. The other commands listed do not exist.

55. C. The locale command will be used for this purpose, and the -m option

displays the available character maps. There is no charmap or mapinfo

command.

56. B. Time zone information is found within the /usr/share/zoneinfo

hierarchy. The other directories listed do not typically exist by default.

57. A. The default location on a Red Hat system is /var/lib/ntp/drift. The

other locations shown do not exist by default. Within /etc/ntpd.conf,

the location of the drift file can be changed with the driftfile option.

58. C. The <<< character combination reads input from STDIN or standard

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

input and uses it as the body of the message for the mail command.

59. C. The groupdel command is used to remove a group from a system. No

members of the group can remain or the command will fail.

60. C. The lpr syslog facility sends messages from the lp subsystem to

syslog. The auth facility is used for security-related messages. The other

listed options are not syslog facilities.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Index

Numbers and Symbols

/ filesystem, 200

128-bit message digests, 60

acceleration, linear, input devices, 107

AccelerationProfile, input devices, 107

accessibility

GRUB beep for input, 116

key presses, 119

legacy utilities, 111

Orca, 112

screen magnifier, 116

speech recognition, KDE, 114

Ubuntu, 209

account information, 178

accounts

disabled, 210

expiring, 182

locking, 185

unlocking, 191, 214

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

addresses
IPv6, 161, 170
local, IPv6 pings, 165
private, internal use, 160
administrative tasks, 124–138, 257–263
aliased commands, 90
aliases, missing, 98
anacron, 129
Apache, /var/log/httpd/access.log, 53
appending files, 61
tee, 205
applications, containerization versus virtualization, 35
apt-cache, Debian, package lists, 38
architecture, system, 3–20, 220–226
ARP, disabling, 170
arp, IP address-to-Mac address pair, 168
arrays, Bash script, 91
assistive technology, 110, 115–116
at
job creation, 133, 138
job deletion, 132
atq, as root, 210
authentication
disabling, 113
Spice, disable, 113
ssh, 179, 184
autofs, configuration files, default, 72
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

B
backups, 205
Bash, 54
bash function, 97
command history, 53
command substitution, 93
configuration files, locating on login, 88
environment settings, 47
executing commands, 87
file overwrite, preventing, 47
if conditionals, 88
initialization files, no reading, 91
logout, command execution, 87
output, redirect, 47
printing, list of numbers, 88
quotes, 57
reading commands, 87
sayHello function, 209
scripts, command-line parameters, 88
shell script, outputting name, 55
source built-in, 100
STDERR, redirecting, 52
STDOUT, redirecting, 52
umask setting, 79
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Bash scripts
arrays, creating, 91
debugging, #! line, 96
division operator, 98
email, sending, 98
exit code, 95
find command, 96
functions, command sequence as, 89
greater than or equal to, 94
initialization, system wide, 94
keywords, 89, 95
loops, 100
output, 96
return values, testing, 95
terminating, 99
values, user entry, 96
variables, 95, 98, 208
Bash shell
invocation, file execution, 95
path, /srv/bin, 95
/user/local/lib, 28
/usr/local/bin, 100
.bash_history, 201
.bashrc, 201
BIOS (basic input/output system)
boot loader, disk location, 200
integrated peripherals, 20
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

blocks, reserving, 77
boot loaders, ISO9660 CD-ROMS, 14
boot order, 14
/boot partition
/dev/sdal, 33
extlinux, 33
booting
configuration, /etc/default/grub, 29
GUI, disabling, 105
initramfs, 14
No init found, 14
reboot, 7
troubleshooting, kernel ring buffer and, 7
bootstrapping, 205
Braille display, 107
Orca, 116
btrfs subvolume, 75–76
built-in commands, listing read-only variables, 91
bunzip2, 61
bzip2, archive, sending to STDOUT, 56
C
case statement, 92–93
CentOS
groups, deleting, 217
packages, 37, 39
CentOS 6, RAM disk creation, 12
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

change, password changes, 191

character maps, 217

character sets, 125

characters

commands as function, Bash script, 89

multibyte representation, 126

sequence, alternate command, 89

child processes, variables, 208

chmod

execute permission, 97

minimum privileges, 90

chown, recursive change, 71

Chrony package, 152

chronyd, status, 156

CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing), subnets

netmasks, 163

splitting, 161

clock, hardware, 143

command-line

date, 143

parameters, Bash script, 88

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

commands. See also specific commands

aliased, removing, 90

executing two, 89

foreground processing, 50

history, 53

libraries, 29

locating elements, 69

paths, 61

return value test, 97

scheduling execution, 125

types, 57

compression, 59

decompressing files, 53

log files, disabling, 149

configuration

booting, 29

CUPS, 142

devices, udev, 6

/etc/hosts, 164

Ethernet devices, 173

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

files
autofs, 72
Bash, 86
Chrony, 152
locating on login, Bash, 88
logrotate, 156
modprobe, 196
priority order, 72
systemd, 8, 72
Upstart, 9
X clients, 107
XDMCP, 118
yum, 36
GRUB 2, 26, 201
IPv6, 166
kernel, 13
LightDM, 105, 111, 216
modprobe, 196
persistent, 157–174, 270–277
SSH custom client, 189
systemd, 13, 15
udev, 6
UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), 15
Weston, 115
Wi-Fi devices, 173
X, 107, 112, 113
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

connectivity

testing, TCP level, 170

troubleshooting, 167

copying

directories, recursive, 49

files, at user creation, 90

copy-on-write, 73

cp, 202

confirmation, 100

directories, copying recursively, 49

file overwrite, 49

cpio, 56

CPU time, displaying, 180

cron, 124

jobs, 132, 210

restart, 137

scheduled jobs, 126

user listing, 134

crontab, 210

other users, 211

removing, 136

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System)
configuration files, 142
daemon, listening on port 631, 150
default local printer configuration, 155
default port, 145
print jobs, completed, viewing, 146
print sharing, 149
restarting, 149
currency-related localization, 132
cut, delimiters, default, 50
D
data, writing to disk, 74
databases
hosts, enumerating, 163
updates, 71
date
command line, 143
current, 125
environment variables, 126
setting, 153
date, date/time set, 153
DATE variable, shell script, 92
dbus, communication, monitoring, 197
D-Bus, machine ID, 38
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Debian
packages, 30–32, 33, 36, 38, 198–199
reconfiguration, 31
services, starting/stopping, 185
source repository, 198
startup scripts, 20
time zones, 133, 216
updates, 27
zsh package, 28
debugfs, 74
debugging
/etc/resolv.conf and, 172
messages, journalctl, 149
slapd, 132
XFS filesystem, 78
declare, 91, 93
decompressing files, 53, 60
default gateway, changing, 164
desktop, 113, 251–257
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

devices, 63–81

answers to review questions, 239–245

drivers, lsmod output, 11

empty, 78

filters, vgscan, 39

hotplug, udevadm commands, 6

input, acceleration, 107

NVMe-based, 18

USB, listing, 6

wireless, parameters, 168

/dev/sdal, /boot partition, 33

df, 79, 204

DHCP, activity, 171

dig, 162, 172, 173

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

directories
backups, user home, 37
changes, tilde character and environment variable, 92
copying recursively, 49
FHS, local binaries, 99
files, coping, 209
finding, 48
ldconfig, command-line, 38
printing, 54, 199
removing, 48
root user, home directory, 27
skeleton home directory, 136
system log, 155
time zones, 217
useradd, 128
users, changing, 130
display
accessibility, Orca, 112
assistive technology, 110
Braille, 107, 116
fonts, 107, 110
fonts.scale, 112
GDM (GNOME Display Manager), welcome message, 105
GNOME, 106, 108, 109, 114
GUI, boot disable, 105
inactivity timeout, 113
input devices, linear acceleration, 107
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

KDE, magnification, 108
LightDM, 105, 106, 110
monitor, 105, 106
mouse gestures, 108
RDP (Remote Desktop), server-side implementation, 114
screen magnifier, 116
video cards, RAM, 112
X
authority files, 108
local client, 111
monitor vertical refresh, 107
window information, 109
X Display Manager, login, 116
X session
information, 115
pointer keys, 114
terminal device width, 111
xauth authority file, 110
XFree86, hardware query, 106
xfwm4 window manager, 113
xorg.conf
blank mode, 109
video mode changes, 108
division operator, Bash script, 98
dmesg, time, 196
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

DNS (Domain Name System)
default route, 160
lookups, overriding, 166
POP3 server specification, 173
setting, 163
SPF query, 167
systemd-resolved, 173
documentation, access, 47
domain names, 162
DPMS (Display Power Management Signaling), 109, 113
drift file, location, 144
driftfile, 217
du, printing, 205
dumpe2fs, partition bad blocks, 73
E
e2fsck, superblocks, location, 79
egrep, 52
email. See also messages
abuse account, 146
aliases, 210
forwarding, Procmail, 150
per-user forwarding, 153
processing statistics, 149
removing, 150
root user, 144, 209
emulation, ping, 166
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

encrypted files, gpg, 187
encryption
passwords, 131
remote desktop, 113
env, 96
environment, Bash, 47
environment variables
date format, 126
declaring, 55
directory change, tilde character and, 92
localization, 127
paper size, 135
PS1, 87
removing, 87
removing temporarily, 57
single-line viewing, 99
terminal device, X session, 111
text editors, 58
time format, 126
usernames, 99
ESP (EFI system partition)
filesystem mount, 26
format type, 33
grub-install, 38
/etc/aliases, email messages, 150
/etc/default/grub, 29, 32
/etc/fstab, 72, 75, 81
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

/etc/hosts, 164, 171
/etc/hosts.allow, wildcards, 186
/etc/inetd.conf, services, disabling, 184
/etc/inittab, runlevel, single-user mode, 185
/etc/localtime, directory listings, 151
/etc/logrotate.conf, emailing log, 144
/etc/ntp.conf, drift file, location, 144
/etc/passwd, 49
/etc/resolv.conf, debugging and, 172
/etc/security/limits.conf, 182
/etc/shadow, 183, 188
/etc/sudoers, 214
admins group, 190
editing, 182
password prompt, 180
/etc/X11/xorg.conf, 105
/etc/yum.conf, kernel update, 32
Ethernet, device configuration, 173
event viewing, 6
Exam 1, practice exam, 284–288
Exam 101-500, practice exam, 288–292
executable files, location, 67
exFAT filesystem, formatting, 78
Exim server
mail delivery, 155
SMTP traffic and, 148
expiration, removing, 124
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

export
names as functions, 94
variables, 101
removing, 97
expressions, regular expressions, 59
ext2 filesystem, 68
journal, adding, 76
superblock, corrupt, 79
ext3 filesystem, 68
checking clean, 75
metadata image, 204
repairs, 204
extlinux, installation, /boot partition, 33
F
FAT (File Allocation Table)
formatting, 76
rescue disks, boot loader, 13
Fedora 22, packages, installation, 37
fgrep, 59
FHS (filesystem hierarchy standard), 69–70, 99
Fibre Channel, 17
file compression, 53, 59, 60
file dumps, maximum file size, 75
file tests, 95
operator, 98–100
$FILEPATH variable, 92
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

files
appending, 61
binary mode, 58
content search, 203
copying, 90, 209
decompressing, 53
existence, testing, 93
extracting, 50
group information, 126
gzip, 50
initialization, no reading, 91
line numbers, prepending, 53
listing, 56
moving, 54
open, listing, 186
overwriting, confirmation, 100
ownership, 68, 204
passwords, 125
removing, 55
removing lines, 60
searches, backward, 55
size, 55, 190
splitting, 60
tar, 50
UID, 125
usernames, 125
users, deleted, 79
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

filesystems
copy-on-write, 73
creating, bad blocks, 204
disk space, 70
ext2, 68
ext3, 68
extensions, missing, 49
hierarchy, 63–81, 239–245
information, 70
inodes, 68
ISO, creating, 72
Linux, 63–81
listing currently mounted, 34
mounted, 204
mounting, 69, 70, 71, 77
overwriting, 49
processes, running, 196
read-write mode, 74
ro, 73
sticky bits, 69
type, mke2fs, 72
unmounting, 74, 178
verifying, 74
xfs_check, 74
find, 54, 81, 97, 99, 205
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

firewalls
ports, 160, 214
protocols, 160
fonts, X.org, 107
fonts.scale, 112
for loops, 90, 93
foreground processing, 50, 51
fsck, 68, 72, 204
G
gateways, default, 160, 164
GDM (GNOME Display Manager)
greeter, welcome message, 105
login window options, 118
welcome message, 105
getent, password database, 136
GIDs, UIDs and, 130
GNOME
GOK (GNOME On-Screen Keyboard), 109
high-contrast theme, 108
on-screen keyboard, 119
screen reader, 106, 109
slow keys, 114
sticky keys, 106
GNU, commands, 41–61
answers to review questions, 233–239
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

GnuPG
key pair generation, 183
private keys, daemon process, 189
GOK (GNOME On-Screen Keyboard), 109, 111
gpg
detached signatures, 188
encrypted files, 187
keys, sending to key server, 190
public keys, 185
signatures, generating, 183
GPT disks
formatting, 77
partitions, Linux, 37
greater than or equal to operator, 94
grep, 100, 174
group ID, minimum group ID, 137
group information, 126, 127
group ownership of files, 68
groupadd, 135, 137
groupdel, 131
groups
changes, 126
names, 211
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

GRUB
beep for input, 116
versus GRUB 2, 36
images, alternate directory, 34
MBR, SATA disk, 30
menu display, 25
operating system, default boot, 32
parameters, editing, 16
partitions, 25
ro option, 29
single-user mode, 25
timeout, setting, 28
GRUB Legacy
dual-boot option, 27
hd(0,0), 33
kernel options, 25
non-Linux kernel, 26
GRUB2
configuration changes, 201
configuration file, 26
versus GRUB, 36
grub-install, 34
boot images, 201
grub-mkconfig, 200
file output, 29
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

GUI (graphical user interface)
applications, screen, 209
boot disable, 105
.gz extension, 55
gzip files, 50
H
handshakes, three-way, 167
hardware, clock
system time, 145
UTC, 146
working with, 143
head, 48, 51
/home/webfiles, 124
host, 160, 172
hostname
boot and, 172
setting, 174
hostname, programmatic functions, 171
hosts
blocking, TCP wrappers and, 208
storing, ssh keys, 182
hosts database, enumerating, 163
hotplug devices, udevadm commands, 6
hwclock, system time, 145
I
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

IaaS (Infrastructure as a Service), performance, 36
ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)
echo requests, 216
packets, generating, interface, 161
ports, 164
requests for IPv6, 170
iconv, 125
if conditionals, Bash script, 88
ifconfig, MTU, network interfaces and, 168
ifup, 214
IMAPS (IMAP over SSL), listening port, 174
indexes, recreating, 130
init, process IDs, 196
initialization
files, no reading, 91
xinit, 117
initrd, filesystem, 16
inodes, 68
usage information, 81
input. See also assistive technology
devices, acceleration, 107
installation
Fedora 22 system, 37
Linux, 21–39, 226–232
rpm, 28
yum package, 27
zypper, 37
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

interfaces, 105–119
answers to review questions, 251–257
auto, online, 161
displaying information, 160
selecting, 161
interprocess communication service units, systemd, 188
ip, 168, 174, 215
IP addresses, availability, 167
ip route change, 166
iproute2, address changes, 173
IPv4/ IPv6 comparison, 164
IPv6
addresses, 161, 170
configuration, 166
IPv4comparison, 164
pings, unique local address, 165
route traces, 172
traceroute, 162
IRQ (interrupt request), assignments, viewing, 6
ISO filesystem, creating, 72
ISO9660 CD-ROMS, boot loader, 14
J
JAVA_PATH, 201
job schedulers, 125, 126, 127, 128, 133, 136
jobs, 56, 61
journal logs, files, maximum size, 147
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

journalctl, 149
filters, time-based, 154
journal data location, 155
journal data size, 153
kernel message queries, 152
logs, clearing, 150
maximum space, 154
new log entries, 147
service names, 153
journald.conf, file size, 147
K
KDE
magnification, 108
speech recognition, 114
keepalive messages, 190
kernel
configuration information, 13
messages, 142, 152
modules, listing, 8
printing information, 47
ring buffer, 7, 9
symbols, files, 12
udev events, 6
updating, 32
key pairs, 179, 183
keyboard, 209
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

keys, listing current, 181
keywords, Bash scripts, 89, 95
kill, 20, 51, 52, 57
killing processes, 54
klogd, logging messages, 145
L
LANG variable, 128
last, recent login details, 184
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), 213
entries, importing, 124
LDIF file, creating, 127
local files, lookups, 162
over SSL, listening, 133
user list, 127
LDAP over SSL, port, 166
ldconfig
cache location, 198
directories, 35, 38
library path, directories, 35
LDIF files, creating, 127
libraries
availability, 81
commands, 29
printing, 199
shared, 26
storage, 30
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

libwrap, 191

LightDM

configuration, 105, 111, 216

guest login, 106

revert to terminal, 110

usernames, display, 117

lightdm.conf, SeatDefaults section, 117

line numbering, 201

linear acceleration, input devices, 107

link status, displaying, 168

links, symbolic, 79

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Linux
/ filesystem, 200
/boot partition, size, 30
directory structure, 27
documentation, access, 47
filesystems, 63–81, 239–245
GIDs, versus UIDs, 130
initialization, single-user mode, 7
installation, 21–39, 226–232
package management, 21–39, 226–232
partition, non-swap, 67
partition structure, 27
swap, 30
swap space, deactivating, 76
system logs, 155
time zones, 124, 143
UIDs, versus GIDs, 130
ln, symlinks, 69
load average
determining, 51
uptime, 203
loading, modules, 6
locale
currency-related, 132
LANG variable, 128
reconfiguring variables, 128
locale, 134
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

localhost, redirecting to, 166
locate, 71, 80
log files
compression, disabling, 149
entries, parsing, 211
journal logs, maximum size, 147
journalctl, 150
rotation, configuring, 148
systemd, disk space used, 144
log in
automatic, LightDM, 111
message display, 18, 19
number logged, 191
number of, 182
password-based, 128
preventing temporarily, 178
users logged in, 180
X Display Manager, 116
log zeroing, 77
logging
kernel messages, 142
messages, klogd, 145
logical volumes, 18
login name, changing, 189
logout, command execution, Bash shell, 87
logrotate, 142, 149, 156, 212
logs, emailing, /etc/logrotate.conf, 144
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

lookups, 162
loops, 90, 100, 101
ls, 48, 87
ls -la, output, 67
lsblk
empty devices, 78
filesysem UUID, 80
partitions, 200
lsof, instances, open, 215
lspci, 8, 12
LUN (logical unit number), 17
lvchange, logical volume availability, 35
LVM (Logical Volume Manager), 30, 31, 32, 34, 35
.lzma extension, 53
M
MAC (Media Access Control), 168
mail, 153, 155
mail servers, querying for, 161
man, 52
man pages, 56, 59
MBR partitioning system, 26, 30
MBR-formatted disks, partition size, 77
measurement, environment variables, 127
/media/ mount point, 78
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

memory
displaying, 180
limits, 187
sockets, 168
usage, 50
menu.lst, 29
messages. See also email
all users, 8
debugging, journalctl, 149
keepalive, 190
log, klogd, 145
Postfix server, 146, 150
subject, 153
MIME types, 134
minimum group ID, 137
mke2fs, 72, 204
mkfs.ext4, block reservation, 77
mkswap, back block check, 80
modprobe
configuration information, 196
module dependencies, 8
modules, blacklist information, 12
monitors, 105, 106
mount, 69, 73
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

mount points, 38
FHS, removable media, 70
maximum, 73
/media/, 78
mounting
filesystems, 69, 70, 71, 77
partitions and, 67, 76
simulating mount process, 73
unmounting, 74, 178
USB disk, 67
mouse gestures, 108
moving, files, 54
MTU, network interfaces, 168
mv, file overwrite, 49
N
nagios, monitoring, 50
name resolution, 168, 186, 213
netcat, servers, listening ports, 165
netlink, messages, listening for, 162
netmasks, subnets, CIDR notation, 163
netstat
-a, 216
process ID, 179
sockets, send and receive queues, 163
Network Manager, 166, 172, 173
networks, persistent configuration, 157–174, 270–277
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

nl, 201
nmap
name resolution, 186
open ports, finding, 184
UDP and, 215
nptd, synchronization, time and, 147
NTP (Network Time Protocol)
interactive mode, 144
internally facing, 168
ntpdate, 211
time, 142
ntpdate, 211
ntpq, messages, 143
numbering lines, 201
NVMe-based devices, 18
NXDOMAIN, 173
O
OnCalendar systemd, 136
OpenLDAP
corrupted, recovery, 131
database storage, 137
entries, adding, 129
slapd, 126
operators, 94, 98, 99, 100
Orca, 112, 116, 216
out-of-memory conditions, 50
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

output, realtime viewing, 56
overwriting files, 49, 100
ownership of files, group ownership, 68
P
packages
cache update, Debian systems, 30
CentOS, 37, 39
Debian, 28, 31, 32, 33, 36
information, Debian, 199
installation, Fedora 22 system, 37
Linux, 21–39
RPM, downloading, 28
upgrades, yum, 199
upgrading, rpm, 199
yum, 27, 28, 31
zypper, installation, 37
packet forwarding, number of packets, 168
packets, statistics, 213
pagers, backward/forward search, 58
parameters, wireless devices, 168
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

partitions

bad blocks, 73

GRUB, 26

images, 49

initial sector, 33

Linux systems, 27, 67

lsblk, 200

LVM (Logical Volume Manager), initializing, 30

mail servers, 26

MBR system, 26, 77

mounting and, 67

swap partitions, formatting, 70

type 0x82, 67

UUID, 74

passwd, 187, 214

passwordfile, /etc/passwd, 49

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

passwords
age, 187
change, 191
change date, 129
changing, 129
encrypted, 131
expiration, 210
files, 125, 188
getent, 136
password-based login, 128
unlocking accounts, 214
x11vnc, 114
paths, 61
~/code/bin, 208
removing from results, 69
PCI devices, 196
permissions
chmod, 90
editing, simultaneous, 79
execute, 97
granting, 78
ls command, 88
root privileges, 189
setgid, 80
persistent configuration, 157–174, 270–277
pgrep, 57
ping, 161, 166, 213
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

pkill, 61
plaintext files, octal representation, 202
pointer keys, X session, 114
POP3, DNS and, 173
port scans, TCP connect, 187
port-forwarding, local session, 183
ports
firewalls, 160, 214
open, 178
scanning for open, 178
Secure Shell, 164
SNMP, 162
port-to-protocol translation, 163
POSIX (Portable Operating System Interface), umask and, 68
Postfix server
email aliases, 152
mail delivery, errors, 151
mail queue, 144, 147, 150, 152, 154
messages, 146, 150, 156
power, shutdown, 19
practice exams
Exam 1, 284–288
Exam 101-500, 288–292
prepending line numbers, 53
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

printing
adding jobs to queue, 153
deleting jobs, 212
directories, 54, 199
head, default number printed, 48
human-readable format, 205
libraries, 199
lpr option, 154
queue, placing file, 145
removing jobs, 152, 155
tail, default number printed, 48
users, groups, 148
viewing jobs, 147
wc, number of lines, 47
private addresses, internal use, 160
/proc filesystem, 11
process IDs, 50, 196, 203
processes
child, variables, 208
killing, 54
priorities, 52
reprioritizing running, 59
running, 196
Procmail, email forwarding, 150
programs, crashing, 50
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

protocols
firewalls, 160
ip, 168
ps, aliases, 208
PS1 environment variable, 87
ps-based commands, 57
public/private key pair, ssh, 179
R
RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks), 17
RAM, video cards, 112
rc files, runlevels, 13
RDP (Remote Desktop), 114, 119
read access, granting, 78
README file, missing, 96
readonly, 99
read-only mode, filesystem mounting, 77
read-only variables, 91, 93
read-write mode, 74
reboot, commands, 7
recursive copy, symlinks, 202
Red Hat, 15, 217
regular expressions, 59
remote desktop, 113, 115
remote forwarding, SSH, 191
remote hosts, port setting, 183
remote servers, command execution, 181
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

remote system logging, 156
removable media, mount points, FHS, 70
repositories, yum, 29
rm, 55
rmdir, 48
rmmod, module, unloading, 11
ro, GRUB file, 29
root user, home directory, 27
route, 167, 168, 171
rpm, 28, 29, 31, 38, 199
RPM, packages, downloading, 28
rpm2cpio, output location, 27
RSA-based key pairs, 181, 184
rsyslogd, server listening, 147
runlevel
default, 16
display, 7
runlevels, systemctl, 16
running tasks, backgrounded, 53
S
SAN (storage area network), 11
SATA (Serial Advanced Technology Attachment)
disks, 197
identifiers, 25
sayHello function, 209
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

scheduling
certain time, 133
command execution, 125
cron, 126
directories, 136
listing jobs, 133
power down and, 125
scheduled jobs, finding, 127
script directory, 128
screen magnifier, 116
screen resolution, 106
scripts. See also Bash scripts
answers to review questions, 245–251
changes, 68
command line, date, 143
domain names, server, 162
execute then leave, 89
SCSI (Small Computer System Interface), 18
searches, 55, 58, 60
Secure Shell, ports, 164
security, 175–192, 277–284
sed, 47
sendmail, 145, 146, 148, 149
seq, delimiters, 95
server host keys, SSH, 189
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

servers
routes, adding, 163
setgid bit, 185
set, 94
setgid, file permissions, 80
setuid bit set, 178
shared libraries, 26
shebang line, 97
shell scripts, 85–101
answers to review questions, 245–251
DATE variable, 92
files, existence, 90
permission denied, 94
shebang line, 97
syslog, logging to, 152
variable contents, displaying, 88
variables, user input, 89
shells, 85–101
answers to review questions, 245–251
built-in commands, 71, 91
script, execute then leave, 89
shutdown, 10, 19, 198
shutdown command, 19
SIGHUP signals, 56
SIGKILL, 20
single-user mode, 14
skeleton home directory, 136
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

slapadd, line number specification, 134
slapd, 126, 130, 132
SMART (Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology), compatible
hard drives, 74
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol), 148, 151
snapshots, btrfs subvolumes, 76
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), ports, 162
SOA (Start of Authority), 213
source built-in, 100
speech capabilities, Orca, 216
speech recognition, KDE, 114
SPF (Sender Policy Framework), 167
Spice, authentication disable, 113
.sql extension, searching for, 80
srv/vhosts, 35
ss, process IDs, 171
SSD (solid-state drive), hardware, NVMe (Non-Volatile Memory Express), 17
ssh
authentication key, enabling, 184
key-based authentication, 179, 184
public/private key pair, 179
remote host port, 183
username change, 213
X11 application forwarding, 187
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

SSH (Secure Shell)
custom client configuration, 189
hosts, 182
keys, adding, 187
keys, virtual machine cloud deployment, 37
new windows, X forwarding and, 105
remote forwarding, 191
server host keys, 189
server-wide client, 191
sudoers, 114
visudo, 114
X sessions, 110
ssh-agent, keys, listing current, 181
ssh-keygen, 188, 191
Start of Authority, information display, 165
STDERR, redirect, 52
STDIN, mail, 217
STDOUT, redirect, 52
sticky bits, 69
sticky keys, GNOME, 106
storage, libraries, 30
su, 181, 186
subnets, 215
masks, 212
netmasks, 163
splitting, 161
sudo, 53, 78, 184, 214
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

sudoers, SSH connection, 114
suehring, 179
swap partitions, formatting, 70
swap space (Linux), 30
activating, 34
deactivating, 76
determining, 50
swapon, 39
swapon, 39
switch statement, 92
symbolic links, 79
file test operators, 99
find, 205
symlinks
ln, 69
recursive copy, 202
sysfs filesystem, MAC addresses, 197
syslog
- sign in configuration, 154
custom log files, 148
informational messages, 143
logging to, 152
lp printing, 217
syslog-ng, configuration files, primary, 148
system architecture, 3–20, 220–226
system clock, 134
system logs, Linux directories, 155
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

system services, 139–156

access allowed, 188

answers to review questions, 263–270

libwrap, 191

listening, 186

loaded, 9

preventing startup, 181, 182

system time, 145, 146

systemctl, 11

processes, killing, 197

runlevels, 16

systemctl kill, 198

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

systemd, 198
active timer display, 136
boot messages, 19
booting, 17
configuration files, 8, 72
configurations, 13
default target, 10
GUI, boot disable, 105
interprocess communication service units, 188
journal, 142, 149, 172, 212
location specification, 76
log file, 142, 144
logging, 142
multi-users, 16
network interface management, 174
output logging, 152
overriding configuration files, 15
program executing, 10
service units, listing, 8
single-user mode command, 9
storage, 13
timer units, 134, 135
udev, 197
user init files, 14
systemd-resolved, DNS resolution, 173
systemd-run, timed events, 132
systemed, timer units, 138
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

SysV system
chkconfig, services, 9
init, 7, 15
process termination, 19
scripts, starting/stopping, 15
SysVinitu environment, 198
T
tail, 48, 51, 202
tar files, 50
tasks
administrative, 124–138
running, backgrounded, 53
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
remote system logging, 156
wrappers, blocking hosts, 208
tcpdump, available interfaces, 170
tee, appending, 205
telinit, 197
terminal processing, 51, 56
terminal-based interface, package management, Debian, 31
test built-in command, arguments, not null, 92
text, formatting, 202
TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol), PXELINUX, 15
three-way handshake, 167
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

time
current, 125
dmesg, 196
environment variables, 126
hardware clock, 143
NTP (Network Time Protocol), 142
setting, 153
system clock, 134, 145, 146
system time, offline devices, 145
timedatectl, 134, 151
timezones
available, 135, 143
current, 151
Debian, 133, 216
directories, 124, 217
Linux server, 124
systemwide, 132
timedatectl, 151
user home directory, 127
top, 60, 203
touch, 48
tracepath, 165
traceroute, 165
ICMP, request and, 171
IPv6 route traces, 172
TCP SYN packets, 161
traceroute, !H, 215
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

traceroute6, IPv6 traceroute, 162
traffic, route limiting, 165
transport layer security, remote desktop, 115
tune2fs, 73, 75, 77
type 0x82 partition, 67
U
Ubuntu
accessibility, 209
images, deploying to remote provider, 36
udev, 6, 12
udevadm commands, hotplug devices, 6
UDP, nmap, 215
UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface)
boot configuration, 15
boot loaders, 14
booting, shim, 16
UG flags, 167
UIDs
files, 125
GIDs and, 130
ulimit, memory limits, 187
umask, POSIX format and, 68
umount, 71, 178
uniq, 202
UNIX, commands, 41–61, 233–239
unset, 87
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

unset option, 97
updates, kernels, 32
Upstart, configuration files, 9
uptime, load average information, 203
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
connections, information, 11
devices, 6, 9, 10
disks, mounting, 67
drives, 10
temporary disk, removing, 10
user information, 137
useradd
account disabled, 210
adding groups, 130
home directory, 128
password expiration, 210
usermod, 131, 189
usernames
changing, 189, 213
environment variables, 99
files, 125
printing, 202
sorted list, 48
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

users
account expiring, 182
deleting, 79, 125, 211
directories, 130, 133
executing commands on, 180
expiring account, 180
file copying, 90
interfaces, 105–119, 251–257
limits, 180, 181, 191
logged in currently, 180
login, preventing temporarily, 178
messaging all, 8
names, printing, 202
printing, from password file, 188
time zones, 127
useradd, 128
/usr/local, directories, creating, 49
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
hardware clock, current system time, 146
output to, 212
UUID
lsblk and, 80
partition identification, 72, 74
V
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

variables
Bash script, 98, 208
child processes, 208
DATE, 92
environment
declaring, 55
localization, 127
paper size, 135
PS1, 87
removing, 87
single-line viewing, 99
terminal device, X session, 111
usernames, 99
export, 101
exported, 101
$FILEPATH, 92
read-only, declare, 93
.variables.sh, 208
vgscan, devices, filters, 39
Vi editor
cursor, moving, 58
files, removing lines, 60
insert mode, 52
moving to line, 203
save and exit, 51
searches, backward, 55
video cards, RAM, 112
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

virtual machine
boot process, 25
bootstrapping, 205
deployment, 36
virtualization, 35, 39
visudo, SSH connection, 114
volumes, logical volumes, 18
W
wall, user log off, 196
Wayland protocol, 113
wc, printing, number of lines, 47
web server, /home/webfiles, 124
Weston, configuration, 115
while loops, 90, 91, 93, 101
Wi-Fi, device configuration, 173
wildcards, 60
/etc/hosts.allow, 186
wireless devices, parameters, 168
wireless networks, scanning for, 168
WWN (World Wide Name), directory hierarchies, 18
X
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

X
abbreviations, 112
authority files, 108, 115
clients, executing, configuration file, 107
configuration
keyboard model, 107
Screen section, 112
server layouts, 112
local client, display, 111
SSH (Secure Shell), 110
window information, 109
X Display Manager, login, 116
X forwarding, SSH server, new windows, 105
X server
clean exit, 108
configuration, 107, 113
connections, closing, 117
defaults, restoring, 117
error log, 117
hosts, 110, 116
init, 117
resources, freeing, 117
TCP, listening disable, 116
user access, 210
X session, pointer keys, 114
X windows, 216
X11, 118, 187
Technet24
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

x11vnc, passwords, 114
xauth, 117, 119
xauth authority file, 110
xauth utility, X authority files, 108
XDMCP
BroadcastQuery packets, 118
configuration file, 118
host access, 108
XFree86, hardware query, 106
XFS filesystem, 73, 78
xfs_check, 74
xfs_fsr, filesystem reorganization time, 78
xfs_metadump, progress indicator, 70
xfs_repair, log zeroing, 77
xfsrestore, options, 75
xfwm4 window manager, 113
xhost, hosts, enabling, 118
xinit, per-user initialization, 117
X.org, font storage, 107
xorg.conf
blank mode, 109
Files section, fonts, 110
inactivity timeout, 113
Module section, 106
video mode changes, 108
Xsession, 111, 115, 118
xzcat program, 58
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
NEWOUTLOOK.IT

yum

configuration file, primary, 36

package cache search, 31

package installation, 27

packages, 28, 199

repositories, 29

verification prompt, 199

yumdownloader, dependencies, downloading, 32

zone transfer, 167

zsh, searching for, 28

zypper, packages, installation, 37

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Comprehensive Online Learning Environment

environment and test bank to help you study for your LPIC-1 certification

exams—included with your purchase of this book!

The online test bank includes the following:

Practice Test Questions to reinforce what you’ve learned

Bonus Practice Exams to test your knowledge of the material

Go to http://www.wiley.com/go/sybextestprep to register and gain access to

this comprehensive study tool package.

To register your book and get access to the online test bank, follow these

steps:

1. Go to bit.ly/SybexTest.

2. Select your book from the list.

3. Complete the required registration information, including answering the

security verification to prove book ownership. You will be emailed a PIN

code.

4. Follow the directions in the email or go to

https://www.wiley.com/go/sybextestprep.

5. Enter the pin code you received and click the “Activate PIN” button.

6. On the Create an Account or Login page, enter your username and

password, and click Login. A “Thank you for activating your PIN!”

message will appear. If you don’t have an account already, create a new

account.

7. Click the “Go to My Account” button to add your new book to the My

Products page.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

WILEY END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

Go to www.wiley.com/go/eula to access Wiley’s ebook EULA.

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT

Technet24

||||||||||||||||||||

NEWOUTLOOK.IT